JP2017123964A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To reduce wear of a movable accessory.SOLUTION: In a Pachinko slot 1, it is notified that a current game is in ART by driving a rotary accessory 200 during the ART in a prescribed mode, and the rotary accessory 200 is used to liven up a game during the ART. In the Pachinko slot 1, a non-operation time when no operation is accepted from a player during the ART is counted and, when the non-operation time is over a prescribed time, an operation part of the rotary accessory 200 is returned to an initial position on the assumption that the player temporarily leaves his or her seat, and operation of the rotary accessory 200 is finished.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 132

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine provided with a decoration portion corresponding to the model of the gaming machine is also known in order to enhance the gaming property. Examples of the decorative portion include those that perform a mechanical operation, light emission, or both, and such a decorative portion is generally called “a combination (movable combination)”. As a gaming machine using an accessory, for example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine in which a movable accessory that rotates at the top of a front door is installed.

JP 2014-042691 A

  By the way, in the movable accessory, the motor and the gear mechanism are consumed due to the load associated with the continuous operation for a long time, and in some cases, it becomes impossible to perform an effect specific to the movable accessory due to the occurrence of a failure. The player will be uncomfortable. Therefore, a device that can reduce the consumption of the movable accessory is required.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the consumption of a movable accessory.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal state as a state in which a game is performed. In addition, the movable part (for example, the cover member 198) includes a plurality of positions including an initial position (for example, a position at which the eyeball main body 203 becomes invisible to the player) and a predetermined position (for example, a position at which the main body 203 is exposed). A movable accessory that can be moved to the position of the movable accessory (for example, the rotating accessory 200), and an accessory control means that controls the operation of the movable accessory (for example, the sub-control circuit 101, the rotating accessory control board 78); , Time measuring means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for measuring a no-operation time indicating a period during which no player's operation is accepted, and the accessory control means is configured to move the movable device based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Ceremonial The moving part is moved from an initial position to a predetermined position (for example, a position where the cover member 198 is in a half-opened state), and the time measuring means has no operation time when the movable part of the movable accessory moves to the predetermined position. When the no-operation time counted by the timing means reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes), the accessory control means returns the movable part of the movable accessory to the initial position. A featured gaming machine.

  When the no-operation time reaches a predetermined time, there is a high possibility that the player has not performed any operation and is not playing a game. In this way, if the unique performance by the movable accessory is continued until the game is not being played, the movable accessory will be consumed, and therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the no-operation time is predetermined. When the time is reached, the movable part of the movable accessory is returned to the initial position, and consumption of the movable accessory is reduced. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the movable accessory from being consumed unnecessarily while improving the interest of the game by a specific effect using the movable accessory.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined condition is that the state in which a game is performed is the advantageous state and a game start operation is performed.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is performed during the advantageous state, the movable part of the movable accessory is positioned at a predetermined position, and a specific effect using the movable accessory is obtained during the advantageous state. It can be performed and the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the present invention, the consumption of the movable accessory can be reduced.

It is a figure which shows the function flow of the pachislot which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a whole perspective view which shows the external structure of the said pachislot. It is a schematic diagram of the display apparatus with which the said pachislot is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the said pachislot. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control circuit of the said pachislot. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the sub control circuit of the said pachislot. It is an exploded view of the above-mentioned pachislot rotary combination. It is a perspective view of the rotation combination in the state where the eyeball member of the above-mentioned pachislot is located in the neutral position. It is a perspective view of the rotation accessory in the state where the eyeball member of the pachislot is rotated to the right side. It is the perspective view which looked at the eyeball member of the above-mentioned pachislot, the left eye corner member, and the right eye corner member from the back. It is a top view of the rotation accessory in the state where the eyeball member of the pachislot is located at the neutral position. It is a top view of the rotation accessory in the state where the eyeball member of the pachislot has started to rotate rightward from the neutral position. It is a top view of the rotation accessory in the state where the eyeball member of the pachi-slot is located at the maximum movement position on the right side. It is a bottom view of the rotation accessory in the state where the eyeball member of the pachislot is located at the neutral position. It is a bottom view of the rotating accessory in a state where the eyeball member of the pachislot has started to rotate rightward from the neutral position. It is a bottom view of the rotating accessory in a state where the eyeball member of the pachi-slot is located at the maximum movement position on the right side. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state controlled by the main control circuit of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the transition conditions of the game state controlled by the main control circuit of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | positioning table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in main ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination storing area | region provided in the main RAM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the carryover combination storage area | region provided in the main RAM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the display combination storage area | region provided in the main RAM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the game state flag storage area provided in the main RAM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement stop button storage area | region provided in the main RAM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the pressing order storage area | region provided in the main RAM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol code storage area | region provided in the main RAM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state controlled by the sub control circuit of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows a part of correspondence relationship between the type of winning combination managed by the main control circuit of the pachislot and the abbreviation of winning combination managed by the sub control circuit. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the liquid crystal display device of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the management method of the production ball in the said pachislot. It is a schematic diagram of the transition lottery in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the start time lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the start time lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the start time lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the apocalypse operation lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the apocalypse MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the apocalypse MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a MAP data correspondence table showing the MAP data specified in the apocalypse MAP. It is a figure which shows the effect ball lottery table at the time of the apocalypse operation | movement memorize | stored in sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the promotion method of the production ball | bowl used in a normal gaming state and a high probability gaming state. It is a figure which shows the accessory movable lottery table memorize | stored in sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation ball promotion lottery table memorize | stored in sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table at the time of a reel stop memorize | stored in sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game in the high probability game state of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the avoidance point lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game in CZ of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the CZ_MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a CZ_MAP correspondence table showing CZ modes defined in CZ_MAP. It is a figure which shows the invalid point lottery table memorize | stored in sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the production ball lottery table in CZ memorize | stored in sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows a part of correspondence relationship between the type of winning combination managed by the main control circuit of the pachislot and the abbreviation of winning combination managed by the sub control circuit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game in BB of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table at the time of the BB start memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the mode up lottery table during BB memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the mode up lottery table during BB memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table at the time of the end in BB memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game in ART of the said pachislot. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game in ART of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART state lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the boss MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a boss MAP data correspondence table showing boss MAP data defined in the boss MAP. It is a figure which shows the effect ball lottery table during enemy determination ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the effect ball lottery table during enemy determination ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the effect ball upgrade lottery table during enemy determination ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the enemy determination ART ally power addition lottery table memorize | stored in sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the boss power lottery table during enemy determination ART memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a boss status correspondence table | surface which shows the status of the opponent in battle ART. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a battle MAP data correspondence table which shows battle MAP data prescribed | regulated to battle MAP. It is a figure which shows the effect ball lottery table during battle ART memorize | stored in sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the damage lottery table during battle ART memorize | stored in sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the damage lottery table during battle ART memorize | stored in sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART state lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART state lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the main control process of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery process of the said pachislot. It is a flow chart which shows the above-mentioned pachislot bonus end check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus operation | movement check process of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on process of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp | ramp control task of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the display method of the non-effect image in panel display. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control task of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory control task of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the mother task of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the main task of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the main board | substrate communication task of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the animation task of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the production content determination process of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start command reception of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ * ART lottery process at the time of normal start of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the apocalypse operation | movement process of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability game state transfer process of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the effect registration process in high probability of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the ART lottery process at the time of CZ start of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows ART lottery processing in BB of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process in ART of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process during enemy determination ART of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process in battle ART of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the winning action command of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ * ART lottery process at the time of the normal completion | finish of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability transition determination process of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability completion | finish determination process of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result management process in CZ of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the bonus end command reception of the sub CPU of the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the rewriting method of the production | use ball used during enemy determination ART. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table memorize | stored in sub ROM of the pachislot of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table memorize | stored in sub ROM of the pachislot of another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows ART lottery processing in BB of the sub CPU of the pachislot of another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the winning operation command reception of the sub CPU of the pachislot of another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production control process in BB of the sub CPU of the pachislot of another embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a pachi-slot showing an embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing games. In addition to the medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as game media. Further, in the present embodiment, a function in which the replay probability is higher than usual during an assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) that is a function for navigating the establishment of a specific small role with a lamp or the like and a specific number of plays. A pachi-slot having a function of assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) in which RT is simultaneously operated will be described.

  In the following description, the side (direction) from the pachislot 1 toward the player is referred to as the front side of the pachislot 1, the opposite side to the front is referred to as the rear side, and the right side and the left side as viewed from the player are the right side of the pachislot 1 (Right direction) and left side (left direction), respectively. A direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-rear direction, and a direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. The direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as the up-down direction.

[Functional flow of pachislot]
As shown in FIG. 1, when a medal is inserted by the player and the start lever 16 is operated, the pachi-slot 1 has a single value (from 0 to 65535) in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). Hereinafter, random numbers) are extracted.

  An internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 93 described later) performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determining means is based on detection of a unit game start operation on the start lever 16 by the start switch 64 (see FIG. 4) (establishment of a predetermined start condition) with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations. Determine the internal winning role.

  By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along a winning line described later is determined. Note that there are two types of symbol combinations: one that gives the player benefits such as medal payout, replay (replay) operation, bonus operation, etc .; It has been.

  Subsequently, when the player presses the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R after the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated, the reel stop control means (main CPU 93 described later) And the timing at which the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are pressed are controlled to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  Here, in the pachi-slot 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding symbols”, and the maximum number is the number of four symbols (the maximum number of sliding symbols). ).

  The reel stop control means, when an internal winning combination permitting display of a combination of symbols related to winning is determined, uses the specified time, and the combination of symbols follows the winning line as an effective line. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so as to be displayed as much as possible.

  On the other hand, for combinations of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination, the reels are used within the maximum number of sliding frames so that they will not be displayed along the winning line using the specified time. Stop the rotation of 3L, 3C, 3R.

  Thus, when the rotation of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R is all stopped, the winning determination means (main CPU 93 to be described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed along the winning line relates to winning. Determine whether or not.

  That is, the winning determination means determines whether the winning combination is established or not based on the combination of symbols stopped on the winning line, based on the fact that the change of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means. When it is determined that the prize is related to a prize, a bonus such as a medal payout is given to the player. A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot 1.

  In the present embodiment, the reel stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) that is performed first when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating is the first stop operation, the first The stop operation performed after the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed after the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

  Further, in the pachislot machine, in the above-described series of flows, video display performed by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, driving of a rotating accessory, Alternatively, various effects are performed using these combinations.

  When the start lever is operated, an effect random number value (hereinafter referred to as effect random number value) is extracted separately from the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines, by lottery, what is to be executed this time from among a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. This effect content determination means is carried out by a sub-control circuit described later.

  When the contents of the effect are determined, the effect executing means executes the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity, such as when the rotation of the reels starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, or when determining whether there is a winning. As described above, in the pachislot machine, the player has an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, a combination of symbols to be aimed at) by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination. The player's interest can be improved.

[Pachislot structure]
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the display device 10 of the pachislot machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a as a housing for housing a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable. Handles 2c are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only the handle 2c on one side is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 2c is a concave portion that is used when the pachislot 1 is carried.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, a plurality (three in the present embodiment) of reels 3L, 3C, 3R (FIG. 3) in which a plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are displayed at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction. Is housed). Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. The above-mentioned plural (for example, 21) symbols are drawn on the surface of the aforementioned sheet material.

  The front door 2b includes a door body 9 and a display device 10 that displays a predetermined effect. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a using a hinge (not shown) so as to be freely opened and closed. The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachi-slot 1.

  The front door 2b has a display window 4 through which the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R can be visually recognized. The display window 4 includes three left display windows 4L, middle display windows 4C, and right display windows 4R corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. These display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are provided at positions that overlap with the arrangement areas of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R when viewed from the front (player side), and in front of the three reels (player side) ). Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the display window 4 through the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R.

  In the present embodiment, the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are continuously arranged among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display windows stops. The size is set so that three symbols can be displayed. That is, in the frame of the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R, the upper, middle, and lower areas are provided for each reel, and one symbol is displayed in each area. In this embodiment, a line connecting the upper region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the lower region of the right reel 3R is defined as a winning line for determining whether or not a winning is made.

<Outline of Display Device 10>
Next, as shown in FIG. 3, the display device 10 includes a liquid crystal display device 11 and a panel device 400 provided on the front surface (player side) of the liquid crystal display device 11. In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 11 and the panel device 400 are linked to display an image related to a game effect and information related to the game on the display device 10.

  The liquid crystal display device 11 performs an effect by displaying an image, and also when, for example, game table information such as customization of a pachislot 1 or game history (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a menu screen) or an error occurs in the pachislot 1. An error screen can be displayed to convey the error content to the store clerk of the amusement store. An image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in accordance with the execution of the effect is sometimes referred to as an “effect image”, and an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is not related to the effect such as a menu screen or an error screen. Sometimes called “non-effect image”.

  The panel device 400 is a panel device for a so-called Illuminated Array (registered trademark), and includes a transparent light guide plate 401 and an LED (Light Emitting Diode) 403 disposed on the side of the light guide plate 401. The light guide plate 401 is a transmissive panel having transparency such as an acrylic material. As shown in FIG. 3B, the light guide plate 401 is formed with a plurality of recesses (reflection recesses 402a) having a reflection surface that reflects light along the plate surface to the player side. A latent image 402 shown in FIG. 3A is formed by the recess 402a.

  The LED 403 is disposed on the side of the light guide plate 401 and emits light along the plate surface of the light guide plate 401. As such an LED 403, an LED array or the like in which a large number of LEDs are linearly provided is preferably used. As shown in FIG. 3B, the light emitted along the plate surface of the light guide plate 401 as the LED 403 emits light is reflected to the front surface (player side) by the reflective concave portion 402a and formed by the reflective concave portion 402a. The latent image 402 becomes visible to the player.

  In such a display device 10, as shown in FIG. 3A, when the LED 403 is not emitting light, the player cannot see the latent image 402, and the player makes the light guide plate 401 transparent. It will be recognized as a board. As a result, the display device 10 produces an effect according to the content displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  On the other hand, when the LED 403 emits light, the plurality of reflective recesses 402a reflect light to the player side, whereby the latent image 402 is visualized as shown in FIG. Can be visually recognized. In such a case, the display device 10 performs an effect using the panel device 400 or an effect in which the panel device 400 and the liquid crystal display device 11 are linked.

  In the present embodiment, the latent image 402 indicating the characters “CHANCE !!” is drawn on the light guide plate 401. However, the latent image 402 is not limited to such characters, but other characters. In addition, an image such as a character's face may be drawn without being limited to characters.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the protective glass 6 is disposed on the front side of the reels 3 </ b> L, 3 </ b> C, 3 </ b> R and the display device 10 described above. Thus, the player cannot directly touch the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display device 10 (the liquid crystal display device 11 or the panel device 400).

  A decorative member 7 is attached to the upper portion of the front side of the door body 9 so as to surround the protective glass 6. The decorative member 7 constitutes a part of the exterior of the pachislot 1 and includes an upper exterior member 7a, a pair of side exterior members 7b, and a lower exterior member 7c. In particular, the upper exterior member 7 a is disposed above the liquid crystal display device 11 and in front of the rotating accessory 200 described later.

  A pedestal 12 is formed in the center of the door body 9. The pedestal 12 includes various devices (medal insertion slot 13, MAX bet button 14, 1 bet button 15, start lever 16, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, selection button 18, selection button, and buttons to be operated by the player. 19).

  The medal slot 13 is provided for receiving a medal dropped on the pachislot 1 from the outside by the player. That is, the medal slot 13 is for a medal to be inserted by the player. The medals inserted from the medal slot 13 are used for one game with a preset number (for example, three) as the upper limit, and the amount exceeding the preset number is deposited in the pachislot 1. (So-called credit function).

  The MAX bet button 14 and the 1 bet button 15 are provided to determine the number used for one game from medals deposited in the pachislot 1. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a settlement button. This checkout button is provided to pull out (discharge) medals deposited inside the pachi-slot 1 to the outside. The start lever 16 is for starting rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R) in accordance with the player's operation.

  The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and are for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels according to the player's operation. .

  The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are used when performing operations related to information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. For example, when performing a selection operation on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. Used for. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  The selection button 18 and the determination button 19 are used when performing various operations on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 (for example, calling up a menu screen or operations on the menu screen). The pedestal portion 12 is provided with a 7-segment display 28 made up of 7-segment LEDs. The 7-segment display 28 digitally stores information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of paid-outs) and the number of medals deposited within the pachislot 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits). indicate.

  At the lower part of the door main body 9, a medal payout port 21, a medal tray 22, speakers 23L, 23R and the like are provided. The medal payout port 21 guides medals discharged by driving a hopper device 43 described later to the outside. The medal tray 22 stores medals discharged from the medal payout opening 21. In addition, the speakers 23L and 23R output sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the performance.

  A waist panel 29 is provided between the pedestal portion 12 and the medal tray 22, and the waist panel 29 displays various information such as the model name and role configuration of the pachislot machine 1.

<Electric configuration of pachislot machine>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachi-slot 1.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the pachi-slot 1 includes a main control board 41 disposed in the cabinet 2a and a sub control board 42 disposed in the front door 2b. The main control board 41 is electrically connected to the reel relay terminal board 51, the setting key switch 52, the cabinet side relay board 53, the door relay terminal board 54, and the power board 44 b of the power supply device 44. ing.

  The reel relay terminal plate 51 is disposed inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal board 51 is electrically connected to stepping motors (not shown) of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and relays signals output from the main control board 41 to the stepping motors.

  The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting of the pachislot 1 or when checking the setting of the pachislot 1. The cabinet-side relay board 53 is electrically connected to an external concentration terminal board 56, a hopper device 43, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 57.

  The cabinet-side relay board 53 relays signals output from the main control board 41 to the external concentration terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57. That is, the external concentration terminal board 56, the hopper device 43 and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are connected to the main control board 41 via the cabinet side relay board 53.

  The external concentration terminal board 56 is attached to the cabinet 2 a and is provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot 1.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 passes through a medal auxiliary storage (not shown). The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage is full of medals. A power switch 44 a is connected to the power board 44 b of the power device 44.

  When the power switch 44a is ON, the power of the pachislot 1 is turned on, and necessary power is supplied from the power supply device 44 to the pachislot 1. When the power switch 44a is OFF, the power of the pachislot 1 is cut off, and the supply of power from the power supply device 44 to the pachislot 1 is stopped. The door relay terminal plate 54 includes a medal sensor 46, a door open / close monitoring switch 61, a BET switch 62, a settlement switch 63, a start switch 64, a stop switch board 65, a game operation display board 66, a selection switch 67, a decision switch 68, and a sub switch. A relay board 69 is connected.

  That is, the medal sensor 46, the door open / close monitoring switch 61, the BET switch 62, the checkout switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66, the selection switch 67, the decision switch 68, and the sub relay board 69 The relay terminal board 54 is connected to the main control board 41.

  The medal sensor 46 detects that the medal has passed through a selector (not shown) and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The door opening / closing monitoring switch 61 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot 1. The BET switch 62 detects that the MAX bet button 14 and the 1 bet button 15 (see FIG. 2) have been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

  The settlement switch 63 detects that a settlement button (not shown) has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The start switch 64 detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

  The stop switch substrate 65 is a substrate constituting a circuit for stopping the rotating reel and a circuit for displaying the stopable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch board 65 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each stop button 17L, 17C, 17R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 66 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 28 when accepting insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatable and when replaying. It is a substrate for making it. A 7-segment display 28 and an LED 70 are connected to the game operation display board 66. For example, the LED 70 lights a mark for displaying the start of a game, a mark for performing a replay, and the like.

  The selection switch 67 detects that the selection button 18 has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The decision switch 68 detects that the decision button 19 has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The main control board 41 outputs the detection result output from the selection switch 67 or the determination switch 68 to the sub control board 42 as necessary.

  The sub relay board 69 relays the wiring connecting the sub control board 42 and the main control board 41. The sub-relay board 69 relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 42 and a plurality of boards disposed around the sub-control board 42. That is, the sub-relay board 69 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 42, the sound I / O board 71, the LED board 72, the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74, and the rotating accessory control board 78. Yes.

  The sub control board 42 is connected to the main control board 41 through the door relay terminal board 54 and the sub relay board 69. The sub control board 42 is electrically connected to the sound I / O board 71, the LED board 72, the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74, and the rotating accessory control board 78 via the sub relay board 69. ing.

  The sound I / O board 71 outputs sound to the speakers 23L and 23R. The LED board 72 displays the blinking pattern by causing the LED group 25 showing a specific example of the light source to emit light according to the effect executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 6). Note that the LED board 72 controls the LED group 25 that illuminates the waist panel 29 and the decorative member 7, and the LEDs provided on the rotating accessory 200.

  The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74 stores a history of opening / closing of the front door 2b. The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74 outputs a signal for displaying an error on the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 42 (sub control circuit 101) when the front door 2b is opened.

  The rotating combination control board 78 drives the rotating combination 200 in accordance with the effects executed by the control of the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 6). The rotating combination 200 is driven and controlled by the rotating combination control board 78 to rotate the eyeball member 205 described later. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 and the rotating accessory control board 78 constitute an accessory control means, and the eyeball member 205 is a rotating accessory according to the effect executed by the control of the sub control circuit 101. The drive is controlled by the control board 78.

  A ROM cartridge substrate 76, a liquid crystal relay substrate 77, and a panel control substrate 79 are connected to the sub control substrate 42. The ROM cartridge substrate 76 is a substrate for managing production image (video), sound, light (LED group 25), driving data of the rotating combination 200, and communication data. The liquid crystal relay substrate 77 is a substrate that relays the wiring connecting the sub control substrate 42 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

  The panel control board 79 is a board that relays wiring for connecting the sub-control board 42 and the LEDs 403 constituting the panel device 400, and executes a plurality of types of illumination display using the panel device 400. The panel control board 79 is configured with a drive circuit that inputs data that is the basis of the light emission mode from the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 6) of the sub control board 42, An image corresponding to the latent image 402 is displayed on the panel device 400 in various modes.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 constituted by the main control board 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachi-slot 1. As shown in FIG. 5, a main control circuit 91 as a main control unit includes a microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 41 as a main component, and controls the progress of the game.

  The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95. The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (command signals) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  The main CPU 93 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  The main CPU 93 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R after detecting the reel index. Thereby, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated).

  The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. For example, the reel index is provided at a predetermined position of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and the light sensor and the light receiving unit are rotated by rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Detection is performed by a reel position detection unit (not shown) including a detection piece interposed therebetween.

  Here, management of the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding symbols is basically set to 4 symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L in the middle of the display window 4 and each symbol within the range up to four symbols ahead can be stopped in the middle of the display window 4. It becomes a simple design.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the sub control circuit 101 constituted by the sub control board 42 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot 1.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the sub control circuit 101 as the sub control unit is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and the content of the presentation is determined and executed based on the command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91. And the like, and controls peripheral devices such as the liquid crystal display device 11, the rotating accessory 200, various LEDs, and the speakers 23L and 23R.

  The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106. In response to the command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91, the sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, light, and driving of the rotating accessory 200 according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

  The ROM cartridge substrate 76 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area. A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area.

  For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91 and an effect registration task for extracting and registering effect contents (effect data) by extracting effect random numbers. Is included. In addition, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined production content, an accessory control task for controlling the rotating accessory 200, a lamp control task for controlling output of light by the light source of the LED, An audio control task for controlling sound output from the speakers 23L and 23R is included.

  The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to creation of video. Also included are a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to the light on / off pattern, and the like.

  The sub-RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub-RAM 103 is configured to include a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as a work area and a backup SRAM (Static RAM). When the power is turned on, various data stored in the SRAM are copied to the DRAM, so that the sub-control circuit Various information used in 101 is restored to the contents at the time of power-off.

  The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create a video according to the animation data designated by the content of the presentation, and display the created video on the liquid crystal display device 11. Further, the sub CPU 102 drives the rotating combination 200 based on the combination movable data designated by the effect contents.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers 23L and 23R to output sounds such as BGM according to the sound data designated by the contents of the effects. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls lighting and extinguishing of the LEDs according to the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

<Structure of rotating tool>
Next, the rotating combination 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 7 to 16. The rotating combination 200 according to the present embodiment constitutes the movable combination of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the rotating combination 200 is provided on the front side of the pachislot 1 with respect to the display device 10. The rotating accessory 200 includes a cover member 198 that can be opened and closed vertically. The cover member 198 constitutes the movable part of the present invention. In addition, a transparent lens 199 (not shown) is provided in front of the cover member 198 so that the rotating accessory 200 is not directly touched by the player.

  When the cover member 198 is opened, as shown in FIG. 8, the eyeball main body 203 of the rotating accessory 200 is exposed. Further, when the cover member 198 is closed, the eyeball main body 203 of the rotating accessory 200 becomes invisible to the player. Note that the rotating combination 200 is a combination (gimmic) that simulates eyes, the cover member 198 corresponds to a spear, and the eyeball body 203 corresponds to an eyeball. The cover member 198 is opened and closed by an actuator (not shown) such as a motor.

  7 to 9, the rotating accessory 200 includes an upper base 202, an eyeball main body 203, and a lower base 204.

  The eyeball main body 203 is provided at the eyeball member 205 extending in the left-right direction of the pachislot 1, the left eye bottom member 206 provided at one end in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205, and the other end in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205. Right-eye-butt member 207. Note that the rotation direction and the left-right direction of the eyeball member 205 are the rotation direction and the left-right direction as viewed from the player.

  The eyeball member 205 is formed in a hemispherical shape having an arcuate surface 205A along the extending direction, and an image 205a imitating the eyeball is formed on the arcuate surface 205A. The eyeball member 205 is rotatable in the left-right direction along the arcuate surface 205A. The eyeball member 205 is composed of a lens.

  When the eyeball member 206 and the right eyeball member 207 are not engaged with the eyeball member 205, the eyeball member 205, the left eyeball member 206, and the right eyeball member 207 are arranged at the overlapping positions. Further, the left eye bottom member 206 and the right eye bottom member 207 are provided so as to overlap with the rear of the eyeball member 205 when viewed from the player side. Specifically, the rear ends of the left eye corner member 206 and the right eye corner member 207 are located behind the rear end in the width direction of the eyeball member 205.

  The front ends of the left eye corner member 206 and the right eye corner member 207 are installed in front of the eyeball member 205 so as to cover both end sides in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205, and are rotatable relative to the eyeball member 205. It has become. Engagement protrusions 206A and 207A are formed on the back surfaces of the left eye hip member 206 and the right eye hip member 207, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, an engagement protrusion 205 </ b> B is formed at one end (left end) in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205. The engagement protrusion 205B can be engaged with an engagement protrusion 206A formed on the back surface of the left eye corner member 206.

An engagement protrusion 205C is formed on the other end portion (right end portion) of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction. The engagement protrusion 205C can be engaged with an engagement protrusion 207A formed on the back surface of the right eye corner member 207.

  The engagement protrusion 206A of the left eye corner member 206 is positioned inward in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205 with respect to the engagement protrusion 205B of the eyeball member 205. Thus, when the eyeball member 205 rotates in the right direction, which is one side of the rotation direction, the engagement protrusion 205B engages with the engagement protrusion 206A. Thereafter, when the eyeball member 205 further rotates in the right direction, the left eye corner member 206 moves together with the eyeball member 205 in the right direction.

The engagement protrusion 207A of the right eye corner member 207 is positioned inward in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205 with respect to the engagement protrusion 205C of the eyeball member 205. As a result, when the eyeball member 205 rotates in the left direction, which is the other side of the rotation direction, the engagement protrusion 205C is engaged with the engagement protrusion 207A. Thereafter, when the eyeball member 205 further rotates leftward, the right eye butt member 207 moves to the left together with the eyeball member 205.

  As shown in FIG. 10, a protruding plate 208 is provided on the back surface of the eyeball member 205, and the protruding plate 208 protrudes rearward from the back surface of the eyeball member 205. On the upper surface of the protruding plate 208, three boss portions 208A (only the central boss portion 208A is shown in FIG. 10) are erected.

  A bush 209A is rotatably attached to the boss portion 208A with respect to the boss portion 208A. The bush 209A is prevented from coming off from the boss portion 208A by a screw 209C via a washer 209B.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the upper base 202 includes a base main body 210 that extends in the left-right direction, and a semicircular portion 211 that protrudes forward from the base main body 210. A guide groove 210A extending in the left-right direction is formed in the base body 210, and a rack member 212 is inserted into the guide groove 210A so as to be movable in the left-right direction.

  Rack teeth 212A are formed at the right end of the rack member 212, and the relay gear 213 is engaged with the rack teeth 212A. The relay gear 213 is rotatably supported by the base body 210, and the relay gear 213 meshes with the output gear 214 </ b> A of the motor 214. The motor 214 is driven by the rotating accessory control board 78.

  The motor 214 is supported by the base body 210 and rotates the output gear 214A. When the output gear 214A rotates forward and backward, the rack member 212 reciprocates in the left-right direction via the relay gear 213.

  The rack member 212 is provided with a guide piece 212 </ b> B, and the guide piece 212 </ b> B projects forward from the rack member 212. A long hole 212b extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the guide piece 212B. A bush 209A attached to the boss 208A located at the center of the three bosses 208A formed on the upper surface of the protruding plate 208 is slidably fitted into the long hole 212b.

  The semicircular portion 211 is formed with a guide groove 211A that bends in the rotational direction of the eyeball member 205, in other words, in the same direction as the direction along the arcuate surface 205A. The above-mentioned three bushes 209A are slidably fitted in the guide groove 211A. Of the three bushes 209A, the central bush 209A is further fitted into the elongated hole 212b through the guide groove 211A.

  Thus, when the rack member 212 moves in the left-right direction, the center bush 209A moves along the guide groove 211A while moving in the longitudinal direction in the elongated hole 212b, so that the eyeball member 205 moves in the left-right direction. Rotate.

  Engagement pieces 206 </ b> B and 207 </ b> B are formed on the upper part of the left eye corner member 206 and the right eye corner member 207, respectively. As shown in FIGS. 7 and 11 to 13, guide grooves 210 </ b> B and 210 </ b> C are formed in the base body 210, and the guide grooves 210 </ b> B and 210 </ b> C extend in the same direction as the rotation direction of the eyeball member 205. Yes. Engagement pieces 206B and 207B are engaged with the guide grooves 210B and 210C, respectively, and the left eye corner member 206 and the right eye corner member 207 are guided in the guide grooves 210B and 210C, respectively, and rotate in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 14 to 16, guide grooves 204 </ b> A and 204 </ b> B are formed in the lower base 204, and the guide grooves 204 </ b> A and 204 </ b> B extend in the same direction as the rotation direction of the eyeball member 205. doing.

  A pair of bushes 215A and 215B are rotatably provided at the lower portion of the left eye corner member 206, and the bushes 215A and 215B are slidably fitted into the guide groove 204A. A pair of bushes 215C and 215D are rotatably provided at the lower portion of the right eye corner member 207, and the bushes 215C and 215D are slidably fitted into the guide groove 204B.

  Thereby, the engaging pieces 206B and 207B are guided to the guide grooves 210B and 210C of the upper base 202, and the bushes 215A, 215B, 215C and 215D are guided to the guide grooves 204A and 204B of the lower base 204, The left eye bottom member 206 and the right eye bottom member 207 are stably moved in the rotation direction of the eyeball member 205.

  7 and 8, a left eye corner member 216 and a right eye corner member 217 are fixed to the lower base 204. The left eye butt member 216 and the right eye butt member 217 are located in front of the movable left eye butt member 206 and the right eye butt member 207, and the left eye butt member 206 and the right eye butt member 207 in a state where the eyeball member 205 is located in the neutral position. A part of is covered from the front. The state in which the eyeball member 205 is positioned at the neutral position is a state in which an image 205a simulating the eyeball of the eyeball member 205 faces the front as shown in FIGS.

  In a state where the eyeball member 205 is located at the neutral position, the left eye corner member 216 covers the left half of the left eye corner member 206. On the other hand, the right half of the left eye corner member 206 is not covered by the left eye corner member 216 and can be viewed from the front. The right eye corner member 217 covers the right half of the right eye corner member 207. On the other hand, the left half of the right eye corner member 207 is not covered by the right eye corner member 217 and can be viewed from the front.

  7 and 14, one end of the wire 218 is attached to the bush 215 </ b> A of the left eye corner member 206, and the other end of the wire 218 is attached to one end of the coil spring 219. The other end of the coil spring 219 is attached to the lower base 204, and the coil spring 219 biases the left eye bottom member 206 in the left direction, which is the other direction of the rotation of the eyeball member 205.

  A pulley 220 is provided between the coil spring 219 and the left eye butt member 206, and the pulley 220 is slidably in contact with the wire 218, and the coil spring 219 is lateral to the one end in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205 ( The wire 218 is bent so as to be located on the left side).

  One end of the wire 221 is attached to the bush 215 </ b> C of the right eye corner member 207, and the other end of the wire 221 is attached to one end of the coil spring 222. The other end of the coil spring 222 is attached to the lower base 204, and the coil spring 222 biases the right eye bottom member 207 in the right direction, which is one direction of rotation of the eyeball member 205.

  A pulley 223 is provided between the coil spring 222 and the right eye butt member 207, and the pulley 223 is in sliding contact with the wire 221, and the coil spring 222 is lateral to the one end in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205 ( The wire 221 is bent so as to be positioned on the right side).

  Here, the rotating combination 200 is provided with an LED substrate (not shown) including a plurality of LEDs (not shown), and the LED substrate is provided behind the eyeball member 205. The eyeball member 205 is irradiated from behind by the LED, and the light illuminated on the eyeball member 205 is irradiated to the front of the pachislot 1 through the lens 199.

  In the rotating combination 200 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, when the output gear 214 </ b> A is rotated counterclockwise by the motor 214 from the state in which the eyeball member 205 is positioned at the neutral position, the relay gear 213 is interposed. The rack member 212 moves to the right. At this time, as shown in FIG. 12, the central bush 209A (see FIG. 7) fitted in the long hole 212b is pressed rightward by the guide piece 212B.

  Since the three bushes 209A are slidably fitted in the guide grooves 211A formed in the semicircular portion 211, when the central bush 209A is pressed rightward by the guide piece 212B, the eyeball member 205 is It rotates rightward along the guide groove 211A via the three bushes 209A.

  The guide groove 211A is curved in the same direction as the rotation direction of the eyeball member 205, and the three bushes 209A move rightward along the curved guide groove 211A. The central bush 209A is slidably fitted in the elongated hole 212b of the guide piece 212B of the rack member 212, and the elongated hole 212b extends along the front-rear direction of the pachislot 1. When the bush 209A moves to the right along the guide groove 211A, the center bush 209A slides back and forth along the elongated hole 212b, so that the eyeball member 205 smoothly rotates along the guide groove 211A. .

  When the eyeball member 205 moves in the right direction, the engagement protrusion 206A of the left eye bottom member 206 is engaged with the engagement protrusion 205B formed at one end in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205 (FIGS. 12 and 13). Reference), the left eye bottom member 206 moves in the right direction together with the eyeball member 205 while overlapping with one end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction behind the eyeball member 205.

  When the left eye corner member 206 is moved in the right direction, the wire 218 pulls the coil spring 219 from the moment when the engagement protrusion 205B is engaged with the engagement protrusion 206A (state of FIG. 15), as shown in FIG. The coil spring 219 extends to urge the left eye corner member 206 to the left side.

  Since the engaging protrusion 206A of the left eye corner member 206 is located inward of the extending direction of the eyeball member 205 with respect to the engaging protrusion 205B of the eyeball member 205, the left eye hip member 206 and the eyeball member 205 are directed rightward. Even if it is movable, the left eye butt member 206 is not pulled by the coil spring 219 and pulled back leftward. In this way, the eyeball member 205 moves in the right direction. 9, 13, and 14 show a state where the eyeball member 205 has moved to the maximum movement position in the right direction.

  When the output gear 214A is rotated in the clockwise direction by the motor 214 from the state where the eyeball member 205 has moved to the maximum movement position in the right direction, the rack member 212 is moved in the left direction via the relay gear 213. At this time, the central bush 209A (see FIG. 7) is pressed leftward by the guide piece 212B.

  When the central bush 209A is pressed leftward by the guide piece 212B, the eyeball member 205 rotates to the left along the guide groove 211A via the three bushes 209A. When the eyeball member 205 rotates leftward toward the neutral position, the left eye butt member 206 is moved to the left together with the eyeball member 205 by being pulled by the coil spring 219. When the eyeball member 205 rotates from the maximum movement position in the right direction to the neutral position, the left eye corner member 206 returns to the initial position. The state in which the eyeball member 205 moves from the right direction toward the neutral position is shown in the order of FIG. 13 (FIG. 16), FIG. 12 (FIG. 15), and FIG. 11 (FIG. 14).

  When the output gear 214A is rotated in the clockwise direction by the motor 214 from the state where the eyeball member 205 is located at the neutral position, the rack member 212 moves to the left via the relay gear 213. At this time, the central bush 209A (see FIG. 7) fitted in the elongated hole 212b is pressed leftward by the guide piece 212B.

  When the central bush 209A is pressed leftward by the guide piece 212B, the eyeball member 205 rotates to the left along the guide groove 211A via the three bushes 209A.

  When the three bushes 209A move in the left direction along the guide groove 211A, the center bush 209A slides in the front-rear direction along the elongated hole 212b, so that the eyeball member 205 smoothly moves along the guide groove 211A. Rotate.

  Further, when the eyeball member 205 moves leftward, the eyeball member 207A of the right eye bottom member 207 is engaged with the engagement protrusion 205C formed at the other end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction. The right eye butt member 207 moves to the left together with the eyeball member 205 while overlapping the other end portion in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205 at the rear of 205.

  When the right eye butt member 207 is moved in the left direction, the wire 221 pulls the coil spring 222, whereby the coil spring 222 is expanded and urges the right eye butt member 207 to the right side. Since the engagement protrusion 207A of the right eye butt member 207 is positioned inwardly in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205 with respect to the engagement protrusion 205C of the eyeball member 205, the right eye butt member 207 moves leftward together with the eyeball member 205. Even if it moves, the right eye butt member 207 is not pulled by the coil spring 222 and pulled back in the right direction. In this way, the eyeball member 205 moves in the left direction.

  When the output gear 214A is rotated counterclockwise by the motor 214 from the state in which the eyeball member 205 has moved to the maximum leftward movement position, the rack member 212 moves to the right via the relay gear 213. At this time, the central bush 209A (see FIG. 7) is pressed rightward by the guide piece 212B.

  When the central bush 209A is pressed rightward by the guide piece 212B, the eyeball member 205 rotates rightward along the guide groove 211A via the three bushes 209A. When the eyeball member 205 rotates rightward toward the neutral position, the right eye butt member 207 is moved to the right together with the eyeball member 205 by being pulled by the coil spring 219. When the eyeball member 205 rotates from the maximum leftward movement position to the neutral position, the right eye corner member 207 returns to the initial position.

  As described above, the eyeball member 205 rotates between the right direction and the left direction through the neutral position, so that it is possible to produce an effect as if the eyeball moves in the left-right direction.

[Main game state transition flow]
Next, a gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) of the pachi-slot 1 of this embodiment and its transition flow will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of bonus winning / acting, the type of internal winning combination related to replay, and the winning probability thereof. As shown in FIG. 17, the main control circuit 91 distinguishes a bonus non-winning state, an inter-flag state, and a bonus state based on whether or not a bonus (BB) is won / actuated. Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a state where the bonus is not won and the bonus is not activated, and the inter-flag state is a state where the bonus is won and the bonus is not activated, and the bonus state. Is a state in which the bonus is activated.

  Further, the main control circuit 91 provides six types of states, RT0 gaming state to RT5 gaming state, in which the internal winning combination related to replay and the winning probability are different from each other. The RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that the role related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and the RT3 gaming state and the RT5 gaming state are the internal winning combination related to the replay. Is a gaming state in which the probability determined as a medium probability is medium. In addition, the RT4 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the combination related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is high, and is the most advantageous gaming state in the bonus non-winning state.

  The main control circuit 91 determines the RT0 game distinguished based on the bonus non-winning state, the inter-flag state, and the bonus state, which are distinguished based on whether or not the bonus is won / actuated, and the type of the internal winning combination relating to the replay and its winning probability. From the state to the RT5 game state, the game state on the main side in the pachislot 1 is managed. More specifically, the main control circuit 91 sets the gaming state in the pachislot 1 as the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, and the bonus non-winning state. RT3 gaming state, RT4 gaming state in bonus non-winning state, RT5 gaming state in flag state, RT0 gaming state in bonus state, RT2 gaming state in bonus state, RT4 gaming state in bonus state, and RB gaming state in bonus state 10 types of states are managed.

  Whether or not the bonus is won is managed based on data stored in an internal winning combination storing area (see FIG. 59 described later) provided in the main RAM 95. For example, when data 1 is stored in bit 2 of the internal winning combination storing area 4, the bonus is won. Further, the presence / absence of the bonus operation and the RT gaming state are managed based on data stored in a gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62 described later) provided in the main RAM 95. For example, when data 1 is stored in bit 3 and bit 5 of the gaming state flag storage area, the bonus (BB gaming state) is activated and the player is in the RT4 gaming state.

  RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 in the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 data in the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and data of all bits in the gaming state flag storing area is 0) Is one of the basic gaming states during the bonus non-winning state. As shown in FIG. 17, from the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, and the inter-flag state There is a possibility of transition to the RT5 gaming state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, in the bonus non-winning state of RT0 gaming state, when a combination of symbols relating to (1) bell spilled eyes or RT1 transition lip is displayed, the bonus non-winning state Transition to the RT1 gaming state. Note that the bell spilled eyes are a combination of symbols that are displayed when the answer is incorrect in the push order determined for each push order bell type when a push order bell to be described later is determined as an internal winning combination. The RT1 transition lip is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing determined for each type of pressing order lip when a pressing order lip described later is determined as an internal winning combination.

  In addition, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when the symbol combination related to (2) RT4 transition lip is displayed, the state shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state. The RT4 transition lip is a combination of symbols displayed when the correct answer is given in the push order determined for each push order lip type when the push order lip described later is determined as the internal winning combination, or described later. This is a combination of symbols displayed when “F_chance lip 2” or “F_slip chance lip 2” is determined as an internal winning combination.

  In addition, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when the symbol combination related to (3) RT3 transition lip is displayed, the state shifts to the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state. The RT3 transition lip is a combination of symbols displayed when “F_slip chance lip 1” or “F_cherry lip” described later is determined as an internal winning combination.

  In addition, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when the combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state. Note that the role related to BB is any one of “F_Black Black Black”, “F_Red Red Red”, “F_White White White”, “F_Red Red White”, and “F_White White Red” which will be described later. When the combination related to BB is determined as an internal winning combination, it is carried over as an internal winning combination until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed (that is, until the operation of BB starts). It is a role.

  Subsequently, the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 in the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 data in the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and bit 0 data in the gaming state flag storing area 1) is one of the basic gaming states during the bonus non-winning state. As shown in FIG. 17, the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state may shift to the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when (4) the number of fixed games (5 games in the present embodiment) elapses, the RT0 game in the bonus non-winning state has elapsed. Transition to the state. Further, in the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, (5) when the combination related to BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state.

  Also, the bonus non-winning state RT2 gaming state (bits 2 to 7 in the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 data in the internal winning combination storing area 5 is 0, and bit 1 data in the gaming state flag storing area is 1) is a gaming state in which there is a possibility of transition after the operation of BB is completed. In this embodiment, at the end of the bonus, the bonus game state is shifted to the bonus non-winning state while the RT gaming state in the bonus state is maintained. For this reason, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state shifts when the bonus state ends in the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state. Further, as shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility of transition from the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, in the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when the combination of symbols relating to (1) bell spill is displayed, the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state Migrate to Further, in the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when the (5) BB winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the state transitions to the inter-flag state RT5 gaming state.

  Also, the bonus non-winning RT3 gaming state (bits 2 to 7 in the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 data in the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and bit 2 data in the gaming state flag storing area is 1) is a gaming state in which there is a high probability that a combination related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination as compared to the RT0 gaming state, which is the basic gaming state of pachislot 1. As shown in FIG. 17, the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state may shift to the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when the number of fixed games (5 games in this embodiment) has elapsed, the RT0 game in the bonus non-winning state has elapsed. Transition to the state. Further, in the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, if the (5) BB winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the inter-flag state RT5 gaming state.

  Further, the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and the data of bit 3 of the gaming state flag storing area is 1) is an advantageous state in which it is possible to play a game without reducing medals with the highest probability that the winning combination related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility of transition from the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, in the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when a combination of symbols relating to (1) bell spill or RT1 transition lip is displayed, the bonus non-winning state Transition to the RT1 gaming state. Further, in the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when the (5) BB winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state is entered.

  In addition, the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state (the data of any of bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area 5 is 1 and the bit 4 of the gaming state flag storing area is The data 1) is between so-called BB flags where the role related to BB is carried over as an internal winning combination, and the game stays until a combination of symbols corresponding to the BB carried over as an internal winning combination is displayed State. As shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility of transition from the RT5 gaming state in the flag state to the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the inter-flag state RT5 gaming state, (6) a combination of symbols corresponding to the carry-over BB is displayed, and when BB is activated, RT0 in the bonus state Transition to gaming state.

  RT0 gaming state in the bonus state (bits 2 to 7 in the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bit 0 data in the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and bit 5 data in the gaming state flag storing area is 1) When BB is activated, the game state is the first stay. During the bonus state, the game starts from the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state and shifts to another gaming state. As shown in FIG. 17, from the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, when the operation of (10) BB ends, the state shifts to the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (before and after the bonus ends) RT gaming state is maintained). The operation of BB ends when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state exceeds 59.

  Further, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, if the (7) JACIN winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state. The role related to JACIN is any one of “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3” described later. Here, as shown in FIG. 37, which will be described later, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, since there is a high probability that the combination related to JACIN is determined as an internal winning combination (about 52%), basically the operation of the BB is Before the end, the winning combination related to JACIN is determined as an internal winning combination, and the state shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state. When these JACIN winning combinations are determined as internal winning combinations, until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed (that is, until the RB operation starts), only during the bonus state, the internal winning combination It is a so-called carryover role that is carried over.

  The RT4 gaming state in the bonus state (the data of bits 1 to 3 in the internal winning combination storage area 5 is 0, and the data of bits 3 and 5 in the gaming state flag storage area is 1) has a role related to JACIN. Between so-called RB flags in the bonus state carried over as an internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 17, from the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RB gaming state in the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, in the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state, (10) when the operation of the BB ends, the state shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (before and after the bonus ends) RT gaming state is maintained). Also, in the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state, (8) a combination of symbols corresponding to the carry-over JACIN is displayed, and when the RB is activated, the game state transitions to the RB gaming state in the bonus state.

  Also, the RB gaming state in the bonus state (bits 2 to 7 in the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bits 0 to 3 in the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and bits 5 and 6 in the gaming state flag storing area 1) is a gaming state that shifts when the RB operation starts during the bonus state. As shown in FIG. 33 to be described later, in the RB gaming state in the bonus state, there is a high probability (about 65%) that “out of game” is determined as an internal winning combination, and this is basically a disadvantageous state. In the pachi-slot 1 of the form, during the bonus state, the game is played while maintaining the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state without displaying the combination of symbols according to the carry-over JACIN.

  As shown in FIG. 17, from the RB gaming state in the bonus state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the bonus RB gaming state, when the operation of (10) BB is completed, the state shifts to the bonus non-winning state RT2 gaming state. In addition, in the RB gaming state in the bonus state, (9) when the operation of the RB ends, the state shifts to the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state. In addition, in the RB operation, a combination of symbols other than “out” is displayed eight times in the bonus state RB gaming state (eight winnings), and twelve games are performed in the bonus state RB gaming state. Or when the operation of BB is completed.

  Also, RT2 gaming state in the bonus state (bits 2 to 7 in the internal winning combination storing area 4 and bits 0 to 3 in the internal winning combination storing area 5 are 0, and bits 1 and 5 in the gaming state flag storing area The data 1) is a gaming state that shifts after the RB gaming state in the bonus state. As shown in FIG. 17, from the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state. Specifically, in the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state, when the operation of (10) BB is finished, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is entered (the RT gaming state is maintained before and after the bonus is finished). In addition, in the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state, when the (7) JACIN winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes the RT control means, and based on the determined internal winning combination, the RT gaming state between the RT0 gaming state and the RT5 gaming state according to the respective transition conditions To migrate.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Pattern arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 19 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between 21 symbol positions “0” to “20” and symbols corresponding to these symbol positions.

  Symbol positions “0” to “20” indicate the positions of symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “20” can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  The types of symbols are “White 7”, “Red 7”, “BAR”, “Lip 1”, “Lip 2”, “Lip 3”, “Cherry 1”, “Cherry 2”, “Watermelon” and “ Includes "bell".

  The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 19 assigns the symbol located in the middle stage of the display window 4 when the reel index is detected (the symbol passing through the middle stage of the display window 4) to the symbol position “0”, and the reel 3L. Correspondences in which symbol positions “0” to “20” are assigned to each of the 21 symbols are defined in the order of movement in the 3C and 3R rotation directions.

  In this way, by using the middle stage of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of symbol positioned in the middle stage of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
Further, as shown in FIG. 19, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 19 represents codes for identifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  As described above, the symbols used in the pachislot 1 according to this embodiment are “white 7”, “red 7”, “BAR”, “lip 1”, “lip 2”, “lip 3”, “cherry 1”, There are 10 types of "Cherry 2", "Watermelon" and "Bell".

  In the symbol code table, “00000001” is assigned as data to the “white 7” symbol (symbol code 1). “00000010” is assigned as data to the “red 7” symbol (symbol code 2). “00000011” is assigned as data to the “BAR” symbol (symbol code 3).

  Similarly, for “Lip 1”, “Lip 2”, “Lip 3”, “Cherry 1”, “Cherry 2”, “Watermelon” and “Bell” symbols (symbol codes 4 to 10), As data, “00000100” to “0000001010” are assigned.

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table is a combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of privilege, data stored in the main RAM 95 when the symbol combination is displayed, and when the symbol combination is displayed. Stipulates the correspondence with the benefits (number of medals paid out).

  In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination displayed on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R along the winning line matches the symbol combination (combination) defined in the symbol combination table, It is determined. When it is determined that a prize is won, the player is given benefits such as a medal payout, a re-game operation, and a bonus game operation. It should be noted that when the symbol combination displayed along the winning line does not match any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called “out”. In other words, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to “missing” is not defined in the symbol combination table, thereby defining the symbol combination of “missing”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and an item “displacement” may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define “disappearance”.

  In the data column in the symbol combination table, information for identifying a symbol combination displayed along the winning line is defined. Specifically, in the data column, “storage area (data for designating a display combination storage area (see FIG. 61) to be described later)” in which data of the corresponding symbol combination is stored, and the storage area “Data (data for designating bits corresponding to combinations of symbols in 1-byte data)” to be stored is defined. In the present embodiment, the combination of each symbol is determined by using 45 1-byte storage areas. For example, “R_RT transition A_01” shown in FIG. 20 is determined by storing 1 in bit 0 of the display combination storage area 1.

  The combination defined in the symbol combination table means a symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the winning line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. Each combination is defined with a combination name corresponding to the role of the combination and the type of symbol constituting the combination.

  The number of payouts defined in the symbol combination table defines the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding symbol combination (combination) is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 30, when the combination “C_CD bell” is displayed, ten medals are paid out.

  In the present embodiment, a large number of symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 20 to 32 are classified into a plurality of types according to their roles. The role type column in the symbol combination table defines the role of each symbol combination. More specifically, in the present embodiment, a large number of symbol combinations are classified into six types: “RT transition eye”, “BB”, “JACIN”, “replay”, “RT transition replay”, and “winning”.

  The role type “RT transition” is a combination of symbols in which the RT gaming state transition is performed when displayed, and corresponds to “R_RT transition A_01” to “R_RT transition F_08” shown in FIG. . These “RT transition eyes” are combinations of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect in the pressing order determined for each type of the above-mentioned pressing order bells, and are the “bell spilling eyes” described above. That is, if the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination and the answer is incorrect in the push order, any of the symbol combinations corresponding to the role type “RT transition” may be displayed. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the role type “RT transition” is displayed, there is a possibility of transition to the RT1 gaming state.

  The role type “BB” is a combination of symbols in which the operation of the BB is performed when displayed, and corresponds to “C_BB1” to “C_BB5_02” shown in FIG. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the role type “BB” is displayed, the operation of BB is started and the state shifts to the RT0 gaming state.

  The role type “JACIN” is a combination of symbols in which the RB is operated when displayed, and corresponds to “C_JACIN1” to “C_JACIN3” shown in FIG. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the role type “JACIN” is displayed, the RB operation starts, and after the operation of the RB ends, the state shifts to the RT2 gaming state.

  The role type “re-game” is a combination of symbols in which the re-game is performed when displayed, and corresponds to “C_CU white” to “C_KY lip_09” shown in FIG. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the role type “replay” is displayed, the replay is activated. Note that when the combination of symbols corresponding to the role type “re-game” is displayed, the transition of the RT gaming state is not performed.

  The role type “RT transition re-game” is a combination of symbols that may cause the transition of the RT game state along with the re-game operation when displayed. The “C_CU Rip” shown in FIGS. _01 ”to“ C_Swim FKF_18 ”. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the role type “RT transition re-game” is displayed, the re-game is activated, and there is a possibility of transition to various RT gaming states depending on the combination of symbols.

  For example, when “C_CU Lip — 01” to “C_CU Lip — 03” shown in FIG. 22 are displayed, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state. These “C_CU Lip — 01” to “C_CU Lip — 03” are combinations of symbols that may be displayed when the answer is incorrect in the pressing order determined for each type of the above-mentioned pressing order Lip. “Transition Lip”. That is, when the push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination and the answer is incorrect in the push order, one of “C_CU lip — 01” to “C_CU lip — 03” is displayed.

  In addition, when “C_C Lip 01” to “C_Bell FKC_12” shown in FIGS. 22 to 24 are displayed, there is a possibility of transition to the RT4 gaming state. These “C_C lip 01” to “C_bell FKC_12” are the above-mentioned “RT4 transition lip”. More specifically, when the above-described push order lip is determined as an internal winning combination and the correct answer is in the push order, one of “C_CU lip — 01” to “C_CU lip — 03” is displayed. If “F_Chance Lip 2” or “F_Slip Chance Lip 2” is determined as an internal winning combination, any one of “C_C Lip 01” to “C_Bell FKC_12” is displayed regardless of the pressing order. It will be.

  Further, when “C_CD chelip A_01” to “C_Swimming FKF_18” shown in FIGS. 25 to 28 are displayed, there is a possibility of transition to the RT3 gaming state. These “C_CD chelip A_01” to “C_Swim FKF_18” are the above-mentioned “RT3 transition lip”. More specifically, when “F_slip chance lip 1” or “F_cherry lip” described above is determined as an internal winning combination, any one of “C_CD chelip A_01” to “C_Sui FKF_18” is selected regardless of the pressing order. Will be displayed.

  The role type “winning” is a combination of symbols in which medals are paid out when displayed, and corresponds to “C_CD watermelon” to “C_B bell BB_04” shown in FIGS. 29 to 32. When the symbol combination corresponding to the role type “winning” is displayed, the number of medals specified in the payout number column of the symbol combination table is paid out. Note that when the combination of symbols corresponding to the role type “winning” is displayed, the transition of the RT gaming state is not performed.

  “C_CD bell” shown in FIG. 30 is a combination of symbols displayed when the correct answer is given in the push order determined for each type of push order bell described above. Of the symbol combinations corresponding to the role type “winning”, the symbol combination “3” is displayed when the answer is incorrect in the pressing order determined for each of the above-mentioned pressing order bell types. A possible symbol combination. That is, when the answer is incorrect in the pressing order determined for each type of the pressing order bell, the combination of symbols of “3” to be paid out of the symbol combinations corresponding to the role type “winning”, or the role type “RT transition” A combination of symbols corresponding to “eye” is displayed. In the pachi-slot 1, six kinds of pushing orders can be considered as the pushing order of the stop operation. Therefore, the combination of symbols displayed in the case of incorrect answer in the order of pushing is arbitrarily set from the five kinds of pushing order of incorrect answers. be able to.

<Internal lottery table>
Next, an internal lottery table referred to when determining an internal winning combination will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 37. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state, and defines lottery value information for the data pointer corresponding to the winning combination. In the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state described above, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value defined in the “RT0” column of the internal lottery table. Similarly, the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state to the bonus non-winning state is determined. In the RT4 gaming state in the winning state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery values defined in the “RT1” to “RT4” columns of the internal lottery table. Also, in the inter-flag state RT5 gaming state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value defined in the “RT5” column of the internal lottery table. In the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value defined in the “BB (RT0)” column of the internal lottery table. Similarly, the RT4 gaming state or bonus in the bonus state is determined. In the RT2 gaming state in the state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value defined in the “BB in progress (RT4)” or “BB in progress (RT2)” column of the internal lottery table, and the RB gaming state in the bonus state Then, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value defined in the “BB (RB)” column of the internal lottery table.

  The internal lottery table basically changes depending on the type of winning combination (BB or RB) depending on the type of winning and the winning probability related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination depending on the RT gaming state type. The type of winning combination (other than replay and carryover combination) determined as an internal winning combination and the winning probability change.

  The data pointer is data acquired as a result of lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and is used to determine the storage area type and 1-byte data. For the data pointer, a small role / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are individually defined corresponding to each of the plurality of winning numbers.

  In the present embodiment, random numbers for lottery extracted from a predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” are sequentially subtracted by lottery values corresponding to each winning combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction has become negative An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred.

  Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data (that is, the dake pointer) to which it is assigned is determined. That is, the winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (65536)”.

<Comparison table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
FIG. 38 to FIG. 56 are comparison tables showing the correspondences with combinations (combinations) of symbols that can be displayed on the winning line in each internal winning combination. A circle in each correspondence table indicates a combination of symbols that can be displayed on the winning line in the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. In the winning combination, for the combination of symbols that cannot be displayed on the winning line, the correspondence table is omitted (for example, in the winning combination “F_black black black” shown in FIG. Since the combination of symbols shown in (1) cannot be displayed, the correspondence table is not shown).

  Referring to FIG. 38, for example, when the winning combination “F_Black Black Black” is an internal winning combination, the combination of symbols of the combination name “C_BB1” can be stopped and displayed on the winning line. Referring to FIG. 21, the combination name “C_BB1” is a combination of symbols in which “BAR-BAR-BAR” is displayed along the winning line. The correspondence table shown in the figure does not stipulate that the winning combination is “out of”, but this is a combination of all symbols specified by the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. Indicates that the display of is not allowed.

  In the pachislot 1, the main control circuit 91 changes the stop control according to the internal winning combination and the gaming state, and when the predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence relationship shown in FIGS. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped so that a combination of symbols can be displayed. The correspondence tables shown in FIGS. 38 to 56 list all combinations of symbols that may be displayed when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the control differs depending on not only the internal winning combination but also the current gaming state, even a combination of symbols with a circle corresponding to the winning combination may not be displayed depending on the gaming state.

<Outline of the winning role>
This will be described in detail with reference to the outline of the winning combination shown in FIG. 57 and FIG. As shown in FIG. 57, when “off” is determined as the internal winning combination, display of all symbol combinations defined by the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 20 to 32 is not permitted. It should be noted that in the RT4 gaming state where there is a high probability that a combination related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination, the probability that “out of” will be determined as an internal winning combination decreases as the winning probability of the combination related to replay increases. Therefore, in the following description, the “out” in the RT4 gaming state may be used as a rare role (so-called “pure out”).

  Further, when any one of “F_black black black”, “F_red red red”, “F_white white white”, “F_red red white”, and “F white white red” is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence shown in FIG. Display of a combination of symbols having a relationship is permitted. If any one of “F_black / black / black”, “F_red / red / red”, “F_white / white / white”, “F_red / red / white” and “F_white / white / red” is determined as the internal winning combination, as described above, The gaming state becomes an RT5 gaming state in an inter-flag state.

  When either “F_maintenance lip 1” or “F_maintenance lip 2” is determined as an internal winning combination, display of combinations of symbols having the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 39 to 43 is permitted. “F_Maintenance Lip 1” and “F_Maintenance Lip 2” do not change the RT gaming state even if the corresponding symbol combination is displayed.

  “F_123 Lip” to “F_2nd Lip” are the above-described push order lips, and when any of these push order lips is determined as an internal winning combination, the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 39 to 43 are shown. The display of the combination of symbols is permitted. More specifically, when the answer is correct in the push order determined for each push order lip type, the RT4 transition lip (FIG. 22 to FIG. 22) among the combinations of symbols having the correspondence shown in FIGS. When the display of the combination of symbols according to FIG. 24) is permitted and the answer is incorrect in the pressing order, the above-described RT1 transition lip (see FIG. 22) of the symbol combinations having the correspondence shown in FIGS. ) Is allowed to display symbol combinations.

  The name of the winning combination as the push order lip is determined based on the push order that is correct. For example, “1” with the name “F_123 Lip” indicates that the stop operation is “left”, “2” indicates that the stop operation is “middle”, and “3” indicates that the stop operation is “right”. ". “123” indicates the correct pressing order. In the case of “F_123 Lip”, the first stop operation is “left”, the second stop operation is “middle”, and the third stop operation is “right”. It is shown that the answer is correct when the answer is, and the answer is incorrect when the order is other than that. Similarly, in the case of “F_231 Lip”, when the first stop operation is “middle”, the second stop operation is “right”, and the third stop operation is “left”, the answer is correct, and the other press orders Indicates that the answer is incorrect. “F_2nd Lip” indicates that the answer is correct when the first stop operation is “medium”, and the answer is incorrect when the other pressing order is set.

  Returning to FIG. 57, “F_123 upper 7-ten” to “F_2nd cross 7 assortment” are not only internal winning combinations but also winning combinations having different stop controls depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_123 upper 7-ten” to “F_2nd cross 7 assortment” are the above-mentioned push order lip, and when the push order is correct, the correspondence shown in FIG. 39 to FIG. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the above-mentioned RT4 transition lip (see FIGS. 22 to 24) is permitted and the answer is incorrect in the pressing order, the correspondence shown in FIGS. The display of the symbol combination according to the above-mentioned RT1 transition lip (see FIG. 22) among the symbol combinations that the user has is permitted.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, “F_123 upper 7-ten” to “F_2nd cross 7 assortment” are “F_123 upper 7-ten” among the combinations of symbols of the combination names “C_CU white” to “C_B white_02” shown in FIG. ”To“ F_2nd cross 7 assortment ”are permitted to be displayed as a combination of symbols. Here, the combination of symbols of the combination names “C_CU white” to “C_B white — 02” is a pseudo-line other than the winning line among the lines connecting the upper, middle and lower stages of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R in a straight line. This is a combination of symbols in which three or two “white 7” symbols or “red 7” symbols are displayed on the line. In the following, a combination of symbols in which three “white 7” symbols or “red 7” symbols are displayed may be referred to as “seven lip”, and “white 7” symbols or “red 7”. A combination of symbols in which two of the symbols are displayed may be referred to as “7-turn lip”. Of the combination names “C_CU white” to “C_B white_02”, the combination of symbols not having “FK” in the combination name is “7 lip” and the combination name is “FK”. The combination of symbols marked with is “7-turn lip”. In addition, the lines connecting the upper, middle, and lower stages of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R in a straight line are a top line that connects the upper stage, a center line that connects the middle stage, a bottom line that connects the lower stage, a cross-down line that goes down to the right, and There are five types of cross-up lines that go up to the right, but the winning line is a cross-down line, so "7-match lip" or "7-turn lip" is four pseudo lines other than the cross-down line. In this case, three or two “white 7” symbols or “red 7” symbols are displayed.

  Referring to the correspondence relationship shown in FIG. 39, in the bonus state, “F_123 upper row 7 tens” and “F_132 lower row 7 tens” are permitted to display “7 turn lip”. Also, in the bonus state, “F_312 upper row 7 assortment” to “F_2nd cross 7 assortment” are permitted to display “7 assorted lip”.

  Further, “F_J1 upper stage 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower stage 7 lip” and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” are not only internal winning combinations but also winning combinations having different stop controls depending on the game state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_J1 upper row 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower row 7 lip” and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” are the RT4 transition lip described above (see FIGS. 22 to 24) regardless of the pressing order. ) Is allowed to display symbol combinations. In the bonus non-winning state, “F_J1 upper row 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower row 7 lip” and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” are determined as an internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state. When “F_J1 upper stage 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower stage 7 lip” and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” are determined as the internal winning combination, the RT4 gaming state is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, “F_J1 upper stage 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower stage 7 lip”, and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” have different stop controls depending on the type of the role related to JACIN carried over as an internal winning combination. Specifically, in the bonus state, when “F_JACIN1” is carried over as an internal winning combination (ie, “F_J1 upper row 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower row 7 lip” or “F_J1 cross 7 lip” and “F_JACIN1” ”And“ F_J1 upper 7 lip ”,“ F_J1 lower 7 lip ”and“ F_J1 cross 7 lip ”are“ 7 aligned lip ”, other than cross down line The three “white 7” symbols or “red 7” symbols are displayed along any of the four pseudo lines.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, when “F_JACIN2” or “F_JACIN3” is carried over as an internal winning combination (ie, “F_J1 upper row 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower row 7 lip” or “F_J1 cross 7 lip” and “ "F_JACIN2" or "F_JACIN3" is determined as an internal winning combination), "F_J1 upper 7 lip", "F_J1 lower 7 lip" and "F_J1 cross 7 lip" “Rip”, and combinations of symbols other than “7-matched Lip” among the symbol combinations having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 39 to 43 are displayed.

  The state where “F_JACIN1” is carried over as an internal winning combination may be referred to as “between JAC1 flags”. Similarly, the state where “F_JACIN2” is carried over as an internal winning combination is “between JAC2 flags”, A state where “F_JACIN3” is carried over as an internal winning combination may be referred to as “between JAC3 flags”.

  “F_J2 Chance Lip 1” to “F_J2 Cherry Lip” are not only internal winning combinations but also winning combinations having different stop controls depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip” are combinations of symbols corresponding to the above RT4 transition lip (see FIGS. 22 to 24) regardless of the pressing order. Display is allowed. In the bonus non-winning state, “F_J2 Chance Lip 1” to “F_J2 Cherry Lip” are determined as the internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state. Therefore, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_J1 upper row 7 Lip”, When “F_J1 lower 7 lip” and “F_J1 cross 7 lip” are determined as the internal winning combination, the RT4 gaming state is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, “F_J2 Chance Lip 1” to “F_J2 Cherry Lip” have different stop controls depending on the type of the combination related to JACIN carried over as an internal winning combination. Specifically, in the bonus state, when “F_JACIN2” is carried over as an internal winning combination (ie, “F_J1 upper row 7 lip”, “F_J1 lower row 7 lip” or “F_J1 cross 7 lip” and “F_JACIN2” ”And“ F_J2 Chance Lip 1 ”to“ F_J2 Cherry Lip ”are“ Chance Lip ”and have the corresponding relationship shown in FIGS. 44 to 50. Of the combinations, display of any combination of symbols “C_B Lip 01” to “C_Swim FKF_18” is permitted.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, when “F_JACIN1” or “F_JACIN3” is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, either “F_J2 Chance Lip 1” to “F_J2 Cherry Lip” and “F_JACIN1” or “F_JACIN3”) “F_J2 Chance Lip 1” to “F_J2 Cherry Lip” are “ordinary lips in bonus” and have the correspondence shown in FIGS. 44 to 50. Of the symbol combinations, symbol combinations other than “chance lip” are displayed.

  “F_J3 Chance Lip 1” to “F_J3 Cherry Lip” are not only internal winning combinations but also winning combinations having different stop controls depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, “F_J3 chance lip 1” to “F_J3 cherry lip” are combinations of symbols corresponding to the above RT4 transition lip (see FIGS. 22 to 24) regardless of the pressing order. Display is allowed. In the bonus non-winning state, “F_J3 Chance Lip 1” to “F_J3 Cherry Lip” are determined as an internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state, and therefore “F_J3 Chance Lip 1” to “F_J3 Chance Lip 1” to When “F_J3 Cherry Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT4 gaming state is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the bonus state, “F_J3 Chance Lip 1” to “F_J3 Cherry Lip” are “chance lip” regardless of the type of the JACIN carry-over as an internal winning combination, as shown in FIGS. 44 to 50. Of the symbol combinations having a correspondence relationship, display of any symbol combination of “C_B Lip 01” to “C_Swim FKF — 18” is permitted.

  When any one of “F_Chance Lip 1” to “F_Common Bell” is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the combination of symbols having the correspondence shown in FIGS. 44 to 56 is permitted. The features such as the transition of the RT gaming state triggered by “F_Chance Lip 1” to “F_Common Bell” are as shown in FIG.

  Next, referring to FIG. 58, “F_123 bell A” to “F_321 bell D” are basically the above-mentioned push order bells, and any of these push order bells is determined as an internal winning combination. In such a case, display of a combination of symbols having the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 51 to 56 is permitted. More specifically, when the answer is correct in the push order determined for each push order bell type, “C_CD bell (see FIG. 30)” of the symbol combinations having the correspondence shown in FIGS. The display of the combination of the designs according to is permitted. On the other hand, when the answer is incorrect in the push order determined for each type of push order bell, the symbols corresponding to the above-described bell spilled eyes (see FIG. 20) of the combinations of symbols having the corresponding relationships shown in FIGS. Or a combination of symbols with a payout number “3” in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 30 to 32) is permitted.

  In addition, the name of the winning combination as the push order bell is determined based on the push order that is correct. For example, “1” with the name “F_123 Bell A” indicates that the stop operation is “left”, “2” indicates that the stop operation is “middle”, and “3” indicates that the stop operation is “ "Right". “123” indicates the correct pressing order. In the case of “F_123 bell A”, the first stop operation is “left”, the second stop operation is “middle”, and the third stop operation is “right”. ”Indicates that the answer is correct, and in other cases, the answer is incorrect. Similarly, in the case of “F_231 Bell A”, the answer is correct when the first stop operation is “middle”, the second stop operation is “right”, and the third stop operation is “left”. This is an incorrect answer.

  In addition, among the push order bells, “F_123 Bell C”, “F_123 Bell D”, “F_132 Bell C”, “F_132 Bell D”, “F_213 Bell C”, “F_213 Bell D”, “F_231 Bell C”, “F_231 Bell D”, and “F_312 Bell”. “C”, “F_312 Bell D”, “F_321 Bell C” and “F_321 Bell D” are not only internal winning combinations but also winning combinations having different stop controls depending on the game state. Specifically, the above-mentioned push order bell is used between the non-flags (bonus non-winning state RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state), and the symbols having the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. Display of symbol combinations corresponding to “C_CD bell (see FIG. 30)” is permitted, and when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing, among the symbol combinations having the correspondence shown in FIGS. Display of a combination of symbols corresponding to the above-described bell spillage (see FIG. 20) or a combination of symbols with a payout number “3” (see FIGS. 30 to 32) in the symbol combination table is permitted.

  On the other hand, in the inter-flag state (RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state), “F_123 Bell C”, “F_123 Bell D”, “F_132 Bell C”, “F_132 Bell D”, “F_213 Bell C”, “F_213 Bell D”, and “F_231 Bell”. C ”,“ F_231 Bell D ”,“ F_312 Bell C ”,“ F_312 Bell D ”,“ F_321 Bell C ”, and“ F_321 Bell D ”are combinations of symbols having the corresponding relationships shown in FIGS. Display of the combination of symbols according to “C_CD bell (see FIG. 30)” is permitted.

  Further, when any one of “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3” is determined as the internal winning combination, display of the combination of symbols having the correspondence shown in FIG. 38 is permitted. When any of “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3” is determined as the internal winning combination, “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3” determined as the internal winning combination have a corresponding combination of symbols. Until it is displayed (only during the bonus state), it will be carried over as an internal winning combination.

  When either “F_RB combination A” or “F_RB combination B” is determined as the internal winning combination, display of combinations of symbols having the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 51 to 56 is permitted.

[Various storage areas on the main control side]
59 to 65 are diagrams showing examples of various storage areas stored in the main RAM 95. FIG.

<Internal winning combination storage area>
The internal winning combination storing area shown in FIG. 59 is composed of 45 storing areas of internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 45. The size of each of the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 45 is 1 byte.

  Accordingly, the overall size of the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 45 is 45 bytes. In the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 45, data determined based on the internal winning combination (data indicating a combination of symbols that can be stopped according to the internal winning combination) is stored. In the illustrated internal winning combination storing area, for example, bit 2 of the internal winning combination storing area 4 corresponds to “C_BB1” indicating a combination of symbols that can be stopped when the internal winning combination is “F_black black black”. .

<Carry-over portion storage area>
The carryover combination storage area shown in FIG. 60 is a storage area having a size of 2 bytes, which is composed of two storage areas of the carryover combination storage areas 1 and 2. In the carryover combination storage area, data relating to the carryover combination is stored.

  For example, by storing “1” in bit 2 of the carryover combination storage area 1, it can be determined that the combination name “C_BB1” is in a state of winning “F_black black black” that can be stopped. The state in which “1” is stored in bit 2 of the carryover combination storage area 1 is held until the symbol combination corresponding to the combination name “C_BB1” is displayed on the winning line.

  That is, when “F_Black Black Black” is won, the bit 2 of the carryover combination storage area 1 is set to “2” in at least one unit game until the combination of these bonus symbols is displayed on the winning line as a display combination. The state where “1” is stored is maintained. Maintaining a state in which “1” is stored in bit 2 from the unit game winning the bonus to the unit game winning is referred to as so-called “carryover”. Also, “F_black black black” “F_red red red” “F_white white white” “F_red white red” “F_white white red” “F_JACIN1” corresponding to the data (pattern combination) stored in the carryover combination storage area “F_JACIN2” and “F_JACIN3” are referred to as “carryover”.

  When a stop operation is performed by the player and each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R stops, the internal winning combination storing area is initialized, but the carryover combination storing area is not initialized. In this way, the “carry over” state can be maintained.

<Display combination storage area>
The display combination storage area shown in FIG. 61 includes 45 storage areas of display combination storage areas 1 to 45. The size of each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 45 is 1 byte.

  Therefore, the total size of the display combination storage areas 1 to 45 is 45 bytes. The display combination storage areas 1 to 45 store data determined based on the data (storage area type) defined by each symbol combination table shown in FIGS. The value of the display combination storage area is used by the main CPU 93 to identify the display combination after all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped.

  In the illustrated display combination storing area, for example, bit 0 to bit 7 of the display combination storing area 1 correspond to “R_RT transition A_01” to “R_RT transition C_01”, respectively.

<Game state flag storage area>
The gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 62 stores a flag for identifying a gaming state managed by the main control circuit 91, and has a size of 1 byte.

  Bits 0 to 6 of the gaming state flag storage area are respectively “RT1 gaming state”, “RT2 gaming state”, “RT3 gaming state”, “RT4 gaming state”, “RT5 gaming state”, “BB gaming state”, and “RB gaming state”. It corresponds.

<Operation stop button storage area>
The operation stop button storage area shown in FIG. 63 is 1 byte in size. Bits 4 to 6 are storage areas indicating stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R that can detect a stop operation by the player, that is, effective stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R.

  Bits 0 to 2 are storage areas indicating the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R in which the stop operation corresponding to the valid stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is detected immediately before. In this embodiment, bit 3 and bit 7 are unused and “0” is stored.

  Bit 0 corresponds to the left stop button 17L. When the left stop button 17L is operated by the player, “1” is stored in bit 0. Bit 1 corresponds to the middle stop button 17C. When the middle stop button 17C is operated by the player, “1” is stored in bit 1. Bit 2 corresponds to the right stop button 17R. When the right stop button 17R is operated by the player, “1” is stored in bit 2.

  Bit 4 corresponds to the left stop button 17L. When the left stop button 17L is valid, “1” is stored in bit 4. Bit 5 corresponds to the middle stop button 17C. When the middle stop button 17C is valid, “1” is stored in bit 5. Bit 6 corresponds to the right stop button 17R. When the right stop button 17R is valid, “1” is stored in bit 6.

  In this embodiment, that the stop button is valid means that a stop operation can be detected. The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R corresponding to the reels rotating at a constant speed and capable of detecting a stop operation are referred to as effective stop buttons.

<Pressing order storage area>
The pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 64 is an area for storing information indicating the pressing order of the three stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R. This push-down order storage area has a size of 1 byte, bits 0 to 5 are used, bits 6 and 7 are unused, and “0” is stored.

  Bit 0 corresponds to the pressing order “left → middle → right”, and “1” is stored (turned on) in bit 0 when the pressing order is “left → middle → right”. Similarly, when the pressing order is “left → right → middle”, “1” is stored (turned on) in bit 1, and when the pressing order is “middle → left → right”, “1” is stored in bit 2. Is stored (ON), “1” is stored in bit 3 if “middle → right → left”, and “1” is stored in bit 4 if “right → left → middle”. In the case of “right → middle → left”, “1” is stored (turned on) in bit 5.

<Design code storage area>
The symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 65 is configured similarly to the display combination storage area shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  The symbol code storage area stores data indicating symbol combinations that may be displayed on the rotating reel. For example, when all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating, all symbol combinations may be displayed, so “1” is stored in all the corresponding bits in the symbol code storage area. The Thereafter, when the left reel 3L is stopped (the reels 3C and 3R are rotated), the bit corresponding to the symbol combination that cannot be displayed with the stop of the left reel 3L is updated to “0”.

[Sub game state transition flow]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the gaming state controlled by the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 of this embodiment and its transition flow will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 manages the gaming state based on whether or not to notify the contents of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player. As shown in FIG. 66, the sub control circuit 101 distinguishes the general gaming state, the ART gaming state, and the bonus state. Here, the general gaming state is basically a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, the bonus state is basically a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the ART gaming state is a gaming state. This is the most advantageous gaming state for the player. In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the player performs a game so as to shift from the general gaming state (with a bonus state depending on the situation) to the most advantageous ART gaming state.

  The general gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the main side bonus non-winning state RT0 to RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 17), and is a non-winning gaming state for the sub-side ART lottery. As shown in FIG. 66, the general gaming state includes a normal gaming state, a high probability gaming state, and a CZ (chance zone). The normal gaming state, the high probability gaming state, and the CZ are gaming states having different transition probabilities to the ART gaming state, the normal gaming state has the lowest transition probability to the ART gaming state, and the high probability gaming state and CZ are: Compared to the normal gaming state, the gaming state has a higher probability of transition to the ART gaming state.

  The normal gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the main side bonus non-winning state RT0 to RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 17), and is a non-winning gaming state for the sub-side ART lottery. As shown in FIG. 66, the normal gaming state may shift to an ART gaming state, CZ, a high probability gaming state, and a bonus state.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state, the lottery (A) to ART and CZ is performed, and in this transition lottery, if the transition to (A1) ART is won, the sub-control circuit 101 is in the normal gaming state. The game state is shifted from the game state to the ART game state. Further, in this transition lottery, when the transition to (A2) CZ is won, the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the CZ. The details of the transfer lottery (A) in the normal gaming state will be described later. In the normal gaming state, the transition to ART and CZ is performed at two timings when the reel rotation starts and when the reel stops during one game. A lottery (A) is performed.

  In the normal gaming state, a lottery (B) for shifting to the high probability gaming state is also performed. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, when the transition to the bonus non-winning state RT4 gaming state is made by controlling the main game state, the transition to the high-probability gaming state in the bonus non-winning state RT4 gaming state (B) Is done. When winning the transition lottery (B), the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the high probability gaming state. The details of the transition lottery (B) in the normal gaming state will be described later. In this transition lottery, in the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state that is the sub-side normal gaming state, the role related to replay is an internal winning combination. Based on the determined number of times, a transition lottery (B) is performed.

  In the normal gaming state, (6) a combination of symbols corresponding to the carry-over BB is displayed, and when the BB is activated, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the bonus state. Since the transition to the bonus state is common on the main side and the sub side, detailed description will be omitted below.

  Subsequently, CZ is a gaming state corresponding to the RT0 to RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 17) in the main bonus non-winning state, and is a non-winning gaming state in the sub-side ART lottery. CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) with a high probability of shifting to the ART gaming state, and continues for up to 30 games. CZ is a so-called complete-run chance zone, and when CZ continues for the maximum 30 games, ART transition is confirmed. On the other hand, during CZ, the lottery for the transition to ART is performed, and when this transition lottery is “maintained”, the CZ ends. Here, even if the transition lottery is “maintained”, the transition to ART is performed if the transition lottery is won, but it is more advantageous when CZ continues for 30 games. Since there is a possibility of shifting to the ART gaming state, during CZ, basically, a game is performed without receiving a transfer lottery, and if the transfer lottery has been performed, the transfer lottery becomes “invalid” By playing the game in such a way, it is hoped that 30 games will continue without ending the CZ. The “maintenance / invalidity” of the transition lottery in CZ will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 66, from CZ, there is a possibility of transition to a normal gaming state, an ART gaming state, and a bonus state. More specifically, when (C1) wins the transition lottery (C) to ART performed during CZ, the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from CZ to the ART gaming state, and the transition lottery ( C2) When not won, the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from CZ to the normal gaming state.

  Subsequently, the high probability gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 17) of the bonus side non-winning state on the main side, and is a gaming state non-winning to the ART lottery on the sub side, and This is the gaming state in which the lottery (B) for transition to the high probability gaming state during the normal gaming state is won. As shown in FIG. 66, there is a possibility of shifting from the high probability gaming state to the normal gaming state, the ART gaming state, and the bonus state.

  Specifically, in the high-probability gaming state, a transition lottery (D) to ART is performed, and in this transition lottery, if the transition to (D1) ART is won, the sub-control circuit 101 determines that the high-probability gaming state. The game state is shifted from the game state to the ART game state. The details of the transition lottery (D) in the high-probability gaming state will be described later. Basically, as with the transition lottery (A) in the normal gaming state, at the start of reel rotation and reel The transfer lottery (D) to ART is performed at two times at the time of stopping. The transition lottery (D) in the high probability gaming state has a higher probability of winning the transition to ART than the transition lottery (A) in the normal gaming state.

  The high-probability gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the main bonus non-winning RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 17). When the control is performed, the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the high probability gaming state to the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state).

  Here, as described above, the RT4 gaming state in the main side bonus non-winning state is the case where the RT0 gaming state in the main side bonus non-winning state (sub-side normal gaming state) is correctly answered in the push order lip. It is a gaming state to be transferred. As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, in the normal gaming state which is the most basic gaming state (= disadvantage for the player), when the correct answer is made in the push order lip, the gaming state is shifted to the high probability gaming state. Favor the transition. In other words, the pachislot 1 of this embodiment gives a penalty such as not performing an ART transfer lottery when the player's stop operation happens to shift to the bonus non-winning RT4 gaming state. Rather, it will be in an advantageous state for the player. As a result, in the pachislot 1, the bonus non-winning RT4 gaming state that has not won the ART transfer lottery can be changed to the ART gaming state transition chance section, and the bonus non-ART bonus is not attached. The interest of the RT4 gaming state in the winning state can be enhanced.

  Further, for the player, if the correct answer is made in the order of pushing in the normal gaming state, there is a possibility of shifting to the high-probability gaming state that is a transition chance section to the ART gaming state, so the strategy for the stop operation in the normal gaming state Increases the nature and can also enhance the interest during normal gaming. In other words, in the gameability in which the game state that has been accidentally shifted by the player's stop operation is a penalty section, the stop operation during the normal game state is simple (for example, the first stop operation is performed on the left reel so as not to receive a penalty). It must be done against). In this regard, like the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, the player can perform a stop operation freely during the normal game state by performing the lottery to the ART without penalizing, and the normal game state It is possible to improve not only the playability but also the operability.

  By the way, if the gaming state that has been accidentally shifted by the stop operation is not a penalty section but a transition chance section to the ART gaming state, the player's profit and the gaming shop's profit so as not to give excessive profits to the player It is necessary to adjust the balance. There are many methods for adjusting the balance. For example, there is an adjustment method in which it is easy to win a transition lottery as compared to the normal gaming state while setting it as a transition chance section to the ART gaming state. In the method, the meaning of the transition chance section is lost. In this regard, in the pachislot 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state with a fixed number of games that does not shift to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is provided. It is said. By providing such an RT1 gaming state during the bonus non-winning state with the number of fixed games, it is possible to adjust the frequency of accidental transition due to the stop operation. As a result, the profit on the player side and the profit on the game store side The balance can be adjusted. As a result, it is possible to further diversify variables for adjusting the profit balance between the two, and to provide a gaming machine rich in gaming properties.

  Subsequently, the bonus state is a gaming state corresponding to one of the main-side bonus states (see FIG. 17). As shown in FIG. 66, the bonus state may shift to a general gaming state (normal gaming state) and an ART gaming state. Specifically, when the winning lottery (F) performed during the bonus state is performed (F1), after the operation of BB is completed, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state. When this transition lottery is not performed (F2), the sub control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the general gaming state after the operation of BB is completed. The details of the transfer lottery (F) in the bonus state will be described later. In the bonus state, when the combination of the above-mentioned “7-matched lip” symbols can be displayed, the player wins ART, and BB When a predetermined lottery performed at the end of the operation is won, ART is won. That is, in this embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a specific effect state start means, and when the transition to ART is won in the transition lottery (A) in the normal gaming state (A1), the transition lottery in the CZ When the transition to ART is won in (C) (C1), when the transition lottery (D) in the high probability gaming state is won (D1), and the transition lottery in the bonus state (F) When the transition to ART is won (F1), the gaming state is shifted to the ART gaming state.

  Subsequently, the ART gaming state is a gaming state for notifying the contents of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player, corresponds to the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 17) in the bonus side of the main side, and the sub side This is a gaming state in which an ART lottery is won. In the ART gaming state, for example, when the push order bell is determined as an internal winning combination, a combination of symbols having a large number of payouts (C_CD bell with 10 payouts) is displayed on the winning push order bell. Announces the correct push order. In the ART gaming state, for example, when a push order lip is determined as an internal winning combination, a combination of symbols (for example, maintaining a RT4 gaming state with a high probability that a role related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination (for example, The correct push order is notified to the winning push order lip so that (RT4 transition lip) is displayed.

  Further, in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, the teammate character and the enemy character battle (battle) during the ART game state, the ART game state is continued when the teammate character wins, and the ART character is played when the enemy character wins. End the gaming state. In order to have such gameability, the ART gaming state is configured by enemy determination ART and battle ART as shown in FIG.

  The enemy determination ART is an ART gaming state during a period in which the type of enemy character to fight against a teammate character is determined. As shown in FIG. 66, there is a possibility that the enemy ART will shift to a battle ART and a bonus state. Specifically, when an enemy character is determined in (G) enemy determination ART, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the enemy determination ART to the battle ART. A method for determining an enemy character during the enemy determination ART will be described later.

  The battle ART is an ART gaming state during a period in which the enemy character and the teammate character determined in the enemy determination ART battle each other. As shown in FIG. 66, there is a possibility that the battle ART may shift to an enemy determination ART, a general gaming state (normal gaming state), and a bonus state. Specifically, in the battle (H) in the battle ART, when the (H1) ally character wins, the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the battle ART to the enemy determination ART, and (H2) the enemy character wins. Then, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the battle ART to the general gaming state. In addition, the determination method of the victory or defeat of the battle (H) in battle ART is mentioned later. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes an advantageous state starting means, and the role related to the replay is determined to be an internal winning during the enemy determination ART and the battle ART that are started based on winning the transition lottery. Notification of a stop operation mode (for example, a pressing order for displaying a combination of symbols corresponding to the RT4 transition lip) required to maintain the RT4 gaming state with a high probability of being determined as a combination is started.

[Correspondence relationship between main side / sub side of winning role]
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a part of the correspondence relationship between the type of winning combination managed on the main (main control circuit 91) side and the abbreviation of winning combination managed on the sub (sub control circuit 101) side. On the sub side, the winning combination on the main side is managed by the abbreviations shown in the correspondence table of FIG. Note that “out” may be “pure out” only during the RT4 gaming state. Further, the correspondence relationship between the main side / sub side of the winning combination may be varied depending on the gaming state. In this regard, the correspondence shown in FIG. 67 shows the correspondence in the gaming state other than the bonus state, and the correspondence in the bonus state is shown in FIG.

[Outline of effects performed on the liquid crystal display device 11]
FIG. 68 shows an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. In FIG. 68, the liquid crystal display device 11 is divided into two areas, a first display area 111 and a second display area 112, for simplicity of explanation. However, in the actual pachislot machine 1, the respective areas are mixed. It is formed integrally.

  The first display area 111 is an area where main effects are performed. In the example shown in FIG. 68, a display example during the battle ART is shown. During the battle ART, as shown in FIG. 68, an ally character and an enemy character battle each other, and an effect of winning or losing is performed by reducing each physical strength (HP) by each attack / defense. .

  The second display area 112 displays an apocalypse 113 that affects various lotteries performed on the sub (sub-control circuit 101) side. The apocalypse 113 includes five areas 113A, 113B, 113C, 113D, and 113E for setting a later-described performance ball. In the area 113A, stage balls that affect various lotteries in this game are set, in the area 113B, stage balls that affect various lotteries in the next game are set, and in area 113C, two game destinations Stage balls that affect various lotteries in the game are set, stage balls that affect various lotteries in the game of the three game destinations are set in the area 113D, and various lotteries in the game of the four game destinations are set in the area 113E. A production ball that influences is set. That is, the apocalypse 113 is set with performance balls that affect various lotteries in five games including the current game. The production ball set in the apocalypse 113 has its set area updated as the game progresses. When the apocalypse 113 is activated, a certain performance ball (including a blank (empty)) is set, and when it is not activated, the performance ball is not set.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, the apocalypse 113 may be activated or deactivated, and operates by winning an operation lottery described later. When the apocalypse 113 is activated in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, as shown in FIG. The directing ball is set. The lottery balls 1 to fixed balls set in the apocalypse 113 in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state have an influence in the above-described transition lottery (A) and (D). More specifically, the lottery balls 1 to the fixed balls set in the area 113A have an influence on the above-described transition lottery (A) and (D) in the current game.

  The transition lottery (A) and (D) described above are performed at two timings when the reel rotation is started and when the reel is stopped during one game. Among these, for the transfer lottery (A) (D) performed at the start of reel rotation (at the start), the lottery balls 1 to the fixed ball set in the area 113A are not included in the lottery result regardless of the internal winning combination. It has an influence on it. On the other hand, for the transition lottery (A) (D) performed when the reels are stopped, the lottery balls 1 to definite balls set in the area 113A have a combination of symbols displayed when the reels are stopped exceeding the “bell prize”. Only in certain cases will it affect the lottery result. The “bell winning” means that a combination of symbols at the correct push order in the pressing order bell is displayed, or a combination of symbols corresponding to the common bell is displayed. Is either a “bell prize” or a combination of symbols corresponding to one of the rare roles such as Chan Lip, Strong Cherry, Weak Cherry, Finals, Watermelon, and Pure Mistake (see FIG. 67). It is.

  In the lottery balls 1 to the fixed balls, the influence on the transition lottery (A) and (D) is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the lottery ball 1 has a low probability of winning CZ or more (CZ or ART), the lottery ball 2 has a medium probability of winning probability of CZ or more, and the lottery ball 3 The winning probability of CZ or higher is high, and the lottery ball 4 is determined to be winning of CZ or higher, and the determined ball is determined to be ART.

  Subsequently, in CZ, Apocalypse 113 always operates. In CZ, areas 113A to 113E of Apocalypse 113 are in a blank (empty) state in which either a development ball or an avoidance ball is set or no production balls are set, as shown in FIG. The development balls and avoidance balls set in the apocalypse 113 in CZ have an influence on the above-mentioned transition lottery (C) to ART performed during CZ. More specifically, the developed balls and avoidance balls set in the region 113A have an influence on the above-described lottery (C) to ART in the current game.

  Specifically, when the development ball is set in the area 113A, when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the above-described transition lottery (C) to ART is performed. When a stop operation is performed in this game, if the stop operation is a correct stop operation in the push order determined for the winning push order bell, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) Becomes “invalid”. On the other hand, if this stop operation is an incorrect answer stop operation in the order of pressing determined for the winning pressing order bell, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) becomes “maintained”. As described above, CZ is a complete run type CZ, and the CZ ends when the transfer lottery (C) performed in the middle stage before the complete run is “maintained”. Therefore, in a game in which the development ball is set in the area 113A, the player desires that the pushing order bell is not determined as the internal winning combination (the transition lottery (C) itself is not performed). When the bell is determined as an internal winning combination, it is desired that the correct answer is made in the order of pushing (the transition lottery (C) becomes invalid).

  In the above description, the fact that the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) is “maintained” means that an incorrect answer stop operation was performed in the push order in the game in which the push order bell was determined as the internal winning combination. This is synonymous with displaying a combination of symbols (bell spilled eyes) displayed in the case. Therefore, it can be said that the CZ end condition is that the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) is “maintained”, and in the game in which the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the bell spilling mark is displayed. It can also be said.

  Further, in the above description, when the bell spilled eyes are displayed, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) is set to “invalid”, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) is set to “invalid” at the correct answer of the push order bell, if the transition lottery (C) is won, the player will be disadvantaged. become. In this regard, CZ can be continued without any disadvantage to the player by “maintaining” the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) without making it “invalid” at the correct push order of the push order bell. Is preferable. If the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) is to be “maintained” at the correct push order of the push order bell, the CZ end condition may be an incorrect answer in the push order of the push order bell. preferable. Thereby, it is possible to “maintain” the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) while continuing the CZ. Further, “maintaining” the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) while continuing the CZ means that, for example, when winning the lottery (C), the ART right (number of sets) is determined according to the lottery result. It means giving a number (one or more). Thus, by “maintaining” the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) during the CZ, the transition lottery (first right grant lottery) performed in the middle of the CZ and the transition lottery performed at the end of the CZ (second) It is possible to grant ART rights (number of sets) granted both with the right grant lottery), and as a result, ART for the right can be executed after CZ ends. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes the right number management means and the advantageous state control means, and is provided in both the transition lottery performed in the middle of the CZ and the transition lottery performed at the completion of the CZ. The total number of ART rights is counted, and ART is executed for the total number of times after the end of CZ.

  On the other hand, the avoidance ball and the blank (empty) are performance balls that do not perform the above-described lottery (C) for shifting to the ART even if the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination. From the player's point of view, a game in which avoidance balls and blanks (empty) are set can be played with peace of mind.

  Subsequently, in the enemy determination ART, the apocalypse 113 always operates. As shown in FIG. 68, any one of the boss balls 1 to 8 and the teammate ball is set in the regions 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113 in the enemy determination ART. The boss balls 1 to 8 and ally balls set in the apocalypse 113 in the enemy determination ART have an influence on the enemy determination lottery performed during the enemy determination ART. More specifically, the boss ball 1 to the boss ball 8 and the ally ball set in the region 113A have an influence in the lottery of the enemy decision in this game.

  Specifically, when any of the boss balls 1 to 8 is set in the area 113A, the push order bell (which may include a common bell) is determined as the internal winning combination. A boss corresponding to the type of the boss ball being played is determined as an opponent in the battle ART. The bosses corresponding to the boss balls 1 to 8 are enemy characters having different characteristics, and will be described in detail later. On the other hand, when any one of the boss balls 1 to 8 is set in the area 113A and the other than the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the enemy character of the opponent is not determined and the enemy is determined. ART will continue. In addition, when any one of the boss balls 1 to 8 is set in the area 113A, any one of pure detachment, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, or Chang Lip (so-called rare role) is determined as the internal winning combination. If you do, your opponent will not be determined and you will be stocked for allies. In the situation where the stock lottery is won and the ally balls are stocked, the boss balls 1 to 8 set in the apocalypse are rewritten to ally balls.

  Further, when the teammate ball is set in the area 113A during the enemy determination ART, a lottery for increasing the physical strength (HP) of the teammate character is performed based on the internal winning combination. If this lottery is won, the physical strength of the teammate character increases, so that the expectation that the teammate character will win in the subsequent battle ART is increased.

  Subsequently, in the battle ART, the apocalypse 113 always operates. In the battle ART, areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113 are set with any production balls of ally balls, enemy balls, and awakening balls, as shown in FIG. The friendly ball, enemy ball, and awakening ball set in the Apocalypse 113 in the battle ART have an influence on the result of the battle performed during the battle ART. More specifically, the teammate balls, enemy balls, and awakening balls set in the region 113A have an influence on the battle in the current or subsequent game.

  Specifically, when a friendly ball or enemy ball is set in the area 113A, if a push order bell or a common bell is determined as an internal winning combination, a character corresponding to the type of the effect ball set is displayed. Attack the opponent in the game. For example, when the teammate ball is set, the teammate character attacks the enemy character, and as a result, the enemy character's physical strength (HP) decreases. On the other hand, when the enemy ball is set, the enemy character attacks the teammate character, and as a result, the physical strength (HP) of the teammate character decreases.

  On the other hand, when a friendly ball or enemy ball is set in the area 113A, if any one of purely off, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, or Chang Lip (so-called rare role) is determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the type of stage ball that is set, the ally character attacks the enemy character. In this case, the physical strength (HP) of the enemy character basically decreases more than when the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination.

  In addition, when the awakening ball is set in the area 113A, if it is determined as an internal winning combination of push order bell, common bell, pure off, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, or Chang Lip, While attacking enemy characters, allies are stocked. When the friendly ball is stocked, the enemy ball set in the Apocalypse is rewritten as a friendly ball. As a result, the number of situations in which the teammate character attacks is increased thereafter, and as a result, the expectation that the teammate character will win in the battle ART increases.

[Direction management method]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 69, a management method of effect balls in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachi-slot 1, the sub control circuit 101 stores information related to the effect ball set in the apocalypse 113 in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 103. As described above, in the apocalypse 113, effect balls are set corresponding to the five regions 113A to 113E, and therefore, five or more effect balls are stored in the sub RAM 103. In this regard, in the present embodiment, six effect balls are stored in the sub RAM 103 as shown in FIG.

  Of these six effect balls, the effect balls stored in the storage area “1” are set corresponding to the area 113A, and the effect balls stored in the storage area “2” are set corresponding to the area 113B. The effect balls stored in the storage area “3” are set corresponding to the area 113C, and the effect balls stored in the storage area “4” are set corresponding to the area 113D and stored in the storage area “5”. The effect balls to be played are set corresponding to the area 113E, and the effect balls stored in the storage area “6” are not set in the current game but set in the next game corresponding to the area 113E.

  In the example shown in FIG. 69, at the time of FIG. 69 (a) (present game), the storage areas “1” to “5” have lottery balls 1, lottery balls 2, lottery balls 3, lottery balls 4, and confirmed, respectively. As a result, lottery balls 1, lottery balls 2, lottery balls 3, lottery balls 4, and fixed balls are set in the regions 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113, respectively. On the other hand, although the lottery ball 3 is stored in the storage area “6”, the lottery ball stored in the storage area “6” is not set in the apocalypse 113 at the time of FIG.

  Thereafter, when the next game is reached, the effect balls stored in the storage area are updated, and the effect balls set in the areas 113A to 113E slide one by one. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the storage areas “1” to “5” of the next game have storage areas “2” to “6” at the time (previous game) in FIG. 69 (a). Are stored in the storage area “6” of the next game, and new effect balls are stored by lottery. As a result, lottery balls 2, lottery balls 3, lottery balls 4, final balls, and production balls 2 stored in the storage areas “1” to “5” of the next game are set in the regions 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113. Will be.

  The effect balls stored in the respective storage areas are set in the respective areas when the apocalypse 113 is activated (that is, displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11). Here, as described above, since the apocalypse 113 may be activated or deactivated in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, it is stored in the storage area in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state. In some cases, the production ball is not set (displayed) in each area of the apocalypse 113. On the other hand, in CZ and ART, since the apocalypse 113 always operates, the effect balls stored in the storage area are always set (displayed) in each area of the apocalypse 113. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub RAM 103 constitutes production information storage means, and is stored in the storage areas “1” to “6” corresponding to the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113 under the control of the sub control circuit 101. Memorize the production ball. Further, the liquid crystal display device 11 constitutes display means, and part of the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 (for example, storage areas “1” to “5”) under the control of the sub control circuit 101. Are displayed in the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113. The sub-control circuit 101 constitutes effect information registering means, first effect information registering means, and second effect information registering means, and each game state (normal game state, high probability game state, CZ, ART game state). ) Lottery effect balls to be registered for games for six games (multiple games from the current game to a game ahead of a predetermined number of times), and the effect balls determined by lottery (lottery balls 1 to 4, fixed balls) , Boss balls 1-8, enemy balls, teammate balls, etc.) are registered in the sub RAM 103 as performance information.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 68, the types of effect balls set in the apocalypse 113 are different in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, the CZ, the enemy determination ART, and the battle ART. Therefore, the sub RAM 103 may be provided with a storage area corresponding to each state. In CZ, enemy determination ART, and battle ART, the initial lottery of effect balls is performed at the start of each state, and all effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are cleared at the end of each state. Therefore, for CZ, enemy determination ART, and battle ART, the timing of using the storage area does not overlap, so a common storage area may be used.

  On the other hand, in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are maintained regardless of whether the apocalypse 113 is activated or deactivated. In other words, the performance balls stored in the sub-RAM 103 immediately before the apocalypse 113 is deactivated are maintained even while the apocalypse 113 is not activated, and are maintained in the sub-RAM 103 when the apocalypse 113 is activated next time. A production ball is set in each area of the apocalypse 113. The storage areas corresponding to the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state are basically maintained during the game, but are cleared at a predetermined timing. The timing for clearing the storage area corresponding to the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state will be described later.

[ART and CZ lottery during normal gaming state and high probability gaming state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 70 to 87, details of the lottery (A) and (D) for shifting to ART and CZ performed in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state will be described. FIG. 70 is a schematic diagram of the transition lottery (A) (D) performed during the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, and FIGS. 71 to 87 are referred to during the transition lottery (A) (D). These are various data tables. Various data tables are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

<Overview of transition lottery (A) (D)>
Referring to FIG. 70, in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, when the start operation is performed and the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, the internal winning combination is determined by the control of main control circuit 91. . In the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, when the internal winning combination is determined, first, the starting ART and CZ transition lottery (A) (D) is performed. In the transition lottery (A) (D) at the start, basically, the winning probability of ART or CZ differs depending on the gaming state, and the winning probability of ART or CZ is higher in the high probability gaming state than in the normal gaming state. Probability is high. In the starting lottery (A) and (D) at the start, as will be described later, not only the game state but also the internal winning combination and the performance balls set in the area 113A (the lottery balls 1 to the fixed ball) are used. Or the winning probability of CZ is different.

  In the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, when the internal winning combination is determined, the apocalypse lottery for determining whether or not to operate the apocalypse is performed. This apocalypse lottery has different winning probabilities depending on the winning mode of the apocalypse operation. Specifically, the apocalypse activation mode includes a low mode, a high mode, and a concentrated mode (short, middle, and long, respectively). In mode and high mode you will not win to activate the Apocalypse. In the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, the winning mode of the apocalypse operation is shifted based on the internal winning combination, and the apocalypse operates when it can be promoted to the concentrated mode.

  Thereafter, when the stop operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, the ART and CZ transition lottery (A) (D) at the time of reel stop is performed according to the presence or absence of the operation of the apocalypse. Specifically, when the apocalypse is operating, based on the combination of the production balls (lottery balls 1 to confirmed balls) set in the area 113A and the symbols of “Bell Prize” or more, the ART and CZ The transfer lottery (A) and (D) are performed. The transfer lottery (A) and (D) when the reels are stopped have different ART or CZ winning probabilities depending on the effect balls set in the area 113A.

  On the other hand, when the apocalypse is not activated, a promotion lottery of the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 is performed. When the apocalypse is not operating, the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are not set in the apocalypse (in other words, not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11). Therefore, this promotion lottery is performed on hidden information that does not appear in the table. As will be described in detail later, during the period in which the promotion lottery is performed, the rotating combination 200 is driven, so the player can grasp that the promotion lottery is being performed.

<Various data tables referred to in the transfer lottery (A) and (D)>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 70 to 87, the transfer lottery (A) and (D) to ART and CZ performed in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state will be specifically described.

<ART lottery table at start>
FIG. 70 to FIG. 73 are diagrams showing start ART lottery tables referred to in the start transition lottery (A) and (D) in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state. The starting ART lottery table defines lottery value information for the lottery result for each current gaming state, production ball set in the area 113A, and internal winning combination.

  In this embodiment, the sub (sub control circuit 101) side sequentially subtracts the production random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range “0 to 32767” by the lottery value corresponding to each lottery result, The lottery is performed by determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called “digit” has occurred).

  Referring to the starting ART lottery table shown in FIGS. 70 to 73, during the normal gaming state, the probability of winning CZ or ART differs depending on the performance ball set in the area 113A, and the internal winning combination It can be seen that the probabilities of winning CZ or ART differ accordingly. Further, when comparing the starting ART lottery table shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 and the starting ART lottery table shown in FIG. 73, in the high probability gaming state, the player wins ART with a higher probability than the normal gaming state. In the high-probability gaming state, there is a probability that all the winning combinations will win the ART, but in the normal gaming state, it can be seen that only some of the winning combinations win the ART. To win only a part of an ART is synonymous with only part of the role being transferred to ART, so in the normal gaming state, if a part of the part is determined as an internal winning combination In the high probability gaming state, the start lottery (A) is performed when a plurality of combinations including some of these combinations are determined as internal winning combinations. become. Similarly, referring to the start-time ART lottery table shown in FIG. 73, in the high-probability gaming state, it is understood that although there is no chance to win CZ, there is a high probability of winning ART.

<Mode transfer lottery table>
74 to 78 are mode transition lottery tables that are referred to in the winning lottery of the winning mode of the apocalypse operation during the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state. The mode transition lottery table defines lottery value information for the transition destination winning mode for each apocalypse activation mode and internal winning combination for whether or not the apocalypse is currently operating. Whether or not the apocalypse is in operation is determined by the apocalypse flag. When the apocalypse flag is “0”, it means that the apocalypse is not in operation, and when the apocalypse flag is “1”, the apocalypse is in operation. Means being inside.

  As described above, the winning mode of the apocalypse operation includes a low mode, a high mode, and a concentrated mode, and each mode has a state such as short, middle, and long. The low mode, the high mode, and the concentrated mode are winning modes in which the winning expectation level of the apocalypse lottery for determining whether or not to operate the apocalypse differs as described above. Short, middle, and long are states that define whether it is easy to shift to a more advantageous winning mode or more disadvantageous winning mode. Specifically, a short is the state that is most difficult to enter the more advantageous winning mode, and the state that is most likely to enter the more disadvantageous winning mode, and the middle is less likely to enter the more advantageous winning mode. The state is a state in which it is easy to make a transition to a more disadvantageous winning mode, and the long state is the state in which it is most likely to make a transition to a more advantageous winning mode and the state in which it is most difficult to make a transition to a more disadvantageous winning mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 to 78, when the apocalypse is not operating (apocalypse flag 0), the winning mode basically increases in the order of low mode, high mode and concentrated mode, and once reaches the concentrated mode. Until the apocalypse is activated, it will not fall into the low and high modes.

<Revelation working lottery table>
FIG. 79 is an apocalypse operation lottery table referred to in the apocalypse lottery during the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state. The apocalypse activation lottery table defines lottery value information regarding the operation of the apocalypse for each apocalypse activation mode and internal winning combination for whether or not the apocalypse is active. Here, the operation of the apocalypse is performed over the guaranteed number of games to be added or subtracted as a result of the apocalypse lottery. Specifically, as a result of the apocalypse lottery, the number of guarantees is added by the number corresponding to the case where “Apocalypse in operation _ guarantee 1 addition” to “Apocalypse in action _ guarantee 5 addition” is won. When the “subtraction” is won, the guaranteed count is decremented by one. As a result of this addition / subtraction, when the guaranteed number of times becomes 0, the operation of the apocalypse ends (the apocalypse flag is changed from 1 to 0). If the guaranteed count is incremented by 1 or more when the apocalypse flag is 0, the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1, and the apocalypse is activated.

  In the apocalypse activation lottery table, “no apocalypse activation” means that the apocalypse lottery is non-winning, and the apocalypse flag is kept at 0. Similarly, “maintaining apocalypse_maintained” means maintaining the operation of the apocalypse without adding or subtracting the guaranteed number of times, and the apocalypse flag is maintained at 1.

  Referring to the apocalypse operation lottery tables in FIGS. 79A and 79B, if the apocalypse is not currently operating, the operation of the apocalypse may start only when the winning mode is the concentrated mode. I understand. Therefore, the pachislot 1 may perform an effect suggesting the current winning mode. For example, the current winning mode can be suggested by moving the rotating combination 200. Specifically, the probability of moving the rotating combination 200 is changed according to the winning mode. For example, in a situation where the player is in the concentrated mode, the probability of moving the rotating combination 200 is increased, and the high mode or the low mode is set. In a situation where the user is staying, a mode in which the probability of moving the rotating combination 200 is lowered can be considered. Similarly, an apocalypse lottery may be performed in the apocalypse lottery, and an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the guaranteed number of times is added may be performed. In particular, the effect of suggesting the degree of expectation may be performed using something different from the rotating combination 200. Specifically, the panel device 400 may display an image corresponding to the latent image 402 in a color according to the degree of expectation.

<Revelation MAP lottery table>
FIG. 80 and FIG. 81 are apocalypse MAP lottery tables for lottery of the apocalypse MAP for determining an effect ball to be set in the apocalypse in operation in the normal game state and the high probability game state. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, basically, a MAP with a larger MAP number is more advantageous to the player. This is not limited to the apocalypse MAP, but also applies to other MAPs described later. The apocalypse MAP lottery table in FIG. 80 is a table referred to when the apocalypse is activated (the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1). The apocalypse MAP lottery table in FIG. 81 is a table that is referred to when the MAP data defined for each apocalypse MAP is 0.

  The apocalypse MAP lottery table defines lottery value information for the migration destination apocalypse MAP for each current apocalypse MAP. It is assumed that “MAP0” is set as the apocalypse MAP at the initial time when the power is turned on.

<MAP data correspondence table>
In the apocalypse MAP, MAP data for determining a production ball to be set in the apocalypse in operation is defined. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of MAP data defined in each apocalypse MAP. As shown in FIG. 82, in the apocalypse MAP1, MAP data “1” is defined for the first game, and MAP data “0” is defined for the second game. When the MAP data “0” is defined, a new apocalypse MAP is lottery with reference to the apocalypse MAP lottery table shown in FIG.

<Direction lottery table during apocalypse operation>
FIG. 83 is an effect ball lottery table at the time of apocalypse operation for determining an effect ball to be set in the active apocalypse in the normal game state and the high probability game state. The apocalypse effect stage lottery table defines lottery value information about the stage balls set for each MAP data. As shown in FIG. 83, the larger the MAP data, the more advantageous performance balls are set for the player. In FIG. 83, the confirmed ball is not lottery. Although explanation is omitted in this regard, for example, by performing lottery to promote a production ball set at the time of winning a rare role, it is possible to upgrade from lottery ball 1 to lottery ball 4 to a final ball Also good.

  Also, in FIG. 83, lottery value information for the effect ball is defined for the MAP data “0”. As described above, in the case of MAP data “0”, a new apocalypse MAP is lottery. Here, either a new apocalypse MAP lottery or a production ball lottery based on MAP data “0” may be given priority. In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if the lottery of the effect ball is not performed even once in the apocalypse MAP that has been lottery, the lottery of the effect ball based on the MAP data “0” is given priority and the apocalypse that has been lottery. In the case where a lottery of a performance ball is performed even once in the MAP, the lottery of a new apocalypse MAP is given priority. For example, in the case of the apocalypse MAP “0”, all the MAP data for the five games are “0” (see FIG. 82). Lots apocalypse MAP. On the other hand, in the case of the apocalypse MAP “1”, the MAP data for the first game is “1” and the MAP data for the second game is “0” (see FIG. 82). Without a ball lottery, a new apocalypse MAP is lottered after the production ball lottery based on the MAP data “1”.

  This also applies to other MAPs described later. Specifically, the MAP data “0” is a lottery based on the MAP data “0” only in the first game, and in the case of the second game, the lottery is not performed based on the MAP data “0”. , Draw a new MAP. When such control is performed, lottery based on the MAP data “0” is not performed in the MAP having the MAP number “1” or more.

<The flow of the set of rendition balls to the apocalypse>
Here, the flow when setting the production ball in the apocalypse will be specifically described. When the apocalypse lottery is won and the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1, the apocalypse is activated. In accordance with the operation of the apocalypse, the sub control circuit 101 sets the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 to the apocalypse. As described above, the storage area corresponding to the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state is basically maintained during the game, so when the apocalypse is activated, the maintained performance ball is set in the apocalypse. become. On the other hand, the storage area corresponding to the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state is also changed when the setting is changed or at the start of business the next day (the power is turned on when a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned off and then turned on again) Cleared at a predetermined timing. When the storage area corresponding to the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state is cleared, the effect balls are initially set (re-lotted) in the storage area. Hereinafter, the flow of initial setting of the storage area according to the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state will be described.

  In the initial setting of the storage area according to the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, the apocalypse MAP is first lottery. In this initial setting, the apocalypse MAP “0”, which is the initial apocalypse MAP, is set first. In this apocalypse MAP “0”, as shown in FIG. 82, “0” is defined as MAP data for the first game. Therefore, the sub control circuit 101 draws the first effect ball based on the MAP data “0” of the first game. As a result, referring to the apocalypse activation stage ball lottery table shown in FIG. 83, “lottery ball 1” is determined as the first stage ball.

  Subsequently, the sub control circuit 101 refers to the MAP data of the second game of the apocalypse MAP “0”. As shown in FIG. 82, since the MAP data of the second game is “0”, the sub-control circuit 101 draws a new apocalypse MAP without drawing the effect ball. Specifically, referring to the apocalypse MAP lottery table referred to when the MAP data is “0” shown in FIG. 81, the migration destination apocalypse MAP is lottery from the current apocalypse MAP “0”. In the example shown in FIG. 81, the apocalypse MAP “1” is lottery as the destination apocalypse MAP. In this apocalypse MAP “1”, as shown in FIG. 82, “1” is defined as MAP data for the first game and “0” is defined as MAP data for the second game. Therefore, the sub control circuit 101 draws the second effect ball based on the MAP data “1” of the first game. As a result, referring to the apocalypse activation stage ball lottery table shown in FIG. 83, for example, “lottery ball 2” is determined as the second stage ball.

  Subsequently, the sub control circuit 101 refers to the MAP data of the second game of the apocalypse MAP “1”. As shown in FIG. 82, since the MAP data of the second game is “0”, the sub-control circuit 101 draws a new apocalypse MAP without drawing the effect ball. Specifically, referring to the apocalypse MAP lottery table referred to when the MAP data is “0” shown in FIG. 81, the apocalypse MAP of the transfer destination is lottery from the current apocalypse MAP “1”. Referring to FIG. 81, for example, apocalypse MAP “2” is lottery as the destination apocalypse MAP. In this apocalypse MAP “2”, as shown in FIG. 70, “1” is defined as MAP data for the first game, and “0” is defined as MAP data for the second game. Therefore, the sub-control circuit 101 draws the third effect ball based on the MAP data “1” of the first game. As a result, referring to the apocalypse activation stage ball lottery table shown in FIG. 83, for example, “lottery ball 3” is determined as the third stage ball.

  Similarly, when six effect balls are repeatedly determined, the sub control circuit 101 ends the lottery of the effect balls, and stores the determined effect balls in the sub RAM 103 in order. In addition, although the order which determines an effect ball is arbitrary, the sub control circuit 101 determines an effect ball in the order according to each area | region of the apocalypse 113, for example. That is, the sub-control circuit 101 determines in order from the effect balls set in the area 113A of the apocalypse 113.

<Promotion of production ball>
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a method of promoting the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 during the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an outline of the promotion method of the effect balls used in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 84A, in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, a predetermined number of performance balls are stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 103 even if the apocalypse is not activated. The stored performance ball is not set (displayed) in the apocalypse as shown in FIG. 84 (a) when the apocalypse is not activated, but corresponds to the apocalypse as shown in FIG. 84 (b) when the apocalypse is activated. Set (display) in the area.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the promotion lottery of the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 (that is, the effect balls that are not displayed) is performed in a situation where the apocalypse is not activated. In the example shown in FIG. 84, the lottery ball 1 stored in the storage area “1” in FIG. 84 (a) is promoted to the lottery ball 3 as shown in FIG. 84 (c) as a result of the promotion lottery. . Thereafter, when the apocalypse is activated, as shown in FIG. 84 (d), the effect balls stored in the sub-RAM 103 are set (displayed) in the corresponding area of the apocalypse. Comparing FIGS. 84 (b) and 84 (d), it can be seen that, as a result of the promotion lottery, the effect ball set in the region 113A is promoted from the lottery ball 1 to the lottery ball 3.

  Such a promotion lottery is performed when the rotating combination 200 moves in a situation where the apocalypse is not activated. Specifically, in the pachi-slot 1, when the cover member 198 corresponding to the spear of the rotating combination 200 that is the centerpiece is released and the centerpiece 203 corresponding to the centerpiece becomes visible to the player, it is not displayed. There will be a lottery for the promotion ball. Therefore, when the main ball body 203 appears in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, a promotion ball of an effect ball that affects the ART lottery is performed, so that the player has the main ball body 203 appearing. During the period, he hopes to be promoted to a more advantageous performance ball and will play a game.

<Movable lottery table>
FIG. 85 is an accessory movable lottery table for lottering whether or not to perform a promotion lottery of a performance ball that is not displayed during the apocalypse inactive in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state. The winning combination movable lottery table defines lottery value information related to moving the rotating combination 200 for each internal winning combination. In the pachislot machine 1, when the guarantee of the movable article becomes 1 or more as a result of the lottery using the movable article lottery table, the accessory of the rotating article 200 is moved to move the cover 200 (the cover member 198 is opened). A movement request is made to the control task (see FIG. 132 described later). Note that, as described above, while the rotating combination 200 is moving, a promotion lottery of a non-displayed effect ball is performed, and therefore the accessory movable lottery table shifts to a period during which the promotion lottery is performed. It can be said that it is a table for performing lottery of whether or not to do.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the guaranteed number of movable items is basically added when a rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and a combination other than a rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination. Thus, it is subtracted or maintained. After the guaranteed number of movements of the accessory becomes 1 or more and the rotating combination 200 moves, when the guaranteed number of movement of the combination reaches 0, the rotation of the rotating combination 200 ends and the cover member 198 is closed. That is, in this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes an accessory movable lottery means, and determines whether or not the promotion lottery is performed using the accessory movable lottery table, and guarantees that the accessory is movable based on the lottery result. When the number becomes 1 or more, a request to move the rotating combination 200 is made.

<Direction ball promotion lottery table>
Subsequently, FIG. 86 randomizes whether or not the non-displayed effect ball is promoted in a state where the rotating accessory 200 is movable (that is, when the guaranteed number of movable items is 1 or more). It is a production ball promotion lottery table for. The production ball promotion lottery table defines lottery value information on the number of production balls promoted for each internal winning combination. The production balls according to the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state are provided in the order of lottery ball 1, lottery ball 2, lottery ball 3, lottery ball 4, and final ball according to the expectation level of ART or CZ winning. The number of promotions defined in the production ball promotion lottery table indicates the number of stages in which these production balls are promoted to production balls with higher expectations. For example, “1 step promotion” means promotion from lottery ball 1 to lottery ball 2, promotion from lottery ball 2 to lottery ball 3, etc. “2 step promotion” means from lottery ball 1 It means promotion to lottery ball 3, promotion from lottery ball 2 to lottery ball 4, and the like. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a promotion lottery means, and whether or not to promote a non-displayed effect ball using the effect ball promotion lottery table in a state where the rotating combination 200 is movable. Lottery.

  As described above, the six effects balls are stored in the sub RAM 103. Here, when it is decided to promote the production ball in the promotion lottery, the production ball to be promoted is arbitrary. For example, according to the result of the promotion lottery, all six performance balls may be promoted all at once, or only one or more performance balls to be promoted may be promoted according to the result of the promotion lottery. Good. In this case, the method for determining one or more effect balls to be promoted is also arbitrary.

  For example, it can be considered that six performance balls are sequentially determined as promotion balls to be promoted. Specifically, the effect ball stored in the storage area “1” of the sub-RAM 103 is first determined as the effect ball to be promoted, and then the effect ball stored in the storage area “2” is to be promoted. Determined as the production ball. In this case, the timing for updating the promotion ball to be promoted is also arbitrary. For example, if a lottery of promotion is given a predetermined number of times for a staged ball that is finished or promoted a predetermined number of times (in the case where a lottery value is specified only for “no promotion”, a promotion lottery may be performed, In addition, if the promotion lottery may not be performed), the promotion target ball may be updated. If the promotion target ball can be promoted even in one stage, the promotion target ball is selected. It is good also as updating, and it is good also as updating the promotion target stage ball when the promotion stage target ball can be promoted to a predetermined stage ball (for example, lottery ball 4). In addition, when it is determined that a plurality of stages are promoted as a result of promotion lottery, only the stage balls that are the promotion target in this game may be promoted to a plurality of stages. While promoting, it is also possible to promote a plurality of stage balls one stage at a time, such as making the stage of the next promotion target stage one stage, etc. A plurality of performance balls may be promoted while being weighted according to whether or not the next promotion target performance ball is one stage.

  For example, it is also conceivable to determine one or more effect balls determined by lottery among six effect balls as effect balls to be promoted. The lottery for determining the promotion ball to be promoted may be given a predetermined weight. Although the weighting method is arbitrary, for example, a production ball with a low expectation can be easily lottered as a production ball to be promoted, and a production ball with a smaller number of times determined as a production ball to be promoted It can be made easy to be lottery as a promotion ball to be promoted. Even in this case, the promotion balls to be promoted may be updated at an arbitrary timing, and when it is determined to promote a plurality of stages, the production balls other than the promotion balls to be promoted are also included. It may be promoted.

<Control of Rotating character 200 during promotion>
Moreover, in the pachislot 1, it is good also as controlling the rotary combination 200 based on the result of a promotion lottery. As described above, the rotating combination 200 is provided with a plurality of LEDs, and irradiates the eyeball main body 203 from the back side. At the time of the promotion lottery, the eyeball main body 203 appears due to the movement of the rotating combination 200. Therefore, the pachislot machine 1 controls the LED according to the result of the promotion lottery, and the eyeball main body 203 visible to the player in various colors. By making it emit light, it is possible to notify the player of the result of the promotion lottery in a predictable manner. For example, a mode in which the result of the promotion lottery is notified by controlling the LED and emitting the main body 203 in various colors such as white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow can be considered. In addition, since the light emission of the plurality of LEDs provided in the rotating combination 200 is controlled by a lamp control task described later, for example, the light emission of the eyeball main body 203 is the light emission color and light emission of the LED corresponding to the eyeball main body 203. This is done by requesting a pattern from the lamp control task.

  In the pachi-slot 1, six effect balls are stored in the sub RAM 103, but the relationship between the LED emission color and the effect balls can be arbitrarily set. For example, it is good also as controlling light emission of LED based on the total number of promotion of six production balls. As an example, when the total number of promotion balls of 6 performance balls is “1” or less, the LED emits “white”, and when the total number is “3” or less, the LED emits “blue”. When the total number is “5” or less, the LED emits “yellow”.

  Moreover, it is good also as controlling light emission of LED based on the kind of one or several production balls after promotion among six production balls. Specifically, as a result of the promotion lottery, based on the type of the production ball with the highest expectation among the 6 production balls, for example, when the production ball with the highest expectation is the lottery ball 1, When the production ball with the highest expectation is the lottery ball 2, the LED emits light with "blue". When the production ball with the highest expectation is the lottery ball 3, the LED is "yellow". Flashes on.

  According to the latter method, only one or more of the six performance balls are promoted to high-expected performance balls, and the other performance balls remain as low-expected performance balls. However, the LED emits light with a highly expected color such as red or rainbow, and as a result, the eyeball main body 203 emits light with a highly expected color. On the other hand, when the six performance balls are promoted uniformly, and all of the six performance balls are performance balls with relatively low expectations, the LED has a low expectation color such as blue or yellow. As a result, the eyeball main body 203 emits light with a low-expected color.

  On the other hand, according to the former method, if the total number of promotion balls of the six performance balls is small, the LED is expected even if any of the six performance balls is promoted to a high expectations ball. As a result, the eyeball main body 203 emits light with a low-expected color. On the other hand, when the total number of promotion of 6 production balls is large, even if all 6 production balls remain production balls with relatively low expectations, the LED has a high expectation color. As a result, the eyeball main body 203 emits light with a highly expected color.

  Moreover, it is good also as controlling light emission of LED combining the former method and the latter method. Specifically, if the total number of promotion balls of the six production balls is large, or if one or more of the six production balls are promoted to high production balls, the LED is expected. When one or more of the individual production balls are promoted to high-expected production balls and the total number of promotion of the six production balls is large, the LED is expected. It is good also as making it emit light with a high color.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, two lotteries, that is, the movable lottery of the rotating combination 200 and the promotion lottery of the production ball are individually performed. It is good also as performing only a ball promotion lottery. Specifically, when it is determined that the production ball is promoted as a result of the promotion ball promotion lottery, the rotating combination 200 may be moved and the main body 203 may appear on the table.

  As in the present embodiment, a game period in which the production balls are promoted can be created by separately performing the two lotteries, ie, the movable lottery of the rotating combination 200 and the promotion lottery of the production balls. From the player's point of view, it becomes a chance period to promote the production ball during this game period, so that the interest during the period when the eyeball main body 203 is visible is improved.

  On the other hand, even if it is such a chance period, in the case of non-winning for individually promoted lottery, because the production ball is not promoted, in the method of performing two lotteries individually as in this embodiment, Even if the eyeball main body 203 becomes visible, the production ball may not be promoted. In this regard, in the method of moving the rotating combination 200 when it is decided to promote the production ball only when the promotion ball of the production ball is decided to be promoted, the production ball is always promoted when the eyeball body 203 becomes visible. Therefore, the player can have an expectation for the subsequent game.

<ART lottery table when reel is stopped>
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a reel stop ART lottery table referred to in transition lottery (A) and (D) during reel stop during the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state. The reel stop-time ART lottery table defines lottery value information for the lottery result for each effect ball set in the area 113A. Here, as described above, in the transition lottery (A) and (D) when the reel is stopped, the effect ball set in the region 113A has a combination of symbols displayed when the reel is stopped is equal to or more than the “bell winning” Only affects the lottery result. Therefore, the reel stop ART lottery table shown in FIG. 87 is a table that is referred to only when a production ball is set in the area 113A and the combination of symbols displayed at the time of reel stop is equal to or higher than the “bell winning”. is there.

  If the reel lottery ART lottery table shown in FIG. 87 is referred to, the probability of winning CZ or ART differs depending on the production ball set in the area 113A. In particular, in the lottery ball 4 and the final ball, CZ or ART is You can see that it will definitely win.

[Games in high probability gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88 and FIG. 89, the flow of games other than the transition lottery (D) in the high probability gaming state will be described. As described above, the high probability gaming state corresponds to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and when the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is shifted to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state on the main side, The probabilistic gaming state is also ended, and the normal gaming state is entered. Note that the transition from the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state on the main side is an incorrect answer to the push order bell or push order lip as described above. Therefore, the high-probability gaming state ends at the timing when the sub-side recognizes that the combination of symbols displayed at the time of incorrect answer is displayed on the push order bell or push order lip. Here, even if the normal gaming state can be shifted to the high-probability gaming state, if the high-probability gaming state immediately ends and the normal gaming state is shifted, the interest is lost. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the high probability gaming state, the correct push order is notified to the push order bell or push order lip only for a predetermined number of times.

  FIG. 88 is a schematic diagram of a game flow during the high probability gaming state, and FIG. 89 is a data table referred to during the high probability gaming state. Note that the data table shown in FIG. 89 is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

<Outline of the flow of games in the high probability gaming state>
Referring to FIG. 88, when a combination of symbols related to the RT4 transition lip is displayed while the ART transition lottery in the normal gaming state is not won, the main side shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state. At this time, the sub game state is the normal game state (RT4 game state). In this normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), when a start operation is performed and rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts, an internal winning combination is determined in accordance with the control of the main control circuit 91. In the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), when an internal winning combination is determined, avoidance points are lottery based on the determined internal winning combination. When an avoidance point is acquired in this lottery, the sub control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the high probability gaming state for the first time. 66 described above in FIG. 66 corresponds to this avoidance point lottery.

  In the high probability gaming state, based on the acquired avoidance points, a situation in which the main side shifts to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is avoided. Specifically, in the high-probability gaming state, when a start operation is performed and rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts, an internal winning combination is determined according to the control of the main control circuit 91. The sub-control circuit 101 determines whether or not there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state based on the internal winning combination. More specifically, when the internal winning combination is a push order bell or push order lip, the sub-control circuit 101 determines that there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state.

  If there is a possibility of transition to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the sub-control circuit 101 determines that the push order bell or push order lip determined as the internal winning combination is correct only when the avoidance point remains. Announce the order of pressing. By receiving this notification, the player can perform a stop operation in the correct push order, and the high-probability gaming state ends (that is, the bonus non-winning state RT1 gaming state is entered). Can be avoided. If there is no avoidance point, the player himself selects the push order in which the answer is correct.

Thereafter, when the stop operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, the game state is shifted on the main side based on the displayed combination of symbols. Specifically, when a bell spill or RT1 transition lip is displayed, the transition is made to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, and otherwise the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is maintained. . On the sub side, the sub control circuit 101 ends the high-probability gaming state and starts the normal gaming state from the next game when the main gaming state shifts to the bonus non-winning RT1 gaming state. On the other hand, the sub-control circuit 101 maintains the high probability gaming state when the main game state maintains the bonus non-winning RT4 gaming state, and also sets the next game to the high probability gaming state.
The above flow is a game flow in the high probability game state.

<Avoidance point lottery table>
FIG. 89 is an avoidance point lottery table referred to in the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state). The avoidance point lottery table specifies the number of replays determined as an internal winning combination during the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state) and information on lottery values for the avoiding points to be added for each internal winning combination in the current game. . As shown in FIG. 89, in the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), different avoidance point lottery tables are referenced based on the number of times replay is determined as an internal winning combination. In FIG. 89, the number of times the replay is determined as an internal winning combination is different between “0” and “one or more”, but the number of times that the table is different is not limited to this. .

  Referring to the avoidance point lottery table shown in FIG. 89, if the replay is determined as an internal winning combination at least once in the normal game state (RT4 game state), the probability that an avoidance point will be given increases. In the replay determined as an internal winning combination after being determined as an internal winning combination more than once, an avoidance point is easily given. As described above, in the RT4 gaming state, there is a high probability that the role related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination, and therefore, when the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state) continues for several games, avoidance points are awarded. Will be.

[Games in CZ]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95, the flow of the game in CZ will be described. FIG. 90 is a schematic diagram of a game flow in the CZ, and FIGS. 91 to 95 are data tables referred to in the CZ. The data tables shown in FIGS. 91 to 95 are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

<Outline of game flow in CZ>
As described above, when the winning lottery (A) or (D) in the normal gaming state or the high probability gaming state wins CZ, the gaming state shifts to CZ. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit constitutes the lottery state start means, and when the winning lottery is won by CZ, the gaming state is shifted to CZ. As shown in FIG. 90, in the first game after the transition to CZ, when rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started in accordance with the start operation, lottery of CZ_MAP is performed. CZ is a complete run-type chance zone that continues for up to 30 games, but ends when the lottery (C) to ART that is performed on the way is “maintained”. In the transfer lottery (C) to ART performed in the middle of this CZ, the ART winning probability increases as CZ continues. CZ_MAP is used to set the number of games in which the ART winning probability is increased in the lottery (C) for transition to ART performed in the middle of CZ.

  When CZ_MAP is randomized in the first game after the transition to CZ, invalid points are randomized. The lottery of invalid points includes an initial lottery performed in the first game after the transition to CZ and an extra lottery performed every game during CZ. The invalid point is information that determines the number of times that the lottery (C) for transferring to ART performed in the middle of CZ is “invalid”.

  Next, a lottery of the production balls set in the apocalypse is performed. Thereafter, in games other than the 30th game of CZ, it is determined whether or not the developed ball is set in the current game, that is, whether or not the developed ball is set in the region 113A. If the development ball is set in this game, there is a possibility that a lottery (C) will be performed to ART in the middle of CZ. If the development ball is not set, basically Transition lottery (C) is not performed. Specifically, when the development ball is set, the invalid point is 0, and the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the transfer lottery (C) to ART during CZ is performed. The transition lottery during CZ has a different ART winning probability depending on the CZ mode, and if it is CZ mode 1 or higher, it will always win the ART. The above-mentioned CZ_MAP is a MAP that sets the number of games in which the CZ mode increases from 0 to 1 (see FIG. 92).

  Here, when the development ball is set in the current game and the invalid point is 1 or more, or when the avoidance ball is set in the current game, an effect suggesting the current CZ mode is performed. It is good. Specifically, since the number of games in which the CZ mode is increased from 0 to 1 is set in CZ_MAP, the current CZ mode is 1, or the number of games in the CZ mode is changed from 0 to 1 It can be specified from CZ_MAP whether it goes up. When the current CZ mode is 1, or when the CZ mode is increased from 0 to 1 in a game within a few times (for example, a few times), the sub-control circuit 101 is compared with the other cases. An effect suggesting the current CZ mode can be performed by performing an effect in a different mode.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 90, in the game of the 30th game of CZ, the transfer lottery (C) to ART is performed. In this case, the transfer lottery (C) to the ART based on the CZ mode 2 is always performed, and the ART is won on the assumption that the chance zone has been completed. And when CZ is completed as mentioned above, it will transfer to a more advantageous ART game state. That is, in this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes an advantageous state lottery means, and performs a lottery (C) for shifting to ART when the CZ is completed (30 games).

  During CZ, when the lottery (C) for shifting to the ART associated with the developed ball is performed at the start, the following processing is performed. Specifically, after that, when the stop operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, whether or not the displayed combination of symbols is equal to or more than “bell winning”, that is, the correct answer in the pressing order of the pressing order bell. Determine whether or not. If the correct answer is given in the push order of the push order bell, the lottery result of the transition to the ART (C) associated with the developed ball is invalidated regardless of whether or not the ART is won and the CZ continues. become. On the other hand, if the answer is incorrect in the push order of the push order bell, the lottery result of the transfer lottery (C) to the ART associated with the developed ball is maintained, and thereafter, the game state according to the lottery result is shifted to. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a gaming state control means, performs ART transfer lottery (C) during CZ, and shifts the gaming state to the ART gaming state according to the lottery result.

  In this way, during CZ, the probability of winning the ART lottery (C) increases as the CZ continues, and in addition, when the CZ is completed, the ART lottery (C) is always won. Since it will shift to an advantageous ART gaming state, the longer the CZ, the more advantageous the situation for the player. Therefore, the player plays a game so that CZ continues. Here, since the end condition of CZ is that the lottery result of the transition to the ART (C) lottery is maintained, the player can prevent the development ball from being set in the apocalypse, In the set game, the push order bell is not determined as the internal winning combination, and if the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the development ball is set in the apocalypse, The game will be played in the correct order of pressing.

<CZ_MAP lottery table>
FIG. 91 is a CZ_MAP lottery table referred to in the first game after the transition to CZ. The CZ_MAP lottery table defines lottery value information for the type of CZ_MAP. After shifting to CZ, the sub control circuit 101 refers to the CZ_MAP lottery table and lots CZ_MAP used in the CZ.

<CZ_MAP correspondence table>
FIG. 92 is a CZ_MAP correspondence table showing the contents of CZ_MAP lottery by the CZ_MAP lottery table. In each CZ_MAP, a CZ mode is set for each number of continuous games in the CZ. The CZ mode is information for setting the ART winning probability in the transition lottery (C) to the ART in the CZ as described above. The CZ mode is set such that the larger the value of the CZ mode, the higher the ART winning probability. ing. As shown in FIG. 92, each of CZ_MAP is set so that the CZ mode increases each time the number of continuing games in the CZ increases, and does not decrease once the CZ mode increases. That is, each CZ_MAP is set so that the number of games that rise from CZ mode 0 to CZ mode 1 is different. Further, in all CZ_MAP, when the number of continued games is 30, the CZ mode is set to 2.

  In this embodiment, only three types of CZ modes 0, 1, and 2 are provided as CZ modes. However, the present invention increases the CZ mode every time the number of continuous games in the CZ increases, It suffices if the mode is set so that it does not fall when the mode is raised, and the types of CZ modes are not limited to three.

<Invalid point lottery table>
FIG. 93 is an invalid point lottery table. The invalid point lottery table draws invalid points for invalidating the transfer lottery (C) to ART which is performed when the pushing bell is determined as an internal winning combination in the game in which the development ball in the CZ is set. Used for. When the invalid point is 1 or more, the transition lottery (C) to ART performed when the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the developed ball is set is invalidated. When the invalid point is 1 or more, the lottery (C) may be invalidated once, or the lottery (C) may not be performed in the first place.

  As described above, the invalid point lottery includes an initial lottery performed in the first game after the transition to CZ and an extra lottery performed every game during CZ. FIG. 93A is an invalid point lottery table used for lottery of initial values, and specifies lottery value information for invalid points determined as initial values. 93 (B) and (C) are invalid point lottery tables used for extra lottery, and lottery for invalid points to be added for each type of stage ball and internal winning combination set in this game. Specify value information.

<Direction ball lottery table>
FIG. 94 is an effect ball lottery table used when lottery effect balls set in the apocalypse during CZ. The lottery value information for the production balls to be set for each final production ball in the set is defined. The final effect ball in the set is, for example, an effect ball set in the region 113E farthest from the current game. Referring to FIG. 94, when the final performance ball in the set is the development ball, the development ball is not lottery. That is, during CZ, two development balls are not set continuously in the apocalypse areas 113A to 113E. On the other hand, when the final effect ball in the set is other (blank or avoidance ball), the development ball is lottery with a predetermined probability.

  In CZ, either the development ball or the avoidance ball is set in the apocalypse, but as shown in the production ball lottery table, the production ball lottery draws only the development ball or blank (empty), The avoidance ball is not lottery. Here, when the invalid point is 1 or more and the development ball is set in the apocalypse, the avoidance ball is set in the apocalypse by rewriting the set development ball. When the invalid point is 1 or more, the timing for rewriting the developed ball to the avoidance ball is arbitrary. For example, among the regions 113A to 113E, the developed ball may not be rewritten as an avoidance ball until the region 113B is reached. Of course, the developed ball is rewritten as an avoidance ball at the time of the region 113E. Alternatively, the development ball may be maintained at the time of the region 113A, and the end of CZ may be avoided by invalidating the transition lottery (C) itself.

<ART lottery table in CZ>
FIG. 95 is an ART lottery table in CZ referred to in the lottery (C) for transition to ART in CZ. The ART lottery table during CZ defines lottery value information for the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) for each presence / absence of winning in the CZ mode and BB. Referring to the ART lottery table during CZ, when the BB is not won, the probability of winning the ART is low when the CZ mode is 0, and the ART is always won when the CZ mode is 1 or more. In the CZ mode, it is sufficient if the winning probability of ART in the transition lottery (C) and the ART advantage at the time of ART winning is more advantageous to the player as the numerical value is larger. There is no need to set it up.

[Games in BB]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96 to FIG. 101, the flow of the game in the bonus state (also referred to as “BB in progress”) will be described. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a part of the correspondence relationship between the type of winning combination managed on the main (main control circuit 91) side in BB and the abbreviated name of winning combination managed on the sub (sub control circuit 101) side. FIG. 97 is a schematic diagram of the game flow in the BB, and FIGS. 98 to 101 are data tables referred to in the BB. The data tables shown in FIGS. 98 to 101 are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

<Correspondence between main / sub side of winning role>
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a part of the correspondence relationship between the type of winning combination managed on the main (main control circuit 91) side in BB and the abbreviated name of winning combination managed on the sub (sub control circuit 101) side. is there. On the sub side, the winning combination on the main side is managed with the abbreviations shown in the correspondence table of FIG. The correspondences other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 96 are the same as those in FIG.

<Overview of the flow of games during the BB>
As shown in FIG. 97, a game in the BB is performed with the operation of the BB as a trigger. When the BB operation is performed, the BB mode is set to zero. Here, the BB mode is information for setting the ART winning probability in the transfer lottery (F) to ART performed during BB. The pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has BB modes 0 to 5 as the BB mode, and the greater the numerical value of the BB mode, the higher the ART winning probability.

  Subsequently, when the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started in accordance with the start operation during the BB, a lottery (F) to the ART performed at the start during the BB is performed. The transition lottery (F) at the start wins ART when the sub-side abbreviation “seven matching lip” is determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the above-mentioned BB mode, and in other cases You will not win for ART.

  Subsequently, based on the internal winning combination in the BB, a mode-up lottery in the BB mode is performed. In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a winning combination that is likely to be mode-up is determined for each current BB mode. Although details will be described later, in the pachi-slot 1, it is set so that as the BB mode is increased, there are fewer types of winning combinations that may be mode-up.

  Thereafter, when a medal is paid out in accordance with the stop operation, it is determined whether or not to end the operation of the BB. In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the BB ends when more than 59 medals are paid out during the BB. If more than 59 medals have not yet been paid out, the operation of BB continues. On the other hand, when more than 59 medals have been paid out, a lottery (F) to ART is performed at the end of the BB. The transition lottery (F) at the end is a lottery performed in accordance with the BB mode, and the greater the numerical value of the BB mode, the higher the ART winning probability.

  When BB ends in a state of winning ART, ART (enemy determination ART) starts from the next game. Here, as shown in FIG. 17, during BB, in the situation where the role related to JACIN is carried over as an internal winning combination, the state shifts to the high RT state (RT4 gaming state), and the pattern corresponding to the role related to JACIN When the combination of is displayed, it shifts to a low RT state (RT2 gaming state). Then, after the BB ends, the RT gaming state during the BB is maintained, so that after the BB ends, the high RT state or the low RT state is caused depending on the result of the gaming during the BB.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when the BB ends in the state of winning the ART, the ART may be executed at the timing when the state shifts to the high RT state, and regardless of the type of the RT gaming state, ART (more specifically, AT) may be executed. In other words, when the BB ends in the low RT state, the enemy determination ART may be started without waiting for the transition to the high RT state. The enemy determination ART in this case is not probable that the role related to the replay is determined as an internal winning combination, but the correct answer push order according to the push order is notified, and the apocalypse is followed according to the control during the enemy determination ART. A production ball is set. As will be described later, during the enemy determination ART, as a result of setting the friendly ball in the apocalypse, there is a possibility that the HP of the ally character will increase, and if the HP of the ally character increases, win the subsequent battle ART The possibility of (continuing) increases. Even if the enemy determination ART is started in the low RT state, it is possible to give the player the benefit of increasing the HP of the teammate character (that is, increasing the expected degree of continuation of the ART gaming state). The disadvantage that the player who has finished BB receives can be reduced.

<ART lottery table when starting during BB>
FIG. 98 is an ART lottery table for start during BB referred to in the transfer lottery (F) at start during BB. The start-time ART lottery table during the BB is referred to when the sub-side abbreviation “seven matching lip” is determined, and defines lottery value information for the lottery result of transition to ART. As shown in FIG. 98, when the sub-side abbreviation “seven lip” is determined, the winning lottery (F) at the start always wins the ART.

  Here, referring to the correspondence table of winning combinations shown in FIG. 96, between the JAC2 flags (the state where JACIN2 is carried over as an internal winning combination) and between the JAC3 flags (the state where JACIN3 is carried over as an internal winning combination), the main Only “F_312 upper 7-alignment” to “F_2nd cross 7-alignment” on the side are “7-aligned lip”. On the other hand, between the JAC1 flags (in the state where JACIN1 is carried over as an internal winning combination), “F_J1 upper stage 7 lip” to “F_J1 cross 7” are changed to “F_312 upper stage 7 alignment” to “F_2nd cross 7 alignment” on the main side. A total of six, including three “lip”, is “seven lip”. Therefore, in the pachislot 1, the probability of winning an ART in the transition lottery (F) at the start differs depending on the type of carryover combination carried over during BB.

<Mode up lottery table during BB>
99 and 100 are BB mode-up lottery tables that are referred to in the BB mode mode-up lottery. The BB mode-up lottery table defines lottery value information for the lottery result of the mode-up lottery for each current BB mode and internal winning combination.

  Referring to the BB mid-mode lottery table, when the current BB mode is 0, if any one of push order bell, common bell, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry or chanlip is determined as an internal winning combination, BB The mode will go up. That is, there are six types of winning combinations that may be mode-up from BB mode 0. Similarly, there are five types of winning combinations that may be mode-up from BB mode 1, four types of winning combinations that may be mode-up from BB mode 2, and modes from BB mode 3 to mode. There are three types of winning combinations that may be improved, and there are two types of winning combinations that may be upgraded from BB mode 4.

  In addition, winning combinations that may be mode-up from BB mode 4 are included in winning combinations that may be mode-up in BB mode 3, and similarly, winning combinations that may be mode-up from BB mode 3 Is included in the winning combination that may be mode-up in BB mode 2, and the winning combination that may be mode-up from BB mode 2 is included in the winning combination that may be mode-up in BB mode 1. The winning combination that may be mode-up from BB mode 1 is included in the winning combination that may be mode-up in BB mode 0.

  As described above, in the pachislot 1, the type of winning combination that may be mode-up is reduced as the BB mode is increased, and the winning combination that is likely to be mode-up when the BB mode is high is Even if the BB mode is low, the mode may be improved.

  Note that in the BB mode up lottery table illustrated in FIGS. 99 and 100, the BB mode is skipped instead of one step at a time so that the mode can be raised (for example, the BB mode without passing from the BB mode 0 to the BB mode 1). Mode up to 2 or more). In this regard, the BB mode up lottery table may be configured so that the BB mode is always mode-up only one step at a time. According to such a configuration, since the BB mode can be raised only one step at a time, the expectation while staying in each BB mode is lowered, so that the BB mode can be increased by skipping the BB mode. Can be set to increase the expectation that will increase. As a result, it is easy to go up to a certain BB mode in the BB, so that it becomes easy to create a game form in which the BB mode gradually increases.

  Here, referring to the mode up lottery table for BB shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, when the internal winning combination is a champ, the BB mode is likely to rise. Also, referring to the winning combination table shown in FIG. 96, between the JAC1 flag and between the JAC3 flags, only five of “F_J3 chance lip 1” to “F_J3 cherry lip” on the main side are “Chan lips”. On the other hand, among the JAC2 flags, a total of 10 “Chan Lip” is obtained by adding “F_J2 Chance Lip 1” to “F_J2 Cherry Lip” to “F_J3 Chance Lip 1” to “F_J3 Cherry Lip” on the main side. "It has become. Therefore, in pachislot 1, the probability of raising the BB mode differs depending on the type of carryover combination carried over during BB, and as a result, transition at the end of the BB depending on the type of carryover combination carried over during BB In the lottery (F), the probability of winning the ART is different.

<ART lottery table at the end of BB>
FIG. 101 is a BB end-time ART lottery table referred to in the transfer lottery (F) at the BB end time. The BB end ART lottery table defines lottery value information for the lottery result of transition to ART for each state in BB and for each BB mode. Note that the BB end-time ART lottery table in FIG. 101 (A) is referred to in the main game state “RB game state in bonus state” and “RT4 game state in bonus state”, and BB in FIG. 101 (B). The end ART lottery table is referred to in the main game state “RT0 gaming state in bonus state” and “RT2 gaming state in bonus state” (see FIG. 17).

[Games during ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102 to FIG. 121, the flow of the game during the ART game state (also referred to as “ART in progress”) will be described. FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game during the enemy determination ART, FIG. 103 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game during the battle ART, and FIGS. 104 to 121 are referred to during the ART. This is a data table. The data tables shown in FIGS. 104 to 121 are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

<Overview of the game flow during ART>
As shown in FIG. 102, when the lottery to shift to ART is won in the general gaming state (normal gaming state, high-probability gaming state, CZ) or bonus state, the sub-control circuit 101 responds according to the situation winning the transition lottery. Rotting the ART state. The ART state is a state in which the degree of expectation for continuing the ART gaming state is different. Basically, the ART state is easier to continue (advantageous for the player) as the ART state has a larger numerical value. When the ART state is determined and the main game state shifts to the bonus non-winning state RT4 game state, the enemy determination ART is started.

  When rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started in response to the start operation during the enemy determination ART, a lottery ball to be set in the apocalypse is performed. In the enemy determination ART, production balls such as boss balls 1 to 8 for determining enemy characters to fight during the battle ART and teammate balls for increasing the HP of the teammate character are set in the apocalypse. . The ART state determined before the start of the enemy determination ART is referred to in the production ball lottery, and as the ART state having a larger numerical value, more boss balls are set in the apocalypse that a teammate character can easily win.

  This lottery of effect balls is performed based on the boss MAP data and the ART state defined for the boss MAP described later. During the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP “1” is set first, and then the boss MAP with a larger value is set as the same enemy determination ART continues.

  If the boss ball is set in the apocalypse immediately after the start of the enemy determination ART, the enemy determination ART may end immediately after the start. Therefore, it is possible to set the guaranteed number of times that the production ball is not set in the apocalypse at the start of the enemy determination ART. By doing so, since the enemy determination ART continues for the minimum number of guaranteed times, it is possible to prevent the enemy determination ART from ending immediately after the start. The guaranteed number of times may be a predetermined fixed number (for example, five games), or may be determined by lottery at the start of the enemy determination ART. Also, the number of warranties differs between the enemy decision ART (so-called first hit) that was started when winning the ART lottery and the enemy determination ART that was started when the ART gaming state continued. It is also possible to make it. Also in this case, the fixed number of guarantees may be made different in both cases, and the probability of lottery of the guarantee times may be made different in both cases. Further, when the ART gaming state continues, the guaranteed number of times may be varied according to the type of enemy character that has battled in the battle ART at the time of the continuation. Also in this case, the fixed guaranteed number of times may be made different according to the type of enemy character that has battled in the battle ART at the time of continuation, and the probability of lottery of the guaranteed number may be made different.

  Subsequently, the HP of the teammate character is determined. It is used in the battle ART in which the HP of the ally character determined here is continued. Note that the HP of the teammate character is determined based on the initial determination made in the first game of the enemy determination ART and the extra lottery described later when the teammate ball is set in the apocalypse.

  In the initial determination, the control differs depending on whether the current teammate character's HP is less than the initial value (HP50). If the value is greater than or equal to the initial value, the current HP of the teammate character is maintained as it is. In the pachislot 1, when the teammate character wins in the battle ART, the enemy determination ART is performed again. At this time, the HP of the ally character fluctuates according to the result of the continued ART (for example, the increase in the HP due to the friendly ball (uplift lottery) during the enemy determination ART of the continued ART, or the continued ART battle ART In a new enemy determination ART after the enemy ball (enemy attack) in the middle), the HP of the ally character is set according to the change from the initial value.

  Subsequently, the sub-control circuit 101 performs control according to the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game. For example, when a boss ball is set, it is determined whether or not a push order bell (which may include a common bell) is determined as an internal winning combination, and the push order bell is determined as an internal winning combination. If so, a boss corresponding to the type of boss ball set in the apocalypse in this game is determined as an opponent in the battle ART. That is, in this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes an opponent determination unit, and determines an opponent in the battle ART according to the boss balls 1 to 8 set in the apocalypse in this game.

  When the battle ART opponent is determined in this manner, the HP of the enemy character to be the opponent is determined. The enemy character's HP is determined based on the internal winning combination of the next game in which the opponent is determined. For example, when the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the enemy character's HP is reduced. To be determined. When the opponent is determined in the enemy determination ART (the pushing bell wins at the time of the boss ball) and the HP of the enemy character is determined (the internal winning combination of the next game), the enemy determination ART is ended and the next game is started. Battle ART will start. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes the second advantageous state starting means, and determines the HP of the opponent and the enemy character of the opponent based on the boss ball set during the enemy determination ART. End the enemy decision ART and start the battle ART from the next game.

  On the other hand, if the performance ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a teammate ball, the sub-control circuit 101 performs a lottery on the teammate character's HP. In this extra lottery, the HP of the teammate character is increased (added) based on the internal winning combination. Specifically, when a teammate ball is set in the apocalypse in this game, the player wins a lottery with “bell winning” or higher, and the HP of the teammate character increases. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a numerical value adding means, and when the teammate ball is set in the apocalypse, performs the lottery on the teammate character's HP based on the internal winning combination, and this lottery result The HP of the teammate character is increased (added) based on the above. “Bell winning” means that a push order bell or common bell is determined as an internal winning combination, and “Bell winning” or higher means “bell winning”, purely off, watermelon, weak cherry, strong One of the rare roles such as cherry and chanlip is determined as an internal winning combination.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the enemy determination ART is repeatedly performed until an opponent is determined. On the other hand, when the opponent is determined in the enemy determination ART and the HP of the enemy character is determined, the enemy determination ART ends, and the battle ART starts from the next game. That is, in this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a first advantageous state control means, determines an enemy character to fight during the battle ART, determines the HP of the teammate character, and adds lottery when the ART continues. And so on.

  As shown in FIG. 103, when rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started in response to the start operation during the battle ART, a lottery of the effect balls set in the apocalypse is performed. In the battle ART, performance balls such as teammate balls, enemy balls, and awakening balls for determining an attacking character are set in the apocalypse. As will be described later, parameters of attack power, defense power, and speed are set for each enemy character, and the lottery of the production ball is performed according to the speed of the enemy character. Specifically, an enemy character with a higher speed has a higher probability that an enemy ball will be lottery, and an enemy character with a lower speed has a higher probability that an ally ball will be lottery.

  Subsequently, during the battle ART, a battle between the teammate character and the enemy character is performed based on the internal winning combination and the production balls set in the apocalypse. Specifically, when the performance ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an ally ball or awakening ball, the ally character attacks the enemy character at “Bell Winner” or higher, and the HP of the enemy character Decrease. In this game, the rendition ball set in the apocalypse is an awakening ball, and if it is `` Bell Winner '' or higher, the friendly ball is stocked, and the enemy ball that is set in the apocalypse is the amount of stock It is rewritten as an ally ball.

  On the other hand, if the performance ball set in the apocalypse is an enemy ball in this game, the enemy character attacks the ally character with “Bell Winner”, the HP of the ally character decreases, In the “winning”, the ally character attacks the enemy character, and the HP of the enemy character is reduced. Note that “rare role winning” means that any of the rare roles such as pure loss, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, and Chang Lip is determined as the internal winning combination.

  Here, the amount of decrease in the HP of the ally character when attacking the enemy character differs depending on the attack power set for the enemy character. The enemy character having a higher attack power has a larger HP decrease amount, and the attack power is higher. The lower the enemy character, the smaller the HP reduction amount of the teammate character. Similarly, the amount of decrease in the HP of the enemy character at the time of the teammate character attack differs according to the defense strength set for the enemy character, and the enemy character having a higher defense strength has a smaller HP decrease amount and a greater defense strength. The lower the enemy character, the greater the enemy character's HP reduction. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a numerical subtraction means, and reduces the HP of the teammate character when the effect ball set in the apocalypse during the battle ART is an enemy ball (third effect information). (Subtract) and reduce (subtract) the HP of the enemy character in the case of a friendly ball (fourth effect information).

  As shown in FIG. 103, the battle ART is ended when the HP of either the ally character or the enemy character becomes 0 as a result of the battle. Specifically, when the teammate character's HP reaches 0, the battle ART ends and one set of the ART gaming state ends. On the other hand, when the enemy character's HP becomes 0, the battle ART ends without changing the number of ART gaming state sets. Then, when the number of ART gaming state sets remains at the end of the battle ART, the ART gaming state continues and the battle ART shifts to a new enemy determination ART. In other words, in this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the second advantageous state control means and the advantageous state control means, and sets the rendition of the effect ball attacked by the enemy character during the battle ART, the ally character and the enemy character. Control of the transition to enemy determination ART by the end of the ART gaming state or the continuation of the ART gaming state based on the result of the battle and the result of the battle. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a continuation control means, and when the enemy character's HP becomes 0 as a result of the battle, or the teammate character's HP becomes 0, the ART game state When the number of sets remains, the ART gaming state is continued, and the gaming state is shifted from the battle ART to the enemy determination ART.

<ART status lottery table>
FIG. 104 is an ART state lottery table which is referred to in order to lottery an ART state when winning a lottery for shifting to ART. The ART state lottery table defines lottery value information for the ART state for each situation when winning a lottery for shifting to ART. For example, when winning a lottery (A) (D) for transition to ART performed during the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, refer to the ART state lottery table in the “normal gaming state, high probability gaming state” column. Then, the ART state is lottery. Similarly, when a winning lottery (C) for shifting to ART in CZ is performed, the ART state is determined by referring to the ART state random determination table corresponding to the CZ mode in CZ. In addition, when a winning lottery (F) for transition to ART in the bonus state is won, the ART state is determined by referring to the ART state lottery table in the “bonus state column”.

  Referring to FIG. 104, when a winning lottery is won in the CZ mode 2, an ART state having a large numerical value is lottered compared to the case where a winning lottery is won in the CZ modes 0 and 1 and other cases. Become. Here, the CZ mode 2 is a CZ mode in the case of completing the CZ, and the ART state is a state where the ART is more advantageous to the player as the value is larger (the state where the ART is easily continued). It can be seen that when the race is completed, the player does not just shift to ART but becomes more advantageous to the player.

<Various data tables to be referenced during the enemy determination ART>
Next, various data tables referred to during the enemy determination ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 111.

<Boss MAP lottery table>
FIG. 105 is a boss MAP lottery table for lottering a boss MAP for determining a production ball to be set in the apocalypse in the enemy determination ART. During the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP “1” is set first, and then, when the boss MAP data defined for each boss MAP is 0, a new boss MAP is lottery. The boss MAP lottery table in FIG. 105 is a table that is referred to for lottery of a new boss MAP when the boss MAP data is 0.

  Referring to the boss MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 105, it can be seen that in the pachislot 1, a boss MAP having a large numerical value is likely to be lottered each time the boss MAP is lottered. Specifically, the boss MAP “3” is easily lottered from the boss MAP “1”, and similarly, the boss MAP “5” is easily lottered from the boss MAP “3”. On the other hand, when the boss MAP “1” is lottered from the boss MAP “1”, the boss MAP “3” is easily lottered from the boss MAP “4”. However, since the boss MAP “5” is lottered from the boss MAP “3” thereafter, the boss MAP having a large numerical value is lottered each time the boss MAP is lottered.

  In addition, referring to the boss MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 105, when the boss MAP is updated to the boss MAP “52” as a result of repeated boss MAP lottery, the boss MAP “52” or the boss MAP is subsequently updated. It can be seen that only one of “53” is lottery and other boss MAPs are not lottery. As will be described in detail later, when these bosses MAP “52” and “53” are set as the boss MAP, an effect ball advantageous to the player is determined as an effect ball set in the apocalypse. Therefore, the boss MAPs “52” and “53” set as a result of repeated lottery of the boss MAP can be said to be the ceiling of the boss MAP. When the boss MAP reaches the ceiling, an advantageous effect for the player The ball will be set in the Apocalypse.

<Boss MAP data correspondence table>
In the boss MAP, boss MAP data for determining an effect ball to be set in the apocalypse is defined. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of boss MAP data defined for each boss MAP. As shown in FIG. 106, the boss MAP data “1” is defined for the first to fourth games in the boss MAP1, and the boss MAP data “0” is defined for the fifth game. When the boss MAP data “0” is defined, a new boss MAP is lottery with reference to the boss MAP lottery table shown in FIG.

<Direction ball lottery table during enemy decision ART>
FIG. 107 and FIG. 108 are enemy ball determination effect ball lottery tables for determining the effect balls to be set in the apocalypse in the enemy determination ART. The during-art production ball lottery table defines information on lottery values for the production balls set for each boss MAP data and ART state. In FIG. 107A, the lottery value information for the effect ball is also defined for the boss MAP data “0”, but the boss newer than the effect ball lottery based on the MAP data “0”. When priority is given to lottery of MAP, it is not used.

  Referring to FIGS. 107 and 108, when the boss MAP data is “1”, “2”, “4”, the lottery effect ball is almost constant regardless of the ART state, while the boss MAP data “3” ”, The effect balls lottered according to the ART state are greatly different. For example, referring to the ART state “28” or more in the case of the boss MAP data “3”, it can be seen that one of the boss balls 7 and 8 is determined as the effect ball. Note that the boss balls 7 and 8 are effect balls that determine the continuation of the battle ART when determined as an opponent (see FIG. 68). In addition, referring to the boss MAP data correspondence table shown in FIG. 106, it can be seen that the boss MAP data “3” is defined for many boss MAPs. In many cases, the effect ball is based on the boss MAP data “3”. It can be seen that is lottery.

  From this, it can be seen that the larger the ART state value, the more advantageous the ART for the player, and since the ART state of “28” or more is lottered when the CZ finishes (see FIG. 104), It can be seen that the migrating ART is easy to continue.

  106 and 107, when the boss MAP is “52”, “4” is defined as the boss MAP data, and any of the boss balls 7 and 8 for which the continuation of the battle ART is fixed is determined. It turns out that it is decided as a production ball. Similarly, when the boss MAP is “53”, it is understood that “2” is defined as the boss MAP data, and the teammate ball that increases the physical strength (HP) of the teammate character is determined as the effect ball.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 105, the bosses MAP “52” and “53” are the ceilings of the bosses MAP set when the boss MAP lottery is repeated. When the boss MAP ceiling is reached, only the boss balls 7 and 8 whose continuation is confirmed or the teammate balls that increase the HP of the teammate character are set in the apocalypse, and the subsequent ART is easy to continue. I understand that That is, in the present embodiment, the boss MAP lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76 defines the boss MAP data (lottery value information) for determining the effect ball to be set in the apocalypse during the enemy determination ART. A lottery information storage unit that stores a plurality of MAPs (lottery information) is configured. In this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes lottery information determination means, determines a boss MAP by referring to the boss MAP lottery table, and determines an effect ball to be set in the apocalypse based on the boss MAP. Then, the boss MAP is updated to another boss MAP.

<Effect-making ART during ball-raising lottery table>
FIG. 109 is an effect determining ball upgrade lottery table during enemy determination ART that is referred to in order to rewrite the enemy ball set in the apocalypse during the enemy determination ART with a friendly ball. The effect ball lottery table during the enemy determination ART defines lottery value information with respect to the number of stock of friendly balls for each internal winning combination. When the stock of one or more friendly balls is determined by this lottery, the boss balls are rewritten into friendly balls according to the number of stocks. In addition, the timing which rewrites a boss ball to an ally ball is arbitrary. Referring to FIG. 109, when a rare combination (pure off, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, chan lip) is determined as an internal winning combination during an enemy determination ART, a friendly ball is stocked.

(Rewrite to ally ball)
Here, with reference to FIG. 155, an operation example when rewriting a boss ball to a friend ball will be described. FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating an outline of an operation when a boss ball is rewritten to a friendly ball during the enemy determination ART.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), in the present game, the sub RAM 103 stores the boss ball 1 in the storage area “1”, the boss ball 2 in the storage area “2”, the boss ball 1 in the storage area “3”, and the storage area. The boss ball 4 is stored in “4”, the friend ball is stored in the storage area “5”, and the boss ball 3 is stored in the storage area “6”. As described above, the effect balls stored in the storage areas “1” to “5” of the sub-RAM 103 are set (displayed) in the apocalypse and the effects stored in the storage area “6” of the sub-RAM 103. The ball is not set in the Apocalypse (not shown).

  When rewriting to the teammate ball is not performed (stock of the teammate ball is “0”), as shown in FIG. 155 (a), the effect balls stored in the storage area of the sub-RAM 103 slide, and as a result, the next In the game storage areas “1” to “5”, the effect balls stored in the current game storage areas “2” to “6” are stored, and in the next game storage area “6”, lottery is performed. The effected ball is newly memorized.

  On the other hand, when there is a stock of ally balls, the boss balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are rewritten to ally balls. FIG. 155 (b) is an example of rewriting the boss ball when the friend ball stock is “2”. When the ally ball stock is “2”, two boss balls are rewritten as ally balls. Since the effect ball stored in the current game storage area “1” does not exist in the next game, in the example shown in FIG. 155 (b), it is stored in the current game storage area “2” “3”. The two boss balls are rewritten as ally balls in the next game.

  In the example shown in FIG. 155 (b), the boss balls on the front side (storage area “1” side among the storage areas “1” to “6”) are rewritten in order to ally balls. The method for determining the boss ball is arbitrary. For example, a priority order may be given to the boss balls 1 to 8 and a target boss ball to be rewritten according to the priority order may be determined. It is also preferable to set this priority based on, for example, the expected level of continuation of the battle ART. That is, it is good also as determining the continuation expectation degree of battle ART with respect to each of the boss balls 1-8, and determining it as the target boss ball to be rewritten in order from the boss ball having the lower (or higher) continuation expectation degree.

  It is also preferable to set the priority order based on the number of stock of friendly balls. For example, when the number of stock of friendly balls is a predetermined number (for example, “1”), the target boss balls to be rewritten are determined based on the first priority set for the boss balls 1 to 8, and When the number of allied balls is a specific number (for example, “2”), the boss balls to be rewritten are determined based on the second priority set for the boss balls 1 to 8.

  It is also preferable to set the priority order based on the internal winning combination when stocking the friendly balls. For example, when stock of friendly balls is performed when a predetermined combination (for example, watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, based on the first priority set for the boss balls 1 to 8 If the boss ball to be rewritten is determined, and the stock of the friendly ball is performed when the specific role (for example, the chance lip) is determined as the internal winning combination, The boss ball to be rewritten is determined based on the set second priority.

  The boss ball is rewritten to the friendly ball according to the stock of the friendly ball, so that the HP of the friendly character increases, and the HP of the friendly character becomes difficult to become “0” in the battle ART. Become. Here, as described above, the boss balls 7 and 8 are boss balls for which the continuation of the battle ART is confirmed. If the boss balls 7 and 8 are rewritten into a teammate ball, the battle ART is difficult to continue. Therefore, the boss balls 7 and 8 may be maintained without being rewritten as ally balls. That is, in this embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a specific role rewriting means, and when the rare role is won internally, the boss ball stored in the sub RAM 103 is rewritten to a friendly ball, and the target boss ball is a boss ball. If it is 7, 8, it is maintained without being rewritten as a friendly ball. Further, the sub-control circuit 101 determines a boss ball to be rewritten with the first priority based on the internal winning of the predetermined combination, and rewrites with the second priority based on the internal winning of the specific combination. Determine the target boss ball.

  FIG. 155 (c) is a diagram showing an example of rewriting the boss ball when the boss ball 7 or the boss ball 8 is stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 103. In FIG. 155 (c), the stock of the friendly ball is “2”, and the storage areas “1” to “6” of the current game have boss ball 1, boss ball 7, boss ball 1, boss ball 4, The friendly ball and boss ball 3 are stored. When the boss balls are rewritten in order from the front boss balls, the boss balls 7 and 1 stored in the storage areas “2” and “3” are determined as the boss balls to be rewritten. In this case, while the boss ball 1 is rewritten to a friendly ball, the boss ball 7 is maintained without being rewritten to a friendly ball.

  In the example shown in FIG. 155 (c), with respect to the boss ball 7 to be rewritten, the boss ball 7 is maintained while inserting the friendly ball on the front side. As a result, the next game storage area “1” stores the friendly ball inserted in front of the boss ball 7 to be rewritten, and the next game storage area “2” maintains the boss ball 7 as it is. Is done. The next game storage area “3” stores the ally balls rewritten from the boss ball 1, and the next game storage areas “4” to “6” store the current game storage areas “4” to “4”. The effect ball having the same content as “6” is stored.

  In the example shown in FIG. 155 (c), the boss ball 7, 8 that determines the continuation of the battle ART by determining the boss ball 7 as the boss ball to be rewritten and inserting a friendly ball in front of it is determined. However, the boss balls 7 and 8 may not be determined as boss balls to be rewritten in the first place.

  It is disadvantageous for the player that the boss ball that is confirmed to be continued will be rewritten to an ally ball, so maintaining this boss ball without rewriting will not give the player dissatisfaction, Is preferred. Note that the production ball stored in the storage area “6” is not set in the apocalypse and is not displayed, so even if it is a boss ball whose continuation is confirmed, it can be rewritten as a teammate ball. Good. This is because such a non-displayed effect ball cannot be grasped by the player, and therefore the player does not feel dissatisfied even if the boss ball whose continuation is confirmed is rewritten to a friend ball.

<Enemy decision ART ally power addition lottery table>
FIG. 110 is an enemy-determined ART ally power extra lottery table that is referred to when the teammate character's HP extra lottery is performed when the performance ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an ally ball. The enemy determination ART medium ally power extra lottery table defines the extra amount of the ally character's HP for each internal winning combination. Referring to FIG. 110, it can be seen that when the teammate ball is set in the apocalypse in this game, the HP of the teammate character increases after “bell winning” or more.

<Boss power lottery table during enemy determination ART>
FIG. 111 is an enemy determination ART boss power lottery table that is referred to when determining the HP of an enemy character in the next game after determining the enemy character of the opponent. The boss power lottery table during the enemy determination ART defines lottery value information for the enemy character's HP for each internal winning combination. Referring to FIG. 111, it can be seen that when a rare role other than a pure loss is won, the enemy character's HP is determined to be small. The boss power lottery table during the enemy determination ART may be a common table for all enemy characters that are opponents, or a different table may be provided for each enemy character. By providing a different table for each enemy character, an HP corresponding to the individuality of the enemy character can be determined.

<Various data tables to be referenced during battle ART>
Next, various data tables referred to during the battle ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 121. Prior to the description of these data tables, the characteristics of each enemy character will be described.

<Boss status table>
FIG. 112 is a boss status correspondence table. Statuses such as attack power, defense power and speed are set for the boss 1 to boss 8 which are enemy characters of the opponent. For example, the boss 1 is of an attack type and has a high attack power but a low speed. On the other hand, the boss 5 is a speed type, and although the attack power is low, the speed is high. During the battle ART, a battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed according to the characteristics of the enemy character.

  The bosses 7 and 8 are enemy characters whose continuation of the ART gaming state is determined when determined as an opponent. As described above, in the ART gaming state, when the HP of the enemy character becomes 0 before the HP of the teammate character becomes 0, or even if the HP of the teammate character becomes 0, the number of sets in the ART gaming state remains. If you continue. The manner in which the ART gaming state continues when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined is arbitrary. For example, when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters, the HP of the enemy character is always set to 0 before the teammate character. In addition, when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters, the set number of ART gaming states is always 1 or more (for example, the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters). In this case, the ART game state set number may be incremented by 1 or even if the teammate character's HP becomes 0, the ART game state set number may not be subtracted). In this regard, in the present embodiment, when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters, the ART gaming state can be obtained even if the HP of the teammate character becomes 0 by adding 1 to the number of sets of the ART gaming state. By making sure that the number of sets remains, the ART gaming state is continued when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined. In addition, although detailed description is abbreviate | omitted, when HP of the boss | hubs 7 and 8 can be set to 0 in this embodiment, it is good also as shifting to what is called an addition specialization zone. The type of the specialization zone for addition is arbitrary, but in the case of the present embodiment, as the specialization zone for addition, it is conceivable to add the number of sets of the ART gaming state or to add the HP of the teammate character.

<Battle MAP lottery table>
113 to 115 are battle MAP lottery tables for lottering a battle MAP for determining a performance ball to be set in the apocalypse in the battle ART. The battle MAP lottery table is provided for each type of enemy character to be an opponent, and defines lottery value information for the transfer destination battle MAP for each transfer source battle MAP. 113 is a battle MAP lottery table corresponding to the boss 1, FIG. 114 is a battle MAP lottery table corresponding to the boss 2, and FIG. 115 is a battle MAP lottery table corresponding to the boss 5. As will be described later, the lottery value information defined in the battle MAP lottery table depends on the speed set for the enemy character.

<Battle MAP data correspondence table>
In the battle MAP, battle MAP data for determining an effect ball to be set in the apocalypse is defined. FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating a correspondence table of battle MAP data defined for each battle MAP.

<Director ball lottery table during battle ART>
FIG. 117 is an effect ball lottery table during battle ART for determining the effect balls to be set in the apocalypse in the battle ART. The effect ball lottery table during battle defines lottery value information for the effect ball set for each battle MAP data. In FIG. 117 (A), the lottery value information for the effect ball is also defined for the battle MAP data “0”, but the boss newer than the effect ball lottery based on the MAP data “0”. When priority is given to lottery of MAP, it is not used.

  Referring to FIG. 117, in the battle MAP data “1”, an enemy ball is likely to be lottered, while in the battle MAP data “2” and “3”, a friendly ball or awakening ball is necessarily lottery. Also, referring to the battle MAP data comparison table shown in FIG. 116, it can be seen that seven battle MAPs are in one set. Specifically, referring to the battle MAP “1” to “7”, the battle MAP data continues with “2” and “3” after five “1”, and the battle MAP “8” to “14”. It turns out that battle MAP "15"-"21" and battle MAP "22"-"28" are the same.

  The battle MAPs “4”, “11”, “18”, and “25” are battle MAPs that are not actually lottery (the lottery value is 0 as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115). Therefore, in the pachislot 1, four battle MAP data (one is not randomized) in which the battle MAP data “1” in which an enemy ball is likely to be randomized are specified, and the battle MAP data “2” in which a friendly ball or awakening ball is always randomized. Six sets of two battle MAPs for which “3” is defined are included in one set.

  Here, it returns to the battle MAP lottery table of FIGS. 113-115. In the battle MAP lottery table, battle MAP data “2”, “3” in which the teammate ball or the awakening ball is always lottered is defined. The battle MAPs “6” “7” “13” “14” “20” “21” “ 27 ”and“ 28 ”are highlighted. Referring to the battle MAP lottery table, the battle MAP basically shifts to a battle MAP having a large numerical value one by one in one set, or a teammate ball or awakening ball in one set is always lottery. It turns out that it transfers to battle MAP. Specifically, from the battle MAP “1”, the battle MAP “2” having a larger numerical value, or the battle MAP “6” in which the friendly ball or the awakening ball in the same set is always lottered is likely to be lottery. I understand.

  By configuring the battle MAP and the battle MAP data in this manner, in the pachislot 1, the number of times the enemy character attacks continuously is limited to a predetermined number (four in the present embodiment). In other words, when the battle MAP is transferred more than a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 5 times), the MAP or the awakening ball is always transferred to the battle MAP in which the ball is always lottered. The battle MAP “1” is shifted to the battle MAP “9” and the like, but the battle MAP “9” is the second numerical battle MAP in the same set. When the predetermined number of times is exceeded, at least one time is transferred to the battle MAP in which the teammates are always drawn.

  Further, when comparing the battle MAP lottery tables of FIGS. 113 to 115, it can be seen that the probability that the teammate ball or the awakening ball will be transferred to the battle MAP in which the teammate ball is always lottered differs depending on the type of enemy character of the opponent. For example, when the attack type and slow boss 1 (see FIG. 112) is an enemy character, referring to the battle MAP lottery table in FIG. It can be seen that the transition is relatively easy. In addition, when the defensive and normal boss 2 (see FIG. 112) is an enemy character, referring to the battle MAP lottery table in FIG. Similarly, when the speed-type boss 5 (see FIG. 112) is an enemy character, referring to the battle MAP lottery table in FIG. It is difficult to shift to the battle MAP “6” or “7” to be performed, and basically, the battle MAP “1” is shifted to the battle MAP having a larger numerical value in order.

  Thus, the battle MAP lottery table defines lottery value information based on the speed set for the enemy character. As a result, during the battle ART, the production balls are set based on the speed set for the enemy character, the enemy with faster speed sets more enemy balls, and the enemy with slower speed sets more friendly balls. Become.

<Damage table during battle ART>
118 and 119 are battle ART-based damage lottery tables used when the HPs of enemy characters and teammate characters are reduced in battle ART. During the battle ART damage lottery table, the enemy character type to be the opponent, the type of production ball set in the apocalypse in this game, and the HP of the enemy character and teammate character for each internal winning combination are reduced. Specify lottery value information.

  FIG. 118 is a battle ART lottery table used when the performance ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball. 118 shows a battle lottery table during battle ART used when the boss 1 (see FIG. 112) having a high attack power is an enemy character in order to make it possible to compare the difference depending on the status (attack power) of the enemy character. FIG. 118 (B) shows a battle lottery table during battle ART used when the boss 5 (see FIG. 112) having a low attack power is an enemy character. When comparing the battle lottery table during battle ART of FIG. 118, when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, when the opponent is the boss 1, “15” is easily determined as the HP reduction amount of the teammate character. On the other hand, when the opponent is the boss 5, it can be seen that “5” is easily determined as the HP reduction amount of the teammate character.

  In addition, referring to FIG. 118, even if the performance ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball, if it is winning a rare role other than a pure ball, it is not an ally character but an enemy character. HP will decrease. By configuring the battle ART damage lottery table in this way, the player expects that a rare role will be determined as an internal winning role during the battle ART, and can increase the interest during the ART. .

  FIG. 119 is a battle ART lottery table used when the performance balls set in the apocalypse in this game are ally balls or awakening balls. In FIG. 119, a battle lottery table during battle ART used when the boss 1 (see FIG. 112) with high defense power is an enemy character in order to enable comparison of the difference depending on the status (defense power) of the enemy character is shown in FIG. 119 (B) of FIG. 119 shows a battle lottery table during battle ART used when the boss 5 (see FIG. 112) having a low defense power is an enemy character. When comparing the battle lottery table during battle ART in FIG. 119, when the opponent is the boss 1, it is easy to determine “5” or the like as the amount of decrease in the enemy character's HP, while when the opponent is the boss 5, the enemy character It can be seen that “10” or the like is easily determined as the amount of decrease in HP.

  By providing a battle lottery table during battle ART according to the type of enemy character that is the opponent in this way, the status (attack power and defense power) of the enemy character can be reflected, and the games during battle ART are diverse. Can be

<ART status lottery table>
120 and 121 are ART state lottery tables for lottering a new ART state when it is determined to continue to ART in the battle ART. The ART state lottery table defines lottery value information for the transfer destination ART state for each type of enemy character of the opponent, the number of ART continuations, and the transfer source ART state. 120 and 121 show an ART state lottery table which is referred to when the opponent enemy character is any one of the bosses 1 to 6. When the opponent enemy character is any one of bosses 1 to 6, the same ART state is determined as the transfer destination ART state when the source ART state is "31" to "33". On the other hand, when the opponent's enemy character is one of the bosses 7 and 8, and the transition source ART state is “31” to “33”, a different ART state (for example, the ART state “3” is not shown). ”) Is determined as the ART state of the migration destination.

  Also, referring to FIGS. 120 and 121, it can be seen that when the number of ART continuations exceeds 5, it is easy to shift to an ART state with a large numerical value.

<Description of main control circuit operation>
Next, contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 127.

[Main operation processing of pachislot by control of main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachislot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 122 (hereinafter referred to as main flow).

  First, when power is turned on to the pachislot machine 1, the main CPU 93 performs a power-on process (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been normally performed or the setting has been appropriately changed, and initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area that needs to be erased for each unit game (game), such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this processing, a medal sensor (not shown), input of the start switch 64, and the like are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a random value acquisition process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 93 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) for internal winning combination lottery and stores the extracted random value in a random value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random number value for internal winning combination lottery extracted in S4. Details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S6). In this process, reel stop control information used for stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current gaming state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 95 and used in the reel stop control process of S11.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a start command generation storage process (S7). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates start command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by command data transmission processing in an interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG. The start command data includes various kinds of information necessary for effects such as an internal winning combination.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a wait process (S8). In this process, the main CPU 93 waits until the wait time elapses when the elapsed time from the start of the previous game has not passed a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start process (S9). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. When the start of rotation of all reels is requested, the driving of the three stepping motors is controlled by an interrupt process (see FIG. 127, which will be described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). The rotation of the reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is subjected to acceleration control until the rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then controlled so as to maintain the constant speed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start command generation / storage process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates reel rotation start command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. By this processing, the sub control circuit 101 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing for executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop control process (S11). In this process, using the reel stop control information determined in S6, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing when the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are pressed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning search process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 93 collates the symbol combination displayed on the winning line after the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C and right reel 3R are all stopped with the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 20 to 32). . Then, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a combination (combination) of symbols defined by the symbol combination table is displayed on the winning line, and stores the determination result in the display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal payout processing (S13). In this process, the hopper 33 is driven and the number of credits is updated based on the number of symbols to be paid out determined in S12, and medals are paid out. In this process, when the BB gaming state flag in the gaming state flag storage area is on, the payout number is subtracted from the bonus end number counter. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes counting means and updates (subtracts) the bonus end number counter based on the number of payouts determined according to the combination of symbols displayed during the bonus state. .

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning action command generation and storage process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a winning operation command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101, and is provided in the main RAM 95 together with additional data (displayed symbol combinations, payout number, bonus end number counter value, etc.). In the specified communication data storage area. Also, the winning action command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by command data transmission processing in the interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG. By this processing, the sub control circuit 101 can recognize the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line, and can determine the timing for executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end check process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to various counters (not shown) for managing the end timing of the bonus game provided in the main RAM 95 and checks whether or not the operation of the bonus game is to be ended. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 124 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus operation check process (S16). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to replay. Details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs RT check processing (S17). In this process, the main CPU 93 updates the RT gaming state based on the displayed symbol combination. The RT check process is a process for updating the RT gaming state in the bonus inactive state, and is omitted in the bonus state or the inter-flag state. Details of the RT check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126 described later.

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the internal lottery process performed in S5 in the main flow (see FIG. 122) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table corresponding to the gaming state (S31). That is, the main CPU 93 grasps the current gaming state with reference to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62), and sets an internal lottery table (see FIGS. 33 to 37) corresponding to the grasped gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the random number value stored in the random value storage area (S32). Then, the main CPU 93 sets “1” as the initial value of the winning number.

  Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table, acquires a lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value (S33). The winning number is information assigned to each winning combination that may be drawn in the internal lottery table. For example, when the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, the winning number “1” is assigned to “out” and the winning number “2” is assigned to “F_black black black”. (See FIG. 33). In addition, when the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, the winning number “1” is assigned to “F_Maintenance Lip”, and the winning number “2” is assigned to “F_123 Lip”. (See FIG. 35).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the calculation result in S33 is less than 0 (negative value) (S34).

  When the main CPU 93 determines that the calculation result is not less than 0 in S34 (NO), the main CPU 93 updates the random number value and the winning number (S35). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is set to a random value, and the winning number is incremented by one.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all winning numbers have been checked (S36). When it is determined in S36 that the main CPU 93 has not checked all the winning numbers (NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S33 and repeats the processes after S33.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S36 that the main CPU 93 has checked all winning numbers (YES), the main CPU 93 sets “0” as the data pointer (S37). That is, the main CPU 93 sets “0” as the small role / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer.

  Here, returning to the description of the processing in S34 again, in S34, when the main CPU 93 determines that the calculation result is less than 0 (negative value) (YES), the main CPU 93 responds to the current winning number. Then, a small role / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are acquired (S38).

  After the process of S37 or S38, the main CPU 93 acquires an internal winning combination based on the small combination / replay data pointer (S39).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storing area (S40).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (S41). In S41, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is not “00000000” (NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S48 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” in S41 (YES), the main CPU 93 acquires the internal winning combination based on the bonus data pointer. (S42).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carryover combination storing area (S43).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a hand relating to BB is being carried over (S44). Referring to FIG. 60, a combination related to BB is stored in either bit 2 to bit 7 of the carryover combination storage area 1 or bit 2 of the carryover combination storage area 2. Therefore, in this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether “1” is stored in any of bits 2 to 7 of the carryover combination storage area 1 or bit 2 of the carryover combination storage area 2. When the main CPU 93 determines in S44 that the role relating to BB is not being carried over (NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S46.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S44 that the hand relating to BB is being carried over (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT5 gaming state flag to on (S45), and then proceeds to the processing of S46. Specifically, “1” is set in bit 4 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62). By this process, when the winning combination related to BB is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus non-winning state, the gaming state can be shifted to the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state.

  Next, in the process of S46, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the role relating to JACIN is being carried over. Referring to FIG. 60, a combination related to JACIN is stored in any one of bits 1 to 3 of the carryover combination storage area 2. Therefore, in this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “1” is stored in any of bits 1 to 3 of the carryover combination storage area 2. When the main CPU 93 determines in S46 that the role relating to JACIN is not being carried over (NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S48.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S46 that the hand relating to JACIN is being carried over (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT4 gaming state flag to on (S47), and then proceeds to the processing of S48. Specifically, “1” is set in bit 3 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62). In addition, since the role related to JACIN may be determined as an internal winning combination only during the bonus state, this process allows the game when the combination related to JACIN is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus state. The state can be shifted to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state.

  Next, in the processing of S48, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process, and moves the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the bonus end check process performed in S15 in the main flow (see FIG. 122) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to determine whether “BB” is in operation (S51). In S51, when the main CPU 93 determines that “BB” is not in operation (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process and moves the process to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that “BB” is in operation in S51 (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (S52). ). When the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”, it means that the number of medals paid out exceeds 59 during the bonus state.

  When the main CPU 93 determines in S52 that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62), and “RB”. It is determined whether or not is operating (S53). When the main CPU 93 determines that “RB” is not operating in S53 (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S56.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that “RB” is in operation in S53 (YES), the main CPU 93 performs RB end processing (S54). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the winning possible number counter and the possible gaming number counter, and turns off the gaming state flag (RB gaming state flag) corresponding to “RB” in operation. Next, the main CPU 93 turns on the RT2 gaming state flag (S55).

  Next, in S56, the main CPU 93 performs bonus end processing. In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the bonus end number counter and turns off the gaming state flag (BB gaming state flag) corresponding to “BB” in operation. As shown in S53 to S56, when the operation of the BB (bonus state) is ended during the RB gaming state, the state shifts to the RT2 gaming state of the bonus non-winning state after the end of the BB. On the other hand, when the operation of BB ends in a state other than the RB gaming state, the bonus non-winning state is entered while the RT gaming state in the bonus state is maintained.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end command generation / storage process (S57). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the bonus end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. By this processing, the sub control circuit 101 can recognize that the bonus state has ended, and can perform a predetermined effect at the end of the bonus. After the process of S57, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process and moves the process to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S52 that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” (NO), the main CPU 93 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62), “RB” Is determined to be in operation (S58). In S58, when the main CPU 93 determines that “RB” is not in operation (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process and moves the process to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that “RB” is in operation in S58 (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning possible number counter or the possible gaming number counter is “0”. (S59). If the winning count counter is “0”, it means that a combination of symbols other than “out” is displayed 8 times during the bonus RB gaming state, and the gaming count counter is “0”. If it is, it means that 12 games have been played in the RB gaming state in the bonus state.

  In S59, when the main CPU 93 determines that neither the winning possible number counter or the possible gaming number counter is “0” (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S59 that either the winning possible number counter or the possible gaming number counter is “0” (YES), the main CPU 93 performs an RB end process (S60). Next, the main CPU 93 turns on the RT2 gaming state flag (S61), ends the bonus end check process, and moves the process to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 122). That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes profit state ending means, and the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” when the BB gaming state flag in the gaming state flag storage area is on. As a result, the bonus end number counter is cleared by executing the bonus end time process, and the BB gaming state flag in the gaming state flag storage area corresponding to the active “BB” is turned off.

[Bonus activation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the bonus end check process performed in S16 in the main flow (see FIG. 122) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a symbol combination (see FIG. 38) related to “BB” is displayed (S71). When the main CPU 93 determines in S71 that the symbol combination related to “BB” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 performs a bonus operation process (S72). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets the BB gaming state flag in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to ON and sets “59” to the bonus end number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the RT5 gaming state flag in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to OFF (S73). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus start command generation / storage process (S74). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates bonus start command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101, and main data along with additional data (RT gaming state flag, number of winnings, number of games allowed, bonus end number counter value, etc.). The data is stored in a communication data storage area provided in the RAM 95. The bonus start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. By this processing, the sub control circuit 101 can recognize that the bonus state has started, and can perform a predetermined effect at the start of the bonus.

  When the process of S74 is completed, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and moves the process to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S71 that the symbol combination related to “BB” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 displays the symbol combination related to “JACIN” (see FIG. 38). It is determined whether or not (S75). When the main CPU 93 determines in S75 that the symbol combination related to “JACIN” has been displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 performs RB operation processing (S76). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets the RB gaming status flag in the gaming status flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to ON, and sets “8” to the winning count counter and “12” to the gaming count counter. .

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the RT4 gaming state flag in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to OFF (S77). When the process of S77 is completed, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and moves the process to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S75 that the symbol combination related to “JACIN” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the symbol combination related to “Replay” is displayed. (S78). In S78, when the main CPU 93 determines that the symbol combination related to “Replay” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and the process of the main flow (see FIG. 122). Move to S17.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S78 that the symbol combination related to “Replay” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 requests automatic insertion of medals (S79). That is, the main CPU 93 copies the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter. After the process of S79, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process, and moves the process to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 122). That is, in this embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes profit state starting means, and when the symbol combination related to “BB” is displayed, the BB gaming state flag in the gaming state flag storage area is set to ON. Then, “59” is set in the bonus end number counter. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes profit control means for executing bonus end check processing and bonus operation check processing.

[RT check processing]
Next, the RT check process performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 122) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether the gaming state is one of the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, or the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (S81). . When the main CPU 93 determines in S81 that the game state is neither the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, or the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (NO), The CPU 93 moves to the process of S85 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S81 that the gaming state is one of the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, or the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (YES) Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “Bell spilling eyes” or “RT1 transition lip” is displayed (S82). When the main CPU 93 determines in S82 that neither “bell spilling eyes” nor “RT1 transition lip” is displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S85 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S82 that either “bell spilling eyes” or “RT1 transition lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 turns off the RT gaming state flag that is currently on, and RT1. Turn on the gaming state. That is, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, or the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when “Bell spilling eyes” or “RT1 transition lip” is displayed, the main CPU 93 Shifts the gaming state to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state. Next, the main CPU 93 sets 5 to the RT game number counter (S84). That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes RT termination means, and when the gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (high RT state), the “bell spill” or “RT1” When “Transition Lip” is displayed, the RT4 gaming state is terminated and the RT1 gaming state (low RT state) is transitioned to.

  When NO in S81, S82, or following S84, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state in which the bonus is not won (S85). When the main CPU 93 determines in S85 that the bonus non-winning RT0 gaming state is not set (NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the processing of S91 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S85 that the main CPU 93 is in the bonus non-winning RT0 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “RT4 transition lip” is displayed (S86). In S86, when the main CPU 93 determines that “RT4 transition lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 turns on the RT4 gaming state flag. That is, when “RT4 transition lip” is displayed in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 93 shifts the gaming state to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state. As described above, in this embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes the RT starting means, and when “RT4 transition lip” is displayed in the RT0 gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the RT4 gaming state (high RT state). .

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S88 that “RT4 transition lip” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “RT3 transition lip” is displayed (S88). In S88, when the main CPU 93 determines that “RT3 transition lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 turns on the RT3 gaming state flag. That is, when “RT3 transition lip” is displayed in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 93 shifts the gaming state to the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state. Next, the main CPU 93 sets 5 to the RT game number counter (S90).

  When NO in S85, S88, or following S87, S90, the main CPU 93 determines whether the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state or the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (S91). ). In S91, when the main CPU 93 determines that neither the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state or the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT checking process and performs the main processing. The process proceeds to S2 of the flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S91 that either the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state or the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (YES), the main CPU 93 updates the RT game number counter ( 1 subtraction) (S92). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT game number counter is 0 (S93). In S93, if the main CPU 93 determines that the RT game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT game number counter is 0 in S93 (YES), the main CPU 93 turns off the currently-on RT gaming state flag (S94). By turning off the currently-on RT gaming state flag by this processing, the gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

<Interrupt processing under main CPU control>
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 93. This process is executed every 1.1172 milliseconds.

  First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S101). Next, the main CPU 93 performs an input port check process (S102). In this process, signals input from various switches such as a stop switch are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs timer update processing (S103). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a process of subtracting a predetermined timer value for each interrupt process, for example. Next, the main CPU 93 performs communication data transmission processing (S104). In this processing, various commands stored in the communication data storage area are mainly transmitted to the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101 as appropriate. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes a command transmission unit, and transmits various commands stored in the communication data storage area to each sub-control circuit 101 within each process.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel control process (S105). In this process, the main CPU 93 starts the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, and thereafter, each reel rotates at a constant speed. Three stepping motors are driven and controlled. When the number of sliding symbols is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding symbols. Then, the main CPU 93 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the planned stop position (the symbol at the planned stop position reaches the area on the winning line of the display window), and The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation is decelerated and stopped.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lamp and 7-segment driving process (S106). In this process, the main CPU 93 drives and controls the 7-segment display 28 to display the number of payouts and the number of credits. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a register restoration process (S107). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt process.

[Sub-control processing]
The sub control circuit 101 executes various processes according to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 128 to 154.

<Power-on processing>
FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing power-on processing of the sub CPU 102 at power-on.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process (S310). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs error check of the sub RAM 103 and the like, and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task, a sound control task, which are timer interrupt synchronization task groups, and a mother task, which is a VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization) interrupt synchronization task group. In this initialization process, the effect balls are initialized or backed up according to the normal game state and the high probability game state stored in the sub-RAM 103, which will be described in detail later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the lamp control task shown in FIG. 129 (S311). The lamp control task waits for the sub CPU 102 to receive a timer interrupt event message transmitted to the sub CPU 102 every 2 milliseconds, and in response to receiving the timer interrupt event message, It is a process which performs the process which controls a lighting state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the sound control task shown in FIG. 131 (S312). In the sound control task, the sub CPU 102 controls the sound output state from the speakers 23L and 23R.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the accessory control task shown in FIG. 132 (S313). In the accessory control task, the driving state of the rotating accessory 200 is controlled by the sub CPU 102.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the mother task shown in FIG. 133 (S313), and aborts the power-on process. The mother task is a task group for VSYNC (vertical synchronization signal) interrupt synchronization, and a vertical synchronization signal (VSYNC interrupt signal) sent from the liquid crystal display device 11 when an image of one frame is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Is used.

<Initialization or backup processing of performance balls in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state>
Here, the initialization or backup process of the effect ball in the normal game state and the high probability game state, which is performed in the initialization process of S310, will be described.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the sub RAM 103 is composed of a DRAM as a work area and a backup SRAM. The effect balls are basically stored in the DRAM, but are also stored in the SRAM for backup.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the pachislot 1, the power supply may be temporarily cut off during the operation of the game shop, or the power supply may be cut off when the game shop is closed. In the pachi-slot 1, in the power-on process that is performed when the power that is temporarily cut off is turned on, the effect ball stored in the SRAM is copied to the DRAM in the initialization process of S310, so that the effect ball is backed up. And control so that the game situation does not change before and after the power is turned off. On the other hand, in the power-on process that is performed when the power is turned on across business days, a newly lottered effect ball is stored in the DRAM without restoring the backup data in the initialization process of S310.

  Specifically, the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot 1 detects that power is supplied to the power supply device 44 by a power-on detection circuit (not shown) arranged on the sub-control board 42 and turns on the power. The date and time (year / month / day / hour / minute / second) at which the error is detected is acquired from an RTC (real-time clock: not shown) disposed in the sub-control circuit 101. Then, the sub-control circuit 101 restores or initializes the backup data of the production ball based on the date and time when the power-on is detected. That is, in this embodiment, the power-on detection circuit arranged on the sub control board 42 constitutes a power-on detection unit.

  Further, the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot 1 detects that the power supply device 44 has been turned off by a power-off detection circuit (not shown) disposed on the sub-control board 42, so that the sub-control circuit 101. The date and time is acquired from the RTC arranged in the sub-RAM 103 and stored in the sub-RAM 103 (SRAM) (power cut-off process). Then, the sub control circuit 101 acquires the date and time from the RTC when detecting power-on, and compares the acquired date and time with the date and time when it is detected that the power stored in the sub RAM 103 (SRAM) is cut off. To obtain the power interruption period indicating the time during which the power was cut off. That is, in the present embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit arranged on the sub control board 42 constitutes a power cut detection means, and the sub control circuit 101 constitutes an acquisition means for acquiring the power interruption period. As described above, in a game in which a production ball is set in the apocalypse, if a predetermined symbol combination (for example, “Bell Prize” or higher) is displayed, the probability according to the type of the production ball set. In this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a privilege granting means for performing CZ and ART transfer lottery and various extra lotteries (see FIG. 102 described above) during ART.

  Here, when the power is turned off at the end of business and the power is turned on at the start of business, this power-off period is several hours or more. On the other hand, when the power supply is temporarily cut off, the power interruption period is long and only a few minutes. Therefore, if the power interruption period is a predetermined time (for example, 4 hours) or longer, the sub control circuit 101 discards the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 (SRAM) for backup and newly adds 6 Re-draw lottery balls (production ball lottery during apocalypse operation, production ball lottery during CZ, production ball lottery during enemy determination ART, production ball lottery during battle ART) in sub-RAM 103 (DRAM) Remember. On the contrary, if the power interruption period is less than the predetermined time, the sub-control circuit 101 copies (restores the backup data) the six performance balls stored in the SRAM for backup. Thus, the effect balls stored in the sub-RAM 103 before the power is turned off are maintained after the power is turned on.

  Further, in the pachi-slot 1, it is possible to restore or initialize the backup data of the production ball only from the time when the power-on is detected instead of the power interruption period. Since the business hours of amusement stores are often determined in advance, the time at which a gaming machine such as the pachislot machine 1 is turned on is generally determined at the amusement store. Therefore, the sub-control circuit 101, when the time when the power-on is detected is a predetermined time (for example, the time between 7:00 am and 9:00 am) It is determined that the production ball is initialized. On the other hand, if the time at which the power-on is detected is other than the predetermined time, the sub-control circuit 101 determines that the power has been temporarily cut off and restores the backup data of the effect ball.

  Further, in recent gaming machines such as the pachislot 1, a gaming machine having an RTC function for performing a predetermined operation in accordance with time is also known. In the case of such a gaming machine, it is possible to restore or initialize the backup data of the production ball based on the current time, not limited to the timing when the power is turned on. Specifically, when the current time is the time immediately before the start of business at the amusement store (for example, 9:50 am), the effect ball is initialized. On the other hand, if the current time is other than the time immediately before the start of business at the amusement store, the backup data of the production ball is restored when power-on is detected.

<Ramp control task>
FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the lamp control task activated in S311 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes a timer interrupt initialization process (S320). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a lamp related data initialization process (S321).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 waits for a timer interrupt (S322). In this process, until the sub CPU 102 receives a timer interrupt event message every 2 milliseconds, the sub CPU 102 executes a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization.

  As a task group different from timer interrupt synchronization, for example, a main board communication task which is a task group for command reception interrupt synchronization can be cited. Moreover, a task group (not shown) for power supply interrupt synchronization, a task group (not shown) for door monitoring unit communication synchronization, and the like can be given.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes lamp data analysis processing (S323), and performs lamp execution processing (S324). For example, the sub CPU 102 displays an image corresponding to the latent image 402 on the display device 10 by controlling the light emission of the LED 403 of the panel device 400 according to the registered effect data. Further, for example, the sub CPU 102 notifies the result of the promotion lottery of the non-displayed effect ball by controlling the LED provided in the rotating combination 200 according to the registered effect data.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a call of a non-effect image that is not related to the effect such as a menu screen or an error screen (S325). If it is determined that no non-effect image is called (NO), the process proceeds to S322. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a call of a non-effect image (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the panel is being displayed (S326). “Panel display” means that the panel device 400 emits the LED 403 and displays an image corresponding to the latent image 402. If it is determined that the panel is not being displayed (NO), the process proceeds to S322.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the panel is being displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently turns off the panel display LED, that is, the LED 403 of the panel device 400, interrupts the panel display (S327), The process proceeds to S322. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 controls the light emission of the LEDs provided in the LED 403, the LED group 25, and the rotating accessory 200 of the panel device 400 according to the registered effect data. Configure.

  Here, since the non-effect image such as the menu screen or the error screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 provided behind the panel device 400, if the non-effect image is displayed during the panel display, Visibility is reduced. In this regard, the pachi-slot 1 prevents the visibility of the non-effect image from being deteriorated by turning off the LED 403 of the panel device 400 when there is a non-effect image calling request during panel display. Hereinafter, specific control when a non-effect image is called during panel display will be described.

<Display method of non-effect image during panel display>
FIG. 130 is a diagram showing an outline of a method for displaying a non-effect image during panel display.

  In FIG. 130, time t1 is the timing at which effect data for panel display is read. At this timing, the sub CPU 102 makes an output request for causing the panel control board 79 to emit light based on the effect data. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 130A and 130B, the LED 403 is lit from time t1.

  Time t2 is the timing at which a non-effect image call request is detected. The detection of the non-effect image call request can be performed by an arbitrary method. For example, an error screen calling request indicating that the front door 2b is opened can be detected by receiving a signal for displaying an error from the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74. The menu screen call request is made by monitoring the operation status of various operation buttons (such as the selection button 18 and the determination button 19) provided on the pedestal unit 12, and performing a predetermined operation (menu activation). It can be detected by detecting.

  When the non-effect image calling request is detected at time t2, the sub CPU 102 executes the effect data for displaying the non-effect image and outputs an output request for displaying the non-effect image on the liquid crystal relay board 77. Do. The liquid crystal relay substrate 77 displays a non-effect image on the liquid crystal display device 11 in response to this output request. On the other hand, when detecting the non-effect image call request, panel control board 79 prioritizes the non-effect image call request received from time t1 and turns off LED 403. At this time, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the sub CPU 102 continues to execute the effect data for panel display. That is, in the pachi-slot 1, the light emission animation of the LED 403 continues internally, but the light emission of the LED 403 is stopped by suppressing the output port.

  Thus, as shown at time t2 in FIG. 130 (b), a non-effect image such as a menu screen is displayed on the display device 10. At this time, since the LED 403 is turned off, the display by the panel device 400 is not covered with the non-effect image, and the visibility of the non-effect image is not impaired.

  Time t3 is the timing at which the end request for the non-effect image is detected. The detection of the non-effect image end request can be performed by an arbitrary method. For example, an error screen end request indicating that the front door 2b is opened can be detected by receiving a signal indicating that the door has been closed from the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74. The menu screen termination request is made by monitoring the operational status of various operation buttons (such as the selection button 18 and the determination button 19) provided on the pedestal unit 12, and performing a predetermined operation (menu termination). It can be detected by detecting.

  When the end request for the non-effect image is detected at time t3, the sub CPU 102 ends the execution of the effect data for non-effect image display. Thereby, the non-effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 disappears. On the other hand, the panel control board 79 that has stopped emitting light from the LED 403 from time t2 resumes emitting light from the LED 403 in response to the output request from the LED 403 received from time t1. As a result, as shown at time t <b> 3 in FIG. 130B, an image corresponding to the panel device 400 is displayed on the display device 10.

  Time t4 is the timing when execution of the effect for panel display ends. At this timing, the sub CPU 102 ends the execution of the panel display effect data and ends the output request for causing the LED 403 to emit light to the panel control board 79. As a result, as shown in FIG. 130A, the LED 403 is turned off, and as shown at time t4 in FIG. 130B, the display of the image corresponding to the panel device 400 in the display device 10 is ended. .

  Thus, in the pachi-slot 1, when the non-effect image is called during the panel display effect, the final output of the LED 403 is suppressed, thereby preventing the non-effect image from being covered with the panel display effect. Since only the final output of the LED 403 is suppressed and processing such as error processing is not added to the execution processing itself of the effect data, the pachislot 1 can simplify the process when calling the non-effect image, Can be reduced.

  The condition for restarting the lighting of the LED 403 after the LED 403 is turned off in response to the detection of the non-effect image calling request is arbitrary. That is, in the above description, the lighting of the LED 403 is resumed on the condition that a non-effect image end request is detected. For example, a timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the non-effect image call request was detected. Then, the lighting of the LED 403 may be resumed. Thereby, the effect by the panel apparatus 400 can be restarted promptly.

  Further, when a non-effect image call request is detected, all of the LEDs 403 may be turned off, or only a part of the LEDs 403 may be turned off. Since the non-effect image such as the menu screen is displayed at a predetermined position on the liquid crystal display device 11, the visibility of the non-effect image is displayed even if the display for the panel effect is performed at a position not overlapping with the non-effect image. Will not be damaged. As described above, the LED 403 is an LED array in which a large number of LEDs are provided in a line, and therefore, by controlling the LEDs that are turned on / off according to the position where the non-effect image is displayed, the non-effect image is avoided. Display for panel production can be performed. For example, when the non-effect image is displayed in a region on the substantially central rectangle of the liquid crystal display device 11, the non-effect image is displayed by turning off the LEDs at both ends while turning off the LED at the center of the LED array. It is possible to avoid the display for the panel effect.

  Therefore, when there is a request for calling a non-effect image, the sub CPU 102 specifies an area in which the LED 403 is turned off according to the type of the non-effect image for which the call request is made. The panel control board 79 prioritizes the non-effect image call request over the LED 403 output request based on the panel display effect data for the area specified by the sub CPU 102, and turns off the LED 403. For the area, the LED 403 may be output in response to an output request from the LED 403 based on the panel display effect data.

  Thereby, the non-effect image can be displayed while the panel display effect by the panel device 400 is continued. In this case, it is preferable that the panel display effect can be continued in a wider area by specifying the area where the LED 403 is turned off according to the type of the non-effect image.

<Sound control task>
FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the sound control task activated in S312 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process of sound related data related to the sound output state from the speakers 23L and 23R (S330). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes sound data analysis processing (S331), performs sound effect execution processing (S332), and executes processing of S331. In the sound production execution process of S332, various sounds corresponding to the game are output. An example is shown below.

<Sound production execution process when ART continues>
Since the pachislot 1 controls the continuation of the ART based on the winning / losing during the battle ART, it is basically not known whether the ART will continue until the battle ART is over (until the winning / losing is decided). However, if there are multiple sets of ART (see Fig. 71, etc.), ART will continue even if it is defeated by battle ART, and bosses 7 and 8 are determined as battle ART opponents. In addition, since the ART continues, the continuation of the ART may be determined before the battle ART ends.

  In the pachi-slot 1, when the continuation of the ART is confirmed, a predetermined sound effect execution process is performed, so that the player may be informed in advance that the currently executed ART is continued. Specifically, the pachislot 1 is output as a sound during ART, a first sound that is continuously output during ART, a second sound that is continuously output during ART, and an instantaneous output during ART. And a third sound. The first sound is a dedicated song in ART that is output regardless of whether or not ART continues, and the second sound is another dedicated song in ART that is output only when ART continues, The third sound is a sound effect (siren) that is output only when ART continues.

  As a method of notifying the player that the ART will continue through the sound production execution process, for example, changing the song in the ART from the first sound to the second sound in the middle of the ART, or from the start of the ART Various aspects such as making a song in ART a second sound and outputting a third sound at the start or in the middle of ART are conceivable. In this case, if the first sound is changed to the second sound, the player may not be able to grasp the change of the music depending on the connection of the music, and the second sound is output from the start of the ART. Thus, an unfamiliar player may not be able to grasp whether the song is output when the ART is continuously confirmed.

  Therefore, in the pachislot 1, a sound effect such as the third sound is output before the second sound is output, so that the player can easily recognize that the ART continues.

<Property control task>
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the accessory control task activated in S313 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process of the accessory-related data related to the driving state of the rotating accessory 200 (S340). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an accessory data analysis process (S341), performs an accessory effect execution process (S342), and executes the process of S341. In addition, in the combination effect production execution process of S342, the rotating combination 200 is driven in various modes according to the game. An example is shown below.

<Control of bonuses during promotion lottery>
As described above, in the pachi-slot 1, when performing the promotion lottery of the non-displayed effect ball, the cover member 198 of the rotating accessory 200 is opened, and the eyeball main body 203 is made visible to the player. Specifically, when winning a lottery using the accessory movable lottery table shown in FIG. 85, the sub CPU 102 sets the accessory data for opening the cover member 198. When the sub CPU 102 controls the rotating combination 200 based on the combination data, the main body 203 can be visually recognized by the player when performing the promotion lottery.

<Control of articles during ART>
In the pachislot 1, during the ART, the rotating combination 200 is driven in various modes, and the rotating combination 200 is used to express that the current gaming state is a special gaming state. For example, the cover member 198 of the rotating combination 200 is opened and closed, and the rotating combination 200 is driven so that the centerpiece blinks, or the cover of the rotating combination 200 is interlocked with the start operation of the start lever 16. The member 198 is half open, and the eyeball member 205 is exposed only half, or the eyeball member 205 is moved to the left and right while the cover member 198 is opened, so that the eyeball accessory looks around. The rotary member 200 is driven. As described above, in the pachislot machine 1, the movable part of the rotating accessory 200 moves to a predetermined position during the ART, and the game during the ART is excited by performing a specific effect.

  Here, depending on the player, the game may be interrupted in order to temporarily remove the seat during ART or to operate a mobile terminal or the like (smartphone or mobile phone) after operating the start lever 16. Even in such a situation where there is no player or a situation where the game is interrupted even if there is a player, the rotary accessory 200 is continuously driven and the cover member 198 is kept in a semi-open state. In this case, the motor 214 (see FIG. 7) for driving the rotating member 200 and the motor (not shown) for opening and closing the cover member 198 are consumed, leading to failure. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player leaves the table or interrupts the game during the ART, the driving of the motor related to the rotating accessory 200 is stopped, and the predetermined position (for example, the cover member 198 is By returning the movable part of the rotating combination 200 to the initial position (for example, a position where the cover member 198 covers the eyeball member 205 (so-called closed state)), the rotating combination 200 is rotated. The consumption of the motor 200 is reduced. When the cover member 198 is in a half-open state, a motor (not shown) for opening and closing the cover member 198 needs to continue to excite the motor in order to keep the cover member 198 in a half-open state. The motor (not shown) is consumed.

  In addition, although the method of detecting the player's leaving or the interruption of the game is arbitrary, in the pachislot 1, for example, during the ART (more specifically, when the rotating accessory 200 in the ART is driven, or When the cover member 198 is in a half-open state), a non-operation time indicating a period during which the player's operation is not accepted is measured, and when this non-operation time exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) The player may leave the seat or suspend the game. In other words, when a player is playing a game, some operation such as an operation associated with the game (for example, a start operation or a stop operation) or a menu screen operation is performed, and therefore no player operation is performed for a predetermined time. In addition, it is determined that the player has left the seat or has interrupted the game.

  Then, the sub CPU 102 performs a specific effect during the ART by moving the movable part of the rotating accessory 200 from the initial position to the predetermined position until the no-operation time reaches a predetermined time during the ART. When the non-operation time reaches a predetermined time, the movable part of the rotating accessory 200 is returned to the initial position, thereby reducing unnecessary wear. Thereafter, when any operation is performed by the player, the no-operation time is cleared. Therefore, the sub CPU 102 moves the movable part of the rotating accessory 200 from the initial position to a predetermined position, and performs a specific effect during the ART. Do. That is, in this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a time measuring means, and measures the non-operation time during which no game operation is performed when the movable part of the rotating accessory 200 is at a predetermined position.

  From the player's point of view, if the player returns from his / her seat or resumes the game, the rendition of the rotating combination 200 has ended, so there is a possibility of having the impression that the ART has ended. is there. Therefore, the sub CPU 102 continues to notify that the ART is being performed by the light emission of the LED, the image display of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the sound of the speakers 23L and 23R when the movable part of the rotating accessory 200 is returned to the initial position. It is good as well. Compared to a member that physically wears out, such as the movable part of the rotating accessory 200, the possibility that the pachislot machine 1 breaks down can be suppressed even if it is continuously executed while the user is away. If the player does not perform any operation, output from the speakers 23L and 23R to suppress the image display of the liquid crystal display device 11 such as displaying a demonstration screen from the viewpoint of energy saving and to suppress the volume leaking to the surroundings. It is common practice to suppress the sound being played. Therefore, as a method of continuously notifying that the ART is being performed, it is more preferable to perform the LED light emission control rather than the image display of the liquid crystal display device 11 or the sound of the speakers 23L and 23R.

<Mother task>
FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the mother task activated in S314 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  In the mother task, the sub CPU 102 activates the main task (S350), activates the main board communication task (S351), and activates the animation task (S352).

<Main task>
FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the main task activated in S350 of the mother task shown in FIG.

  In the main task, the sub CPU 102 executes a VSYNC interrupt initialization process (S360), and waits for a VSYNC interrupt (S361). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a drawing process (S362), and executes the process of S361.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the main board communication task activated in S351 of the mother task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes initialization of the communication message queue (S370), and executes a reception command check (S371).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one has been received (S372). If it is determined that a command different from the previous command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the process of S371.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a command different from the previous command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 checks the order of the command received this time and the command received last time (S373), and the command order is normal. Whether or not (S374). In a gaming machine such as pachislot 1, insertion of medals, start of reel rotation (operation of start lever 16), reel stop (operation of stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) from the first stop operation to the third stop operation, reel Since the game is performed in the order of the determination of the combination of symbols displayed after the stop and the provision of profits according to the symbol combination, the order of commands transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub-control circuit 101 is also determined. The processes of S373 and S374 are processes for determining whether commands are received in a predetermined order. Note that if the received command is a command not related to the progress of the game, the sub CPU 102 does not determine the order of the commands.

  If it is determined in step S374 that the command order is abnormal (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets a sequence error (S375). Here, the sequence error is an error detected when the sub control circuit 101 receives various commands from the main control circuit 91 and receives the commands in an order that cannot occur in a normal game. For example, the case where the sub control circuit 101 receives a start command without receiving a winning operation command after receiving a reel stop command corresponds to a sequence error. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a game order determination unit, and by determining whether or not various commands received from the main control circuit 91 are in a predetermined order, the progression order of one game is predetermined. It is determined whether or not the processes are performed in the order. The order in which commands are defined in the present embodiment is the order of a start command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a reel stop command, a reel stop command, and a winning action command. Although the command is related to the progress of the game, it is not necessarily generated in one game, so it is excluded from the determination of the command order.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of this embodiment, the end of CZ is determined according to the displayed symbol combination, and if the winning control command cannot be received on the sub-control circuit 101 side, A game different from the flow will be played. For example, if a bell spilling mark is displayed during CZ, the sub-control circuit 101 ends CZ, but if a winning action command cannot be received, it can be determined that the bell spilling mark has been displayed. CZ may continue. In such a case, since the start command in the next game is received without receiving the winning operation command in the current game, the game that is assumed is monitored by monitoring the occurrence of a sequence error. It is possible to prevent a game that is different from the flow of the game from being played.

  In the process of S374, when it is determined that the command order is normal (YES), or following the process of S375, the sub CPU 102 creates game information from the received command and stores the created game information in the sub RAM 103. Store (S376). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the command analysis process shown in FIG. 136 (S377), and executes the process of S371.

<Command analysis processing>
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed in S377 of the main board communication task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an effect content determination process shown in FIG. 138 (S380), executes a ramp data determination process (S381), executes a sound data determination process (S382), and executes an accessory data determination process. (S383), the determined data are registered (S384), and the command analysis process is terminated.

  In the effect content determination process, the sub CPU 102 determines the content of the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like according to the game. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines a predetermined game from a plurality of effects including a later-described layer switching effect and an effect switching effect that can be switched from a pre-switching effect to a post-switching effect as the game progresses. To select an effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. In the sound data determination process, the sub CPU 102 performs sound data for determining the content of the sound output from the speakers 23L and 23R according to the game. In the accessory data determination process, the sub CPU 102 determines the sound data. Then, the accessory data for driving the rotating accessory 200 is determined.

<Anime task>
FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the animation task activated in S352 of the mother task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 checks a change from the previous game information (S390). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes object control processing (S391). Specifically, when a check result indicating that the game information has changed is obtained in S390, the sub CPU 102 controls the image according to the change in the game information.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an effect switching request (S392). Here, the effect switching request is determined in advance for each effect that is being executed. For example, each reel associated with the start operation and the start operation, and each of the first stop operation to the third stop operation. This is performed when the reel is stopped or when a predetermined operation button is operated. Such an effect switching request can be acquired based on commands received from the main control circuit 91 (start command, reel rotation start command, reel stop command, winning action command, etc.). In the process of S392, when it is determined that the request for switching the effect has not been acquired (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the process of S396.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S392 that an effect switching request has been acquired (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the effect after switching is a layer switching effect ( S393). If it is determined in this process that the effect after switching is a layer switching effect (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently produces an effect (layer switching effect) after switching the image layer displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Switching to the designated layer (S394), the process proceeds to S396. On the other hand, in S393, when it is determined that the effect after switching is not the layer switching effect (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the effect executed in the image layer currently displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Is switched to the effect after switching (S395), and the process proceeds to S396.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes animation task management processing (S396). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 manages the order of images displayed in various effects. When executing the animation task management process, the sub CPU 102 executes the process of S390.

<Specific processing when changing production>
Here, a method for switching effects when there is a request for switching effects will be specifically described. In the pachi-slot 1, the progress of the production is linked to the player's operation by switching the production in response to the progress of the game such as a stop operation or the operation of a predetermined operation button (for example, a chance button). . In the pachislot 1, the effect in the pachislot 1 is changed in advance by switching the layer in which the effect is being executed, thereby switching between the layer switching type effect that switches the effect according to the progress of the game and the effect that is executed in the same layer. It is classified and set as an effect switching type effect in which the effect is switched in accordance with the progress of.

  Then, in the pachi-slot 1, when there is a request for switching the effect, the switching of the effect is controlled based on the relationship between the effect currently being executed and the effect after the switching. Specifically, in the case of a layer switching type effect, the effect after switching is executed in a layer different from the layer that is executing the effect before switching, and the layer displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is changed. To switch the production. That is, in the work area of the drawing RAM 105, a first layer in which image data indicating an effect image corresponding to the effect before switching is set, and image data indicating an effect image corresponding to the effect after switching is set. The effect is switched by storing the two layers and switching the layer displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 from the first layer to the second layer.

  In the case of the effect switching type effect, in the layer that executes the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the effect to be executed is changed from the effect before switching to the effect after switching. Switch. That is, the image data set in the layer stored in the work area of the drawing RAM 105 is changed from the image data indicating the effect image according to the effect before switching to the effect image according to the effect after switching. Switch.

  While the layer switching type effect can reduce the occurrence of flicker due to the time lag that occurs when switching images before and after switching, it uses multiple layers simultaneously, so the processing load of image processing And the capacity of the drawing RAM 105 is compressed. On the other hand, the effect switching type effect uses only one layer, so that the processing load can be suppressed. On the other hand, there may be a flicker due to a time lag that occurs when switching images before and after switching.

  Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1, the relationship between the effect before switching and the effect after switching is determined in advance according to the connection between the effects before and after switching, the processing load of each effect, and the like. For example, an effect that is likely to cause flickering before and after the switching and that causes discomfort to the player is determined as a layer switching type effect, and an effect that does not bother the flickering is determined as an effect switching type effect. deep. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to flickering at the time of switching the effects, and it is possible to prevent the processing from being lost according to the switching of the effects.

  It should be noted that the contents predetermined for each effect (layer switching effect or effect switching effect) may be changed according to the game continuation status. For example, a player whose eyes are tired due to an increase in game time becomes more noticeable due to flickering of the image. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 in which the player who has increased the game time is playing, even an effect previously determined as an effect switching type effect may be changed to a layer switching type effect.

  The game time can be acquired by any method. For example, the operating time of the pachislot 1 may be acquired as the game time, and the time that the player who performed user registration in the pachislot 1 played a game may be acquired as the game time.

<Direction switching when the chance button is operated>
In a gaming machine such as the pachislot 1, the player may be prompted to perform an operation that is not related to the progress of the game, such as a chance button, and the effect may be switched when the operation is performed. Also in the pachi-slot 1 of this embodiment, the button operation is urged to the player. For example, the sub CPU 102 displays an image corresponding to the chance button on the liquid crystal display device 11 while all the reels are rotating. The display prompts the player to perform a predetermined operation (pressing the chance button). The sub CPU 102 detects that the predetermined operation has been performed based on the command received from the main control circuit 91, and issues a reel stop command or the like from the main control circuit 91 before the predetermined operation is detected. By receiving, it is detected that the game has progressed without performing a predetermined operation.

  Then, in the pachislot 1, the effect of switching is different between when the predetermined operation urged by the player is performed and when the game progresses without performing the predetermined operation. Specifically, when a predetermined operation urged by the player is performed, a first switching request is made, and the sub CPU 102 changes the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 from the effect before switching to the first effect. Switch to production after switching. Further, when the game progresses without performing a predetermined operation, a second switching request is made, and the sub CPU 102 changes the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 from the effect before switching to the effect after switching. Switch to.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1, since the effect of switching can be made different between the case where the predetermined operation urged by the player is performed and the case where the predetermined operation is not performed, the gameability is diversified and the interest of the game is improved. . Even in this case, by setting a preferable switching method for each production, the production can be appropriately switched according to the progress of the game.

<Production content determination process>
FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing effect content determination processing executed in S380 of the command analysis processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a start command has been received (S401). If it is determined that a start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a start command reception process shown in FIG. 139 (S402), and ends the effect content determination process. In the start command receiving process, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a start command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a reel rotation start command has been received (S403). If it is determined that a reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a reel rotation start command reception process (S404), and ends the effect content determination process. In the reel rotation start command reception process, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a reel rotation start command is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a reel stop command has been received (S405). If it is determined that a reel stop command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a reel stop command reception process (S406), and ends the effect content determination process. In the reel stop command reception process, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a reel stop command is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a winning operation command has been received (S407). If it is determined that a winning action command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a winning action command reception process shown in FIG. 149 (S408), and ends the effect content determination process. In the winning operation command reception process, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a winning operation command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a bonus end command has been received (S409). If it is determined that a bonus end command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a bonus end command reception process shown in FIG. 154 (S410), and ends the effect content determination process. In the bonus end command reception process, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a bonus end command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a bonus start command has been received (S411). If it is determined that a bonus start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a bonus start command reception process (S412), and ends the effect content determination process. In the bonus start command reception process, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a bonus start command is set. In the bonus start command reception process, the BB mode “0” is set as the initial value of the BB mode.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes processing according to the other received command (S413), and ends the effect content determination processing.

<Processing when receiving a start command>
FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the start command reception process executed in S402 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state is either a normal gaming state or a high probability gaming state (S421). If it is determined in S421 that the gaming state is either the normal gaming state or the high-probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the normal start CZ / ART lottery shown in FIG. 140 (S422). In the normal start CZ / ART lottery, the above-described transition lottery (A) and (D) at the start are performed based on the internal winning combination and the production balls set in the apocalypse in this game.

  Subsequent to the process of S422, the sub CPU 102 performs the apocalypse operation process shown in FIG. 141 (S423). In this apocalypse operation process, the sub CPU 102 performs control to start or end the operation of the apocalypse.

  Subsequent to the processing of S423 or when determining in S421 that the gaming state is neither the normal gaming state nor the high-probability gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 continues in the RT4 gaming state where the gaming state is the normal gaming state. It is determined whether or not there is (S424). More specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state managed on the sub side is the normal gaming state and the RT gaming state managed on the main side is the RT4 gaming state. If it is determined in S424 that the gaming state is the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the high probability gaming state transition process shown in FIG. 142 (S425). In the stochastic gaming state transition process, the sub CPU 102 performs lottery point lottery in order to shift the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the high probability gaming state.

  Subsequent to the processing of S425 or when determining in S424 that the gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the gaming state is a high probability gaming state. (S426). If it is determined in S426 that the gaming state is the high probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the high probability medium effect registration process shown in FIG. 143 (S427). In the high-probability medium effect registration process, the sub CPU 102 performs an effect (push order navigation) for avoiding that the main game state shifts from the RT4 game state to the RT1 game state based on the avoidance points. .

  Following the processing of S427 or in S426, if it is determined that the gaming state is not a high probability gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the gaming state is CZ (S428). If it is determined in S428 that the gaming state is CZ (YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the CZ start-time ART lottery process shown in FIG. 144 (S429). In the CZ start ART lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs the above-described transition lottery (C) and the like.

  Subsequent to the processing of S429 or in S428, if it is determined that the gaming state is not CZ (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the gaming state is a bonus state (in BB) (S430). ). If it is determined in S430 that the gaming state is a bonus state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs an ART lottery process during BB shown in FIG. 145 (S431). In the BB ART lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs the above-described transition lottery (F) and the like.

  Subsequent to the processing of S431 or in S430, if it is determined that the gaming state is not a bonus state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the gaming state is an ART gaming state (during ART). (S432). If it is determined in S432 that the gaming state is the ART gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the ART processing shown in FIG. 146 (S433). In this ART process, the sub CPU 102 determines the contents of the effects in the enemy determination ART or the battle ART.

  If it is determined in S432 that the gaming state is not the ART gaming state (NO), or following the processing of S433, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a sequence error is set (S434). Here, the sequence error is set when the command sequence is not normal in the main board communication task. If it is determined in S434 that a sequence error is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs a sequence error process described later (S435), and ends the start command reception process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S434 that the sequence error is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the start command reception process.

<Specific example of sequence error processing 1>
In this embodiment, CZ ends on the condition that in the game in which the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols displayed when the incorrect answer stop operation is performed in the push order is displayed. To do. Management of CZ is performed in the sub-control circuit 101, and management of displayed symbol combinations is performed in the main control circuit 91. Therefore, the sub-control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) transmits from the main control circuit 91. The end / continuation of CZ is controlled based on the winning operation command. Specifically, the sub-control circuit 101 ends CZ when receiving a winning action command indicating that the displayed symbol combination is “bell spill” (see FIG. 153 described later).

  Here, when the sub-control circuit 101 cannot receive the winning action command, the sub-control circuit 101 cannot grasp the combination of the displayed symbols, so that there is a game different from the assumed game flow. Will be done. For example, when “Bell spilling” is displayed in CZ, CZ is terminated on the sub-control circuit 101 side, but when a winning operation command cannot be received, “Bell spilling” is displayed. This cannot be grasped on the sub-control circuit 101 side, and there is a risk that CZ will continue.

  Here, the sequence error may occur due to a failure of the pachislot 1 regardless of the player's operation, but the communication between the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101 is temporarily disconnected. It may be generated artificially by an illegal act such as so-called command losing, which causes a communication disconnection state. If such a fraudulent act makes it possible to avoid the end of CZ, a player who has performed the fraudulent act will gain an unfair advantage.

  Therefore, the sub control circuit 101 checks the order of the commands received from the main control circuit 91, and terminates CZ if a sequence error occurs when the command order is abnormal. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an undue profit due to fraud.

<Specific example 2 of sequence error processing>
In the present embodiment, the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state on the main side may be treated as the high probability gaming state on the sub side. This high-probability gaming state ends at the timing when the sub-side recognizes that the combination of symbols displayed at the time of incorrect answer is displayed on the push order bell or push order lip (see FIG. 152 described later). For this reason, if the sub-control circuit 101 cannot receive the winning action command, the sub-control circuit 101 cannot grasp the displayed symbol combination, and a game different from the assumed game flow is performed. It will be broken. For example, when “bell spill” or “RT1 transition lip” is displayed during the high probability gaming state, the high probability gaming state is terminated on the sub-control circuit 101 side, but no winning action command can be received. May not be able to grasp on the side of the sub-control circuit 101 that “Bell spilling eyes” or “RT1 transition lip” is displayed, and the high-probability gaming state may continue.

  Therefore, the sub-control circuit 101 checks the order of the commands received from the main control circuit 91, determines that a sequence error has occurred when the order of the commands is abnormal, terminates the high-probability gaming state, and returns to the normal gaming state. To migrate. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an undue profit due to fraud.

  If a sequence error occurs, a history of the generated sequence error may be accumulated. Although it is difficult to determine whether the sequence error that has occurred is an artifact that has occurred artificially due to fraud or whether it has occurred regardless of the player's operation due to a failure of the pachislot 1, etc. By accumulating error occurrence histories, it is possible to grasp the tendency of fraudulent acts. For example, a sequence error that occurs due to fraudulent behavior is likely to occur when the situation becomes advantageous to the player, and a sequence error that occurs naturally regardless of the player occurs regardless of the situation Therefore, when a sequence error occurs due to an illegal act, a similar history is accumulated as a sequence error occurrence history. Therefore, a specific command is received in a specific gaming state by making it possible to grasp the gaming state in which the sequence error has occurred and the type of command that could not be received on the sub-control circuit 101 side from the trend of occurrence history of the sequence error. By making it impossible, it is possible to grasp the situation where the player unfairly gains profits, which can be used for future game machine designs.

<Normal start CZ / ART lottery processing>
FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the normal start CZ / ART lottery process executed in S422 of the start command reception process shown in FIG. 139.

  First, the sub CPU 102 refers to the start ART lottery table shown in FIGS. 71 to 73 based on the internal winning combination and the performance ball set in the apocalypse in this game, and the lottery to shift to CZ / ART. (A) and (D) are performed (S441). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not CZ is won in this lottery (S442). If CZ is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets CZ to the game state of the next game (S443), and ends the CZ / ART lottery process at the normal start.

  On the other hand, if the CZ is not won (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART is won in the lottery of S441 (S444). When the player has not won the ART (NO), the CZ / ART lottery process at the normal start is finished, while when the player has won the ART (YES), the sub CPU 102 is in the ART gaming state as the gaming state. The enemy decision ART is set (S445). Since the ART gaming state is the main-side RT4 gaming state, the RT4 transition lip is displayed and the main side must transition to the RT4 gaming state. Therefore, “setting the ART determination state ART state as the gaming state” does not mean that the next game state becomes the ART determination state ART state, but the RT4 gaming state on the main side This means that the game state on the sub side becomes the enemy determination ART of the ART game state. This also applies to the following.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104, lotteries the ART state based on the gaming state at the time of ART winning, and sets the lottery result (S446). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ / ART lottery process at the normal start.

<Revelation processing>
FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the apocalypse operation process executed in S423 of the start command reception process shown in FIG. 139.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the apocalypse flag is on (S451). At this time, if it is determined that the apocalypse flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S457.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S451 that the apocalypse flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 102 performs apocalypse lottery based on the current winning mode (S452). Specifically, with reference to the apocalypse operation lottery table of FIG. 79 (C), the addition amount or the subtraction amount of the guaranteed number is lottery based on the internal winning combination. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 updates the current number of guarantees based on the lottery result in S452 (S453).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the guaranteed number of times is 1 or more (S454). If it is determined that the guaranteed number of times is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 draws a performance ball, sets it in the apocalypse (S455), and proceeds to the processing of S462. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 draws an apocalypse MAP, and draws an effect ball based on the MAP data defined in the apocalypse MAP (see FIGS. 80 to 83). Further, in this process, the sub CPU 102 upgrades the effect ball set in the apocalypse with a predetermined probability when the promotion lottery is possible (when the guaranteed number of movable items is 1 or more).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the guaranteed number is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 updates the apocalypse flag to OFF, ends the operation of the apocalypse (S456), and then proceeds to the processing of S462.

  If it is determined in S451 that the apocalypse flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 performs apocalypse lottery based on the current winning mode (S457). Specifically, with reference to the apocalypse operation lottery table shown in FIGS. 79A and 79B, the addition amount of the guaranteed number is lottery based on the internal winning combination. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 updates the current number of guarantees based on the lottery result of S457 (S458).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the guaranteed number of times is 1 or more (S459). If it is determined that the number of legal phases is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the apocalypse flag and starts the operation of the apocalypse (S460). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 in the apocalypse (S461).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 performs a winning lottery of the winning mode based on the internal winning combination (S462). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the mode transition lottery tables shown in FIGS. 74 to 78 and lotteries the transition destination winning mode. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result as the winning mode of the next game (S463), and ends the apocalypse operation process.

<High probability gaming state transition processing>
FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the high-probability gaming state transition process executed in S425 of the start command reception process shown in FIG. 139.

  First, the sub CPU 102 draws avoidance points based on the internal winning combination (S465). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the avoidance table lottery table shown in FIG. 89 and lots the avoidance point addition amount. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an avoidance point lottery has been won, that is, whether or not one or more avoidance points are added (S466). When winning (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets an avoidance point based on the lottery result (S467), and ends the high probability gaming state transition process. On the other hand, when not winning (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high probability gaming state transition process.

<High probability medium production registration process>
FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the high-probability medium effect registration process executed in S427 of the start command reception process shown in FIG. 139.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a push order bell or push order lip is determined as an internal winning combination (S471). If it is determined that neither the push order bell or the push order lip has been determined as an internal winning combination (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high-probability medium effect registration process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the push order bell or push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the avoidance point is 1 or more (S472). If it is determined that the avoidance point is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high-probability medium effect registration process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the avoidance point is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets navigation data that is correct in the pressing order (S473). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 subtracts one avoidance point (S474), and ends the high-probability medium effect registration process.

  In this way, in the high probability gaming state, when the push order bell or push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct push order is notified based on the avoidance points. For the player, by playing the game according to the notification, the high-probability gaming state can be continued, so the game can be played with peace of mind. Here, the high-probability gaming state is easier to win a lottery for shifting to ART than the normal gaming state. When the correct push order is notified in the high-probability gaming state, the player has a high-probability gaming state. The benefit of continuing is already granted. Therefore, when the correct answer push order is notified in the high probability gaming state, the lottery result of the transition lottery in the game may be discarded (invalidated). Thereby, it can prevent that a player's profit will become excessive.

<ART lottery processing at CZ start>
FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the CZ start-time ART lottery process executed in S429 of the start command reception process shown in FIG. 139.

  First, the sub CPU 102 updates the number of continuous games of CZ (S481). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the first game of CZ (S482). If it is determined that the game is the first game of CZ (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently draws and sets CZ_MAP. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the CZ_MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 91 to lottery and set CZ_MAP used in the CZ (S483).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines and sets the initial value of the invalid point (S484). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines and sets the initial value of the invalid point with reference to the invalid point lottery table shown in FIG.

  If it is determined that the game is not the first game of CZ after S484 or S482 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently draws a performance ball and sets it in the apocalypse (S485). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the CZ medium production ball lottery table shown in FIG. 94, and draws and sets the production balls based on the final production ball currently set. Further, in this process, when the invalid point is 1 or more, the sub CPU 102 rewrites the development ball set in the apocalypse as an avoidance ball.

  It is determined whether or not it is the 30th game of CZ (S486). If it is determined that the game is the 30th game of CZ (YES), then the sub CPU 102 sets the ART determination state ART as the gaming state (S487). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104 and lots and sets the ART state based on the CZ mode 2 (S488). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART lottery process at the CZ start time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the 30th game of CZ (NO), the sub CPU 102 draws invalid points based on the internal winning combination and adds them (S489). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the invalid point lottery table shown in FIGS. 93 (B) and 93 (C) and lots the added amount of invalid points, and adds it to the invalid points currently held.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the performance ball set in the apocalypse in the current game is the development ball and the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination (S490). When both conditions are satisfied (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the invalid point is 1 or more (S491). If it is determined that the invalid point is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently subtracts 1 from the invalid point (S492), and sets the current CZ mode notification effect data (S493).

  This effect data, for example, provides an effect that informs or suggests that the current CZ mode is 1, or that the CZ mode will increase from 0 to 1 in a game within a few more times (for example, a few times). Production data. Specifically, production data with different probabilities set when the CZ mode is 1 and 0, or when the CZ mode increases from 0 to 1 in a game where the CZ mode is within the predetermined number of times, and when the CZ mode is within the predetermined number of times. This is effect data that has a different probability of being set when the game does not increase from 0 to 1. Thereby, the player can guess or grasp the current CZ mode when the invalid point is 1 or more.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S491 that the invalid point is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART lottery table in CZ shown in FIG. 95 and determines the lottery (C for transition to ART based on the current CZ mode). And the lottery completed flag is set to ON (S494). As described above, during CZ, when the development ball is set and the winning order bell is won, the transition lottery (C) is performed. However, when the answer is correct in the pressing order at the stop, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) becomes invalid. Is done. The lottery completed flag is used to determine whether to invalidate or maintain the lottery result when stopping. When the processing of S494 is completed, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART lottery processing at the time of CZ start.

  On the other hand, if any of the conditions is not satisfied in S490 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the performance ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an avoidance ball ( S495). If it is determined that the performance ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an avoidance ball (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the current CZ mode notification performance data (S496), and CZ start ART lottery processing Exit. Also, in S495, when it is determined that the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is not the avoidance ball (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART lottery process at the CZ start. That is, in this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes an advantageous state lottery means, and shifts to ART based on the CZ mode performed in the middle of the CZ, or shifts to ART based on the CZ mode 2 performed when the CZ is completed. Perform lottery.

<ART lottery processing during BB>
FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the BB ART lottery process executed in S431 of the start command reception process shown in FIG. 139.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a 7-round lip is determined as an internal winning combination (S501). If it is determined that the 7-round lip has been determined as an internal winning combination (YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a lottery transfer (F) to the ART in the BB with reference to the START lottery table in the BB shown in FIG. . Referring to FIG. 98, since the winning lottery (F) is always won, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART winning flag to ON (S502). The ART winning flag is information indicating that the ART has been won in the middle of the bonus state, and is referred to when the bonus ends.

  Subsequent to S502 or if it is determined in S501 that the 7-round lip has not been determined as an internal winning combination (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the BB medium mode lottery table shown in FIGS. 99 and 100. Then, mode up lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination (S503). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the BB mode based on the lottery result (S504), and ends the ART lottery process during BB.

<Processing during ART>
FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the ART processing that is executed in S433 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 139.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the enemy determination ART (S511). If it is determined that the enemy determination ART is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the process during battle ART shown in FIG. 148 (S517), and ends the process during ART.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the enemy determination ART is being performed (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the determined flag is on (S512). The determined flag is information for determining whether or not the enemy character of the opponent is determined during the enemy determination ART. If it is determined that the determined flag is not ON (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the enemy determination ART processing shown in FIG. 147 (S516), and ends the ART processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the determined flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the HP of the enemy character based on the internal winning combination with reference to the boss power lottery table during enemy determination ART shown in FIG. (S513). Subsequently, effect data for introducing the enemy character is set (S514). The enemy character introduction effect data is, for example, effect data for displaying the boss status shown in FIG. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 turns off the determined flag, sets the battle ART to the game state of the next game (S515), and ends the ART processing.

<Processing during enemy decision ART>
FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the enemy determination ART processing executed in S516 of the ART processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 draws a performance ball and sets it in the apocalypse (S521). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 draws the effect balls based on the boss MAP data and the ART state defined for the boss MAP (see FIGS. 105 to 108). Further, in this process, the sub CPU 102 also performs stock lottery of ally balls, and if there is stock, rewrites the boss balls set in the apocalypse to ally balls (see FIG. 109). Note that when the guaranteed number of times for guaranteeing the number of continued games of the enemy-determined ART is used as described above, the processing of S521 may not be performed between the games for the guaranteed number of games.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 performs an HP initial setting process for the teammate character (S522). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the teammate character's HP to the initial value when the teammate character's HP is less than the initial value (HP50).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a boss ball (S523). If it is determined that the boss ball is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the bell is won (S524). At this time, if it is determined that the bell is not won (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process during the enemy determination ART. On the other hand, if it is determined that the player wins a bell (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines an enemy character corresponding to the boss ball as an opponent (S525). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the determined flag to ON (S526), and ends the enemy determination ART processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S523 that the boss ball is not set (that is, the teammate ball is set) (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the enemy-determined ART medium team power addition lottery table shown in FIG. Based on the winning combination, the teammate character is added to the HP (S527). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 updates the HP of the teammate character based on the lottery result (S528), and ends the process during the enemy determination ART.

<Processing during Battle ART>
FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the processing during battle ART executed in S517 of the processing during ART shown in FIG. 146.

  First, the sub CPU 102 draws a performance ball and sets it in the apocalypse (S531). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 draws the effect balls based on the battle MAP data defined in the battle MAP (see FIGS. 113 to 119). In this process, the sub CPU 102 also rewrites the enemy ball based on the awakening ball, and the production ball set in the apocalypse in this game is the awakening ball and is equal to or more than the bell win. , Rewrite the enemy ball set in the Apocalypse as an ally ball.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 performs damage lottery based on the effect ball and the internal winning combination (S532). Specifically, when the performance ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball, the sub CPU 102 performs damage lottery with reference to the battle lottery table during battle ART illustrated in FIG. When the performance ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a teammate ball or awakening ball, damage lottery is performed with reference to the battle lottery table during battle ART illustrated in FIG.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 updates the HP of the enemy character or teammate character based on the lottery result (S533). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the HP of the teammate character is 0 or less (S534). If it is determined that the HP of the teammate character is 0 or less (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART game state, sets the normal game state to the game state of the next game (S535), and ends the process during the battle ART.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the HP of the teammate character is not 0 or less (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the HP of the enemy character is 0 or less (S536). If it is determined that the enemy character's HP is not 0 or less (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process during the battle ART. On the other hand, if it is determined that the enemy character's HP is 0 or less (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table illustrated in FIG. 120 and FIG. 121 and changes the ART state based on the type and the number of continuations of the enemy character. A lottery is made and set (S537). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets an enemy determination ART in the game state of the next game (S538), and ends the process during the battle ART.

<Process when receiving a winning action command>
FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the winning action command reception process executed in S408 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state is either a normal gaming state or a high probability gaming state (S541). If it is determined that the gaming state is either the normal gaming state or the high-probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the normal end CZ / ART lottery shown in FIG. 150 (S542). In the normal end CZ / ART lottery, the above-described transition lottery (A) and (D) at the start is performed based on the performance balls set in the apocalypse in this game.

  Subsequent to the processing of S542 or when determining in S541 that the gaming state is neither the normal gaming state nor the high-probability gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 continues in the RT4 gaming state where the gaming state is the normal gaming state. It is determined whether or not there is (S543). If it is determined that the gaming state is the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs a high probability transition determination process shown in FIG. 151 (S544). In this high probability transition determination process, it is determined whether or not the normal gaming state RT4 gaming state can be transitioned to the high probability gaming state.

  Subsequent to the processing of S544 or when determining in S543 that the gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the gaming state is a high probability gaming state. (S545). If it is determined that the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs a high-probability end determination process shown in FIG. 152 (S546). In this high probability end determination process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to end the high probability gaming state based on the displayed symbol combination.

  Subsequent to the processing of S546 or in S545, when determining that the gaming state is not the high probability gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the gaming state is CZ (S547). If it is determined that the gaming state is CZ (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs lottery result management processing during CZ shown in FIG. 153 (S548). In the lottery result management process during CZ, the sub CPU 102 determines whether to maintain or invalidate the above-described transition lottery (C) performed in the middle of CZ.

  When the process of S548 is completed or when it is determined that the S547 gaming state is not CZ (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving a command for winning operation.

<CZ / ART lottery process at normal end>
FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the CZ / ART lottery process at the normal end, which is executed in S542 of the process at the time of receiving a command at the time of winning operation shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the apocalypse flag is on (S551). If it is determined that the apocalypse flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal end CZ / ART lottery process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the apocalypse flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not it is equal to or more than a bell winning (S552). If it is determined that it is not equal to or more than the bell winning (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ / ART lottery process at the normal end.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the prize is equal to or greater than the bell winning (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently refers to the reel stop ART lottery table shown in FIG. 87 and based on the performance ball set in the apocalypse in this game. Then, transfer lottery (A) and (D) to CZ and ART are performed (S553).

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not CZ is won in this lottery (S554). If the CZ is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets CZ to the game state of the next game (S555), and ends the CZ / ART lottery process at the normal end.

  On the other hand, when the CZ is not won (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART is won (S556). When not winning the ART (NO), the CZ / ART lottery process at the normal end is finished, while when winning the ART (YES), the sub CPU 102 is set to the ART gaming state as a gaming state. The enemy determination ART is set (S557). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104, lotteries the ART state based on the gaming state at the time of ART winning, and sets the lottery result (S558). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal end CZ / ART lottery process. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a lottery state start means, and when winning CZ in the lottery (A) (D) to CZ and ART based on the production ball, the gaming state of the next game Is set to CZ, CZ which is an advantageous state lottery state is started.

<High probability transition judgment process>
FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the high-probability transition determination process executed in S544 in the process for receiving a winning action command shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a bell spill or RT1 transition lip is displayed (S561). If it is determined that the bell spill or RT1 transition lip is displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently clears the number of replays and avoidance points (S562), and ends the high probability transition determination process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the bell spilled eyes nor the RT1 transition lip are displayed (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the avoidance point is 1 or more (S563). If it is determined that the avoidance point is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the high probability gaming state to the gaming state of the next game (S564). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 clears the number of replays (S565) and ends the high probability transition determination process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the avoidance point is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a combination of symbols related to replay other than the RT1 transition lip is displayed (S566). If it is determined that the symbol combination related to replay other than the RT1 transition lip is not displayed (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high probability transition determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined that a symbol combination related to replay other than RT1 transition lip is displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the number of replays (S567), and ends the high probability transition determination process. That is, in this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a high probability state transition means, and based on the fact that the winning point lottery is won in the above-described high probability game state transition process (see FIG. 142), The gaming state is shifted to a high probability gaming state with a high probability of winning the transition lottery.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main game state is shifted to the RT4 game state during the normal game state, the normal game state is maintained and the avoidance points are given until the avoidance points are given. Transition to high probability gaming state. As in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine in which the situation that has accidentally shifted to the RT4 gaming state is set to a chance section instead of a penalty section, it is necessary to adjust the balance so as not to be too advantageous to the player. In this regard, even if the main side shifts to the RT4 gaming state, the balance between the profits of both the player and the gaming store can be adjusted by treating it as the normal gaming state until the avoidance point is awarded. Of course, since it is sufficient to adjust the balance between the profits of the entire gaming machine, it is possible to immediately shift from the normal gaming state to the high-probability gaming state at the stage of shifting to the RT4 gaming state on the main side.

<High probability end determination process>
FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the high-probability end determination process executed in S546 of the winning operation command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a bell spill or RT1 transition lip is displayed (S571). If it is determined that neither the bell spilled eyes nor the RT1 transition lip are displayed (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high probability end determination process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bell spilled eyes or the RT1 transition lip is displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently clears the avoidance point (S572). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal game state to the game state of the next game (S573), and ends the high probability end determination process. In other words, in this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a low probability state transition means, and when the bell spill or RT1 transition lip is displayed, the sub control circuit 101 enters a normal gaming state with a low probability of winning an ART transition lottery. Transition game state.

<CZ lottery result management process>
FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the CZ lottery result management process executed in S548 of the winning operation command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery flag has been turned on (S581). If it is determined that the lottery completed flag is not ON (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the lottery result management process during CZ.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery completed flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the correct answer has been obtained in the order of pressing (S582). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the stop operation has been performed in the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order bell that has been won in S490 of FIG. 144, in other words, according to “C_CD bell (see FIG. 30)”. It is determined whether or not a combination of symbols is displayed. If it is determined that the answer is correct in the order of pressing according to the pressing order bell (YES), the sub CPU 102 discards (invalidates) the lottery result (S583) and ends the lottery result management process during CZ. As a result, CZ continues. Note that, as described above, when the correct answer is obtained in the push order corresponding to the push order bell, the lottery result may be maintained while continuing the CZ.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the correct answer is not given in the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order bell (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the ART is won (S584). If it is determined that the player has not won the ART (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently sets the normal game state to the game state of the next game (S587), and ends the lottery result management process during CZ.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the player has won the ART (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the ART determination state enemy ART as the gaming state (S585). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104, lotteries the ART state based on the gaming state at the time of ART winning, and sets the lottery result (S586). When this process ends, the sub CPU 102 ends the lottery result management process during CZ. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes the lottery state ending means, and based on the fact that it is determined that the correct order of pushing the bells is not correct during CZ, The normal gaming state is set, or when the CZ finishes in the above-mentioned CZ start ART lottery process (see FIG. 144) (YES in S486 in FIG. 144), the ART gaming state is set as the next gaming state. .

<Process when receiving bonus end command>
FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the bonus end command reception process executed in S410 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 refers to the BB end ART lottery table shown in FIG. 101 and performs lottery transfer (F) to ART based on the current BB mode (S591). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART is won (S592). If it is determined that the ART has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the ART winning flag is on (S593). If both S592 and S593 are NO, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal gaming state to the gaming state of the next game (S596), and ends the bonus end command reception process.

  On the other hand, if any one of S592 and S593 is YES, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART determination state ART as the gaming state (S594). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104, lotteries the ART state based on the gaming state at the time of ART winning, and sets the lottery result (S595). When this process ends, the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the bonus end command.

[Effect of pachislot 1]
The pachislot 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachislot 1, the following effects can be expected.

<Effects of JACIN carried over during bonus status>
In the pachislot 1, when any of the combinations related to JACIN (“F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, “F_JACIN3”) is determined as an internal winning combination during the bonus state, the combination of the corresponding symbols is displayed (while carrying over) ), RT4 gaming state in the bonus state. In the RT4 gaming state in this bonus state, JAC1 series replays such as “F_J1 upper 7 lip” to “F_J1 cross 7 lip”, JAC2 series replays such as “F_J2 chance lip 1” to “F_J2 cherry lip”, and “F_FJ3” JAC3-based replays such as “chance lip 1” to “F_J3 cherry lip” can be determined as internal winning combinations (see FIGS. 35 and 36).

  In the pachi-slot 1, stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed based on the gaming state and the internal winning combination. For example, if a JAC1-based replay is determined as an internal winning combination while “F_JACIN1” is carried over as an internal winning combination, two types of “F_JACIN1” and JAC1-based replaying are performed in the game. Similarly, if JAC1 replay is determined as an internal winning combination with “F_JACIN2” being carried over as an internal winning combination, in the game, “F_JACIN2” is determined. Two types of combination with JAC1 replay are determined as internal winning combinations.

  Therefore, in the pachislot 1, the stop control can be varied according to the type of the role related to the carry-over JACIN, and when the JAC1 type replay to the JAC3 type replay are determined as the internal winning combination, FIG. The stop control is performed so that the combination of symbols having the correspondence shown in 57 is displayed. By varying the privilege (ART) to be given to the player using such control, the pachislot 1 can vary whether or not the privilege is granted according to the type of the carryover combination. The game in the state can be diversified, and the interest of the game in the bonus state can be enhanced.

  As shown in FIG. 57, when JAC1 replay is determined as an internal winning combination in a state where “F_JACIN1” is carried over as an internal winning combination, “7-matched lip” is displayed, and “F_JACIN2” is displayed. When a JAC1 replay is determined as an internal winning combination while being carried over as an internal winning combination, “normal lip” is displayed. In this way, it is possible to grasp whether or not a privilege is granted from a combination of displayed symbols by making stop control different between a situation where a privilege is granted and a situation where a privilege is not given. A person will have a strong interest in the combination of symbols to be displayed, and can increase the interest of the game in the bonus state.

  Referring to FIG. 57, in the pachi-slot 1, stop control capable of displaying “seven equal lip” is performed only in the case of JAC1 replay, and in the case of JAC2 replay or JAC3 replay, Stop control that cannot display “7-set lip” is performed. In this regard, even in the case of JAC2-based replay or JAC3-based replay, stop control may be performed so that “7-matched lip” can be displayed. Specifically, when “F_JACIN2” is carried over as an internal winning combination, when JAC2 replay is determined as an internal winning combination, stop control capable of displaying “7 complete lip” is performed, and “F_JACIN1” is displayed. Alternatively, when a JAC2 replay is determined as an internal winning combination in a state where “F_JACIN3” is carried over as an internal winning combination, stop control that cannot display “7-matched lip” is performed. Similarly, when JAC3 replay is determined as an internal winning combination while “F_JACIN3” is carried over as an internal winning combination, stop control capable of displaying “7-matched lip” is performed, and “F_JACIN1” or “ If JAC3 replay is determined as an internal winning combination in a state where “F_JACIN2” is carried over as an internal winning combination, stop control that cannot display “7-matched lip” is performed.

  Then, when “7-set lip” can be displayed, by referring to the START lottery table during BB shown in FIG. 98 and performing lottery transfer (F) to ART in the bonus state, Whether or not to grant a privilege can be varied depending on the type, and the interest of the game in the bonus state can be enhanced.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, the probability that a privilege is given by changing the probabilities that the JAC1 replay, the JAC2 replay, and the JAC3 replay are determined as internal winning combinations, respectively. Can be provided, and the interest of the game in the bonus state can be enhanced.

  It should be noted that the combination relationship between the carryover combination and the winning combination that can display “7-set lip” is arbitrary. For example, for JAC1-based replays, the only carryover combination that can display “7-matched lip” is “F_JACIN1”, and for JAC2-based replays, the carryover combination that can display “7-matched lip” is displayed. Two types of “F_JACIN1” and “F_JACIN2” may be used, and for JAC3 series replays, the carryover combination that can display “7-matched lip” may be all of “F_JACIN1”, “F_JACIN2”, and “F_JACIN3”. Of course, it is good also as arbitrary combinations not only in such a combination.

<Effects of high probability gaming state>
In the pachislot 1, the RT4 gaming state is provided as a high RT state with a high probability that the role related to the replay is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the transition to the ART is won, information on an advantageous stop operation in the RT4 gaming state is notified. By doing so, the ART gaming state is realized (see FIG. 66). In the pachi-slot 1, the RT4 gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state when the answer is correct in the pushing order corresponding to the pushing order lip during the RT0 gaming state. In Pachislot 1, if you are accidentally transitioned to the RT4 gaming state due to a stop operation in a situation where you have not won the transition to ART, transition to ART even in the RT4 gaming state that accidentally transitioned without being treated as a penalty A lottery that is advantageous to the player such as lottery is performed. Since the RT4 gaming state is a high RT state, it is possible to play a game without consuming medals. Therefore, in the pachislot 1, the RT4 gaming state that has not won the ART is used as the transition chance section to the ART. It is possible to enhance the interest during the high RT state where no privilege is granted.

  In addition, since the lottery for shifting to the ART is performed during the RT4 gaming state, the strategy for the stop operation during the normal gaming state is increased, and the interest during the normal gaming state can be enhanced. Specifically, in the case of a pachislot that is handled as a penalty when it has accidentally shifted to the RT4 gaming state due to the stopping operation, the stopping operation in the normal gaming state is simple (for example, the first stopping operation so as not to receive a penalty) Must be performed on the left reel). In this regard, Pachislot 1 does not impose a penalty during the RT4 gaming state that has been accidentally transferred, so the player can freely perform a stop operation during the normal gaming state, and only with the gameability during the normal gaming state. The operability can also be improved.

  In addition, as long as there is an avoidance point, the pachi-slot 1 reports information on a stop operation that is advantageous in the RT4 gaming state that has been shifted accidentally (the pressing order for avoiding the transition to the RT1 gaming state). As a result, when the game state is changed to the RT4 game state by chance, the game state is not immediately changed to the normal game state, and for a predetermined period, the transfer lottery to the ART can be received with a high replay winning probability. .

  By setting the RT4 gaming state to a high-probability gaming state with a high probability of winning the ART lottery, the RT4 gaming state that has been accidentally transferred can be used as a transition chance section to the ART, and a privilege is given. It is possible to increase the interest during the high RT state.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, an RT0 gaming state that can shift to the RT4 gaming state as a normal gaming state and an RT1 gaming state that cannot transition to the RT4 gaming state are provided. In the pachislot, it is necessary to adjust the balance between the profit on the player side and the profit on the game store side so as not to give excessive profit to either the player or the game store. In this regard, when comparing the pachislot 1 according to the present invention in which the accidentally transitioned RT4 gaming state is set to the ART transition chance section and other gaming machines in which the accidentally transitioned RT4 gaming state is in the penalty section, The pachi-slot 1 according to the present invention is more advantageous to the player than other gaming machines. Therefore, in the pachislot 1, by providing an RT1 gaming state that cannot be shifted to the RT4 gaming state, the balance of both profits can be adjusted. Thereby, the variable which adjusts both profit balances can be diversified and the game machine which was rich in gameability can be provided.

<Effects of apocalypse during normal gaming state (high probability gaming state)>
The pachislot 1 has a complete CZ as an ART chance zone. When the apocalypse is activated during the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, the lottery (A) and (D) to the CZ when the reel is stopped is performed. This transition lottery (A) (D) is a probability according to the production balls (lottery balls 1-4, final ball) set in the apocalypse when the displayed combination of symbols is “Bell Prize” or more. Done. In this way, not only the content of the performance (the performance ball set in the apocalypse), but also the combination of symbols displayed as a result of the game, the transition lottery (A) (D) is performed, and the game state transition Therefore, the player's operation can be interposed, and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

  In addition, since the lottery (A) (D) for transition to CZ when the reels are stopped is performed when the combination of the displayed symbols is equal to or higher than the “bell winning”, the rare combination is used as an internal winning combination during the apocalypse operation. Even if it is not determined, the player can receive the transfer lottery (A) (D). Therefore, compared with the case where the game state transition lottery is performed based on the rare role, it is possible to give more opportunities for expectation and to improve the interest of the game.

  Also, the operation of the apocalypse ends when the guaranteed number of times becomes zero. As shown in FIG. 79 (C), this guaranteed number of times is subtracted when the pushing order bell is won. An opportunity to receive the transfer lottery (A) (D) will be given for the guaranteed number of times (the player can receive the transfer lottery (A) (D) by answering in the correct order in the opportunity) . As a result, according to the pachislot 1, it is possible to avoid a situation in which there is no opportunity to receive the transition lottery (A) or (D) during the apocalypse operation, and to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating. it can. Referring to FIG. 79C, the guaranteed number of times is also subtracted even when the internal winning combination is “out”. In this regard, in the case of “displacement”, the guaranteed number of times may be subtracted only in the case of the push order bell without subtracting the guaranteed number of times, and thereby the above-described effect becomes clearer.

<Effect of upgrading lottery of hidden balls>
Here, in the pachi-slot 1, even if the apocalypse is not in operation, the production balls that are set when the apocalypse is in operation are managed. Specifically, in the pachi-slot 1, a promotion lottery of the effect balls stored in the sub-RAM 103 (that is, the non-displayed effect balls) is performed in a situation where the apocalypse is not activated. By performing this promotion lottery in conjunction with the driving of the revolving character 200 that is the main character, the player wishes to be promoted to a more advantageous performance ball during the period when the main character appears, and plays the game. As a result, the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1, since the player controls the light emission of the rotating combination 200 based on the result of the promotion lottery, the player sees the expectation that the production ball has been promoted to a more advantageous production ball. Can be inferred from the colors. As a result, if it can be inferred that the game is advantageous, the player will have a strong interest in later games, and the player can continue playing without getting bored.

<Management of production balls at power-on>
Further, in the pachi-slot 1, the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 is rewritten to a new effect ball based on the time when the power is turned on. From the time when the power is turned on, for example, it is the time before business at the amusement store, and by comparing with the time when the power is turned off, it is understood that it is before the next business day. So, from the time when the power is turned on, for example, when it can be determined that the next day's business starts, the setting value can be changed from the production ball by newly setting a production ball different from the previous day. It can be prevented that the presence or absence is grasped, and the fairness among the players is not harmed. On the other hand, if it can be determined from the time when the power is turned on that the power is only temporarily turned off, the pachi-slot 1 maintains the replay ball without rewriting the game before and after the power is turned off. Maintain the status of the aircraft. From the player's point of view, if a ball that is advantageous to you is registered, even if the power is temporarily turned off, the ball will be maintained after the power is turned on again. You can play without feeling.

  Moreover, in the pachislot 1, when rewriting an effect ball, the effect ball to set newly is determined by lottery. As a method of making it difficult to grasp the presence or absence of a change in setting value, a method of rewriting a production ball to a production ball in a predetermined initial state when the power is turned on the next day can be considered, but in such a method, a plurality of gaming machines are used. If is installed, the variety of games will be diminished. Therefore, in the pachislot 1, a variety of games is ensured by determining a production ball to be newly set by lottery.

<Effects of CZ>
Pachislot 1 is equipped with a complete CZ as an ART chance zone. In this CZ, the transition lottery in the middle of the CZ performed at the time of pushing order bell is maintained, but even if the transition lottery is performed, if the stop operation is performed in the correct pushing order to the pushing order bell. The transfer lottery becomes invalid and CZ continues. In such a CZ, not only when the push order bell is won, but also when the CZ finishes, it is possible to receive a lottery for shifting to the ART. Therefore, even if the push order bell does not win at all during the CZ, the player Will be given a chance to move to ART, so it can improve the interest in CZ.

  In addition, in the pachislot 1, it is decided to give a more advantageous privilege (shift to advantageous ART) when the CZ finishes, so that the player will invalidate the transition lottery in the middle of CZ performed at the time of winning the push order bell. As a result, it becomes interested in the combination of symbols displayed as a result, and the interest in each game in CZ can be improved. In addition, from the viewpoint of the player, since it would be desirable to complete the CZ more advantageously, the interest in the CZ can be maintained until the end.

  Also, in the pachislot 1, an invalid point is given during CZ, and as long as this invalid point remains, the transition lottery in the middle of CZ is invalidated. Thereby, the opportunity to receive the transition lottery at the time of more advantageous CZ completion can be increased, and the interest in CZ can be improved.

  In addition, the pachislot 1 includes a plurality of CZ modes having different degrees of expectation for winning a transition lottery in the middle of CZ, and only upgrades the CZ mode according to the number of continuous games in the CZ. As a result, in Pachislot 1, since the degree of expectation of ART transition increases as CZ continues, the player has a strong interest in the combination of symbols displayed in CZ. Can be improved.

  Moreover, in the pachislot 1, when the invalid point remains, the effect which suggests or alert | reports the present CZ mode is performed. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain or guess how much it became advantageous as a result of CZ continuing, and can improve the interest in CZ. The effect of suggesting or notifying the current CZ mode may be performed regardless of invalid points. That is, the pachi-slot 1 may perform a predetermined effect by comparing the number of games to be shifted from CZ mode 0 to CA mode 1 defined in CZ_MAP with the number of CZ continuation games up to the present.

  In addition, when winning in the transition lottery in the middle of CZ performed at the time of the pushing order bell winning in CZ, the lottery result may be maintained regardless of the presence / absence of the correct answer in the pushing order. If the winning lottery in the middle of the CZ is maintained and the answer is correct in the push order, the CZ is continued while the ART rights are assigned in the number corresponding to the lottery result. On the other hand, if the winning lottery in the middle of CZ is maintained and the answer is incorrect, the CZ ends, but the ART right is granted based on the lottery result.

  By doing in this way, it becomes possible to expect to win a lottery for the transition to ART during CZ, and the dissatisfaction that makes you feel when you invalidate despite being originally won, There is no feeling to the player. Also, for the player, if the stop operation can be performed so that the CZ is not terminated when the transition lottery in the middle of the CZ is performed, the transition lottery in the middle of the CZ or the transition lottery at the completion of the CZ will be further received. Since an opportunity will be obtained, it will have a strong interest in the stop operation in CZ, and the interest of the game in CZ can be improved.

<Effects of BB mode in bonus state>
The pachislot 1 includes a plurality of BB modes with different degrees of expectation for winning the transition to ART during the bonus state, and the BB mode is upgraded based on the internal winning combination during the bonus state. In this way, since the probability of winning the lottery for shifting to ART is changed based on the internal winning combination in the bonus state, the player has a strong interest in the internal winning combination in each game in the bonus state. , You can enhance the interest during the bonus state.

  In particular, in the pachislot 1, the BB mode with a low expectation level for winning the lottery is upgraded with the BB mode with a lot of winning roles, while the BB mode with a high expectation level for winning the transfer lottery has a few types of winning combinations. Only BB mode can be upgraded. As a result, as the BB mode is upgraded, the number of winning combinations to be upgraded to a higher BB mode decreases. However, as the BB mode is upgraded, the degree of expectation for winning the transition lottery increases, so the gaming state gradually increases. You can create a game form that will be upgraded. From the player's point of view, they are not interested in a single game result in the bonus state, but are interested in a series of game results in the bonus state. Can do.

  The BB mode can be upgraded only one step at a time, or a plurality of steps can be upgraded at a time. When control is performed so that only one level can be upgraded, the level of expectation while staying in the BB mode with a low level of expectation for transition lottery is lower than when multiple levels can be upgraded at one time. Since it becomes easier to upgrade from the mode, it becomes easier to create a game form in which the gaming state is gradually upgraded.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, when a JAC2-type replay or JAC3-type replay is determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus state, it is handled as “Chan Lip” according to the type of the carryover combination carried over as the internal winning combination. There are cases where it is handled as a replay (see FIG. 96). Then, the BB mode is upgraded when handled as “Chan Lip”, and the BB mode is not upgraded when handled as “Replay”. Thereby, the game in a bonus state can be diversified and the interest in a bonus state can be improved.

<Starting control of the ART after the bonus ends>
Also, in the pachislot 1, if the combination related to JACIN is determined as an internal winning combination (carry over) during the bonus state, the state shifts to the high RT state (RT4 gaming state), and a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination related to JACIN is displayed. And transition to a low RT state (RT2 gaming state). Since the RT state is maintained even after the bonus state ends, if the bonus state ends in the low RT state, the low RT state also occurs in the bonus non-winning state.

  From the player's point of view, it is only necessary to perform a stop operation while avoiding the display of a combination of symbols corresponding to the role related to JACIN, but a player with little knowledge about the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment is not necessarily like this. It is not always possible to perform a stop operation, and the player may be disadvantaged. Here, in the case of a low RT state, control is also performed so that ART is being prepared without executing ART, and if the state being prepared continues, the player is likely to feel dissatisfaction and the interest is reduced. In addition to this, the time efficiency is reduced by the period during preparation. The disadvantages experienced by the player include, for example, a decrease in interest during preparation and a decrease in time efficiency.

  In this regard, in the pachislot 1, when the bonus state is ended while winning the ART, regardless of the type of the RT gaming state, the ART (more specifically, AT) is executed to reduce the disadvantage suffered by the player. To do. Specifically, Pachislot 1 has an enemy ART and a battle ART as the ART gaming state, and determines whether the ART gaming state is continued in the battle ART performed after the enemy determination ART. A game that increases the expected degree of continuation of the ART game state is performed, such as an increase in the HP of the character. Therefore, even if the ART is executed in the low RT state after the bonus state ends, the enemy determination ART, which is a chance section for increasing the continuation expectation level, can be executed first. Therefore, the decline (disadvantage) of interest can be reduced. In addition, since the preparation period is not provided in the first place, the time efficiency is not lowered, and the disadvantages experienced by the player can be reduced.

<Effects of enemy decision ART>
In the pachislot 1, a boss ball is set in the apocalypse during the enemy determination ART, and the enemy character to fight in the battle ART is determined according to the type of the boss ball set at the time of hitting the pushing order bell. During the battle ART, the HP character's decrease amount and the enemy character's HP decrease amount are changed in accordance with the type of enemy character. As a result, the result of the game during the enemy determination ART affects whether or not the ART gaming state is continued, so that the player's interest in continuing the ART gaming state can be maintained over a plurality of games. it can.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, since both the attack power and the defense power are set against the enemy character, both the HP reduction amount of the teammate character and the HP reduction amount of the enemy character are individually determined for each enemy character. Can be set. This makes it possible to employ various types of enemy characters such as enemy characters with high attack power and defense power, enemy characters with only one of them high, and enemy characters with low both. The games in the battle ART can be diversified according to the results of the games.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, the speed is also set for the enemy character, and the frequency with which the enemy character attacks during the battle ART is determined based on the speed set for the enemy character. Thereby, the game in battle ART can be further diversified according to the result of the game in enemy determination ART.

  In the pachislot 1, the HP of the teammate character is added during the enemy determination ART. In this way, when a lot of additions are made, it becomes easier to avoid that the HP of the teammate character becomes 0 during the battle ART, and the degree of expectation that the ART gaming state will continue increases. Become. As a result, not only the game during the battle ART but also the game during the enemy determination ART will affect the continuation of the ART gaming state, so that the player's interest in continuing the ART gaming state is played multiple times. Can last for a long time.

  In the pachislot 1, when the HP of the teammate character becomes less than the initial value during the enemy determination ART, the teammate character's HP is set to the initial value. As a result, the HP of the teammate character becomes at least the initial value or more in the subsequent battle ART, so that it is possible to prevent the teammate character's HP from becoming 0 immediately during the battle ART. As a result, the continued ART advantageous state is immediately achieved. It can be prevented from ending.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, the HP of the teammate character in the enemy determination ART is added according to the type of the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. As a result, for example, when a rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the amount of addition can be increased, so that there is no wasteful use of the rare combination and the interest during the enemy determination ART is improved. Can do.

  Also, in Pachislot 1, when a rare role is determined as an internal winning combination during an enemy decision ART, a teammate lottery will be performed, and if a stock lottery is won, the boss ball set in the apocalypse will be used as a teammate ball. rewrite. The enemy decision ART ends with a bell win in a game in which the boss ball is set in the apocalypse area 113A, so the boss ball can be rewritten as a friendly ball, so that the enemy determination ART can be expected to continue, Since an increase in the HP of the teammate character triggered by the teammate ball can also be expected, as a result, the continuation expectation level of the battle ART also increases. In this case, it is preferable to remove the boss balls 7 and 8 for which the continuation of the battle ART is confirmed from the boss balls to be rewritten so that the battle ART can be continued more easily.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, every time the effect ball to be set in the apocalypse is determined during the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP (lottery information) that defines the boss MAP data for determining the effect ball is updated. In the pachislot 1, this boss MAP has a ceiling function, and when the boss MAP on the ceiling is reached, the boss balls 7 and 8 for which the continuation of the battle ART is confirmed or the HP of the ally character is increased. Only the friendly ball is decided as the production ball to be set in the Apocalypse. From the player's point of view, if the enemy determination ART continues for a long time, only the boss balls 7, 8 or ally balls will be set in the apocalypse. As a result, the interest of the game during the enemy determination ART is improved.

<Effects of Battle ART>
In the pachi-slot 1, enemy balls and ally balls are set in the apocalypse during the battle ART, and the HP of the enemy character or ally character is reduced according to the type of effect ball set at the time of hitting the push order bell. Then, when the HP of the enemy character becomes 0 before the HP of the teammate character becomes 0, the ART is continued, and when the HP of the teammate character first becomes 0, the ART is terminated. Here, since the internal winning combination is determined according to the start operation of the player, the player will actively participate in the game during the battle ART, and the motivation for the game can be improved. .

  Further, the target for reducing the HP according to the push order bell differs depending on the performance ball set in the apocalypse. Here, since the apocalypse is set with stage balls up to multiple games ahead, the player can play the game after grasping the set stage balls, which is advantageous to the player side. You will want to win the order bell. As a result, the production ball and the player's starting operation can be strongly linked, and the player can play a game with a sense of tension, so that the interest during the battle ART can be improved.

  In addition, since the push order that decreases HP is the winning combination to be notified during the battle ART, the fact that the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination affects the profit given during the battle ART. It will be. For example, depending on the gaming machine, the winning combination that decreases the HP of the teammate character can be replayed, and the winning combination that decreases the HP of the enemy character can be set as the push order bell. However, in such a gaming machine, the presence or absence of a winning combination that affects profits is directly linked to the continuation of ART, and the game becomes monotonous. In this regard, as in Pachislot 1, the push order bell that affects profits is made advantageous / disadvantaged according to the set performance balls, thereby diversifying the gameplay during the battle ART. Can enhance the interest during the battle ART.

  In the pachislot 1, when a so-called rare role is won, the HP of the enemy character is reduced regardless of the set effect ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rare role from being wasted, and the player expects that the rare role will be determined as an internal winning role during the battle ART, and enhances the interest during the battle ART. Can do.

  Moreover, in the pachislot 1, when four enemy balls are set continuously during the battle ART, the teammate ball is always set next. Thereby, since it is possible to prevent a disadvantageous situation for the player from continuing for a long period of time, the player can play the game during the battle ART with peace of mind.

<Sound when ART is continued>
Further, in the pachislot 1, when the continuation of the ART is confirmed, the pachislot 1 notifies the player that the ART is continued by outputting a dedicated sound. At this time, since the player may not be able to grasp the change only by changing the song in the ART, the pachislot 1 outputs a sound effect (siren) that is output only when the ART is continued before the change of the song. . Thereby, in the pachislot 1, it is easy for the player to recognize that the ART continues.

<Control of articles during ART>
In the pachislot 1, during the ART, the rotating combination 200 is driven in various modes, thereby performing a specific effect during the ART and exciting the game during the ART. In this case, when the player leaves the seat during the ART, the pachislot machine 1 stops driving the rotating combination 200 and returns the movable part of the rotating combination 200 to the initial position (for example, closes the cover member 198). ). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the rotating combination 200 from being unnecessarily consumed while exciting the game during the ART using the rotating combination 200, and as a result, it is possible to extend the life of the gaming machine.

<Switching production>
In the pachislot 1, the effects in the pachislot 1 are classified and set as a layer switching type effect and an effect switching type effect, the progress of the game such as a stop operation, and the operation of a predetermined operation button (for example, a chance button) The production is switched at the opportunity. The layer switching type effect is suitable for suppressing the flickering of the image, and by setting an effect that causes the player to feel uncomfortable before and after the switching as a layer switching type effect, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, since the effect switching type effect requires less processing load, it is possible to prevent the processing from being lost in accordance with the effect switching.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, the player is prompted to perform an operation that is not related to the progress of the game, such as a chance button, and the effect of switching is changed depending on whether or not the urged predetermined operation is performed. This diversifies gameplay and improves the fun of the game. Even in this case, by setting a preferable switching method for each production, the production can be appropriately switched according to the progress of the game.

<Panel control when calling non-production images>
In the pachi-slot 1, a so-called illumination array (panel device 400) is provided on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 11, and an effect with a high effect can be performed by linking the display of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the display of the panel device 400. At this time, when a non-effect image such as a menu screen or an error screen is called in the liquid crystal display device 11 during the effect display on the panel device 400, the effect display on the panel device 400 is covered with the non-effect image, and the non-effect image is visually recognized. The performance is significantly reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1, when the non-effect image is called during the effect on the panel device 400, the final output of the LED 403 that causes the panel device 400 to emit light is suppressed, thereby producing the effect on the panel device 400 in the non-effect image. This prevents the display from being covered. In this way, since only the final output of the LED 403 is suppressed and processing such as error processing is not added to the performance data execution processing itself, the processing at the time of calling the non-effect image can be simplified, and the bug Occurrence can be reduced.

  Further, since only the final output of the LED 403 is suppressed and the light emission animation of the LED 403 is continued internally, when the display of the non-effect image is finished, the effect on the panel device 400 is resumed from the middle. . Even in this case, since the suspension or resumption process of the effect in the panel device 400 is not added, the process can be simplified and the occurrence of bugs can be reduced.

<Processing at sequence error>
The sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot 1 checks whether the order of commands transmitted from the main control circuit 91 is normal, and performs a predetermined sequence error process when the command order is abnormal. When managing a part of the gaming state on the side of the sub-control circuit 101, it is necessary to appropriately acquire various information according to the progress of the game on the side of the sub-control circuit 101, and when some information cannot be acquired , The player may get an unfair advantage.

  Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1, when a sequence error occurs, the player is forced to end a state that is advantageous to the player, thereby preventing the player from gaining an unfair advantage. Specifically, when the sub-control circuit 101 cannot recognize that the bell spilled eyes are displayed in CZ, the player unfairly obtains the benefit of continuing CZ. Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1, when a sequence error occurs during CZ, CZ is forcibly terminated to prevent the player from gaining an undue profit due to fraud.

  Also, in the pachislot 1, if the sub-control circuit 101 cannot grasp that the bell spilled eyes or the RT1 transition lip is displayed during the high probability gaming state, the player unfairly benefits from continuing the high probability gaming state. Get. Therefore, in the pachislot 1, when a sequence error occurs during the high probability gaming state, the high probability gaming state is forcibly terminated to prevent the player from gaining an unfair advantage due to fraud.

[Second Embodiment]
The pachislot 1 according to the first embodiment has been described above. Next, the pachislo 1 according to the second embodiment will be described. In the pachi-slot 1 of the second embodiment, control when shifting to the bonus state during the enemy determination ART will be described. Specifically, the management of effect balls used in the enemy determination ART after the bonus state transferred during the enemy determination ART ends will be described.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the second embodiment, when the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 is rewritten to a new effect ball. Here, the effect balls to be rewritten may be all of the six performance balls stored in the sub RAM 103 or may be a part thereof. In addition, when rewriting only some effect balls, it is good also as giving the priority with respect to the boss balls 1-8 and a friend ball, and determining the effect ball of the object rewritten according to a priority. Further, the number of production balls to be rewritten may be determined by lottery. In other words, when the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, a predetermined lottery may be performed to determine how many rendition balls out of the six rendition balls are rewritten.

  Further, since the boss balls 7 and 8 and the friendly balls are production balls advantageous to the player, these production balls may be maintained without being rewritten. When the boss balls 7 and 8 and the teammate balls are non-displayed production balls (that is, production balls stored in the storage area “6” of the sub RAM 103), the player can grasp the spheres. Since the player does not feel dissatisfied even if rewritten, the non-displayed boss balls 7 and 8 and allied balls may be rewritten as new production balls.

  A new effect ball can be determined based on the boss MAP data specified by the boss MAP by lottering the boss MAP (see FIGS. 105 to 108). Here, as described above, the boss MAP is provided with a ceiling function, and when the boss MAP “52” or “53” is updated, only the boss balls 7 and 8 and the ally balls are determined as effect balls. Will be. In the pachi-slot 1 of the second embodiment, when the combination related to the bonus is determined as an internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP for determining a new performance ball is updated to an advantageous boss MAP. Also good.

  That is, in the pachi-slot 1 of the second embodiment, when the combination related to the bonus is determined as an internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART is updated so as to approach the ceiling. It is good as well. Specifically, a mode in which a specific value is added to the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART in the boss MAP that reaches the ceiling when updated to a predetermined value can be considered. For example, when the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART is the boss MAP “30”, if the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, “10” is added to the boss MAP, A new performance ball may be determined based on MAP “40”.

  As another specific example, instead of adding to the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART, when the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, it is updated to a specific boss MAP. It is good to do. For example, if a bonus-related role is determined as an internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, regardless of the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP “40” is uniformly set and a new production ball is set. May be determined. Of course, when the specific boss MAP is not uniform, for example, when the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART is in the first range (for example, boss MAP “0” to “10”), When a specific boss MAP (for example, boss MAP “20”) is set and the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART is in the second range (for example, boss MAP “11” to “20”), A second specific boss MAP (for example, boss MAP “30”) may be used.

As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when a transition is made to the bonus state during the enemy determination ART, the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 is rewritten to a new effect ball. That is, in the second embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes profit state rewriting means, and when the combination related to the bonus (BB) is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, it is stored in the sub-RAM 103. Rewrite all or some of the six performance balls.
Since the ease of continuation of the ART gaming state is managed based on the production ball, the enemy determination ART after the bonus ends proceeds based on the new production ball, thereby controlling the period of the ART gaming state. It can be rich. In this case, by maintaining the rendition balls advantageous to the player, such as the boss balls 7 and 8 and the teammate balls, without rewriting, the player can perform the subsequent game with expectation. Interest is improved.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, the pachislo 1 according to the third embodiment will be described. In the pachi-slot 1 of the third embodiment, a method for determining the production ball during the battle ART will be described. Here, in the pachi-slot 1 of the first embodiment, an effect ball (a friendly ball or enemy ball) is determined according to the type of enemy character of the opponent in the battle ART (see FIGS. 113 to 115). In this regard, in the pachi-slot 1 of the third embodiment, the effect ball is determined in consideration of the remaining HP of the teammate character.

  FIG. 156 is a battle MAP lottery table that is referenced when the enemy character of the opponent is boss 1 and the remaining HP of the ally character is 20 or less, and FIG. 157 is the enemy character of the opponent is boss 5. There is a battle MAP lottery table that is referred to when the remaining HP of the teammate character is 10 or less.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the third embodiment, when the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 1 and the remaining HP of the teammate character is 21 or more, the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. When the remaining HP is 20 or less, the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 156 is referred to. Similarly, when the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 5 and the remaining HP of the teammate character is 11 or more, the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 115 is referred to, and the remaining HP of the teammate character is 10 or less. In some cases, the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 157 is referred to. Note that the battle MAP lottery table when other bosses are enemy characters of the opponent is omitted.

  Comparing FIG. 113 and FIG. 156, it can be seen that even if the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 1, the probability that the battle MAP of the transfer destination is lottered differs according to the remaining HP of the teammate character. . More specifically, the battle MAP lottery table referred to when the remaining HP of the teammate character is small, as shown in FIG. 156, compared to the battle MAP lottery table referred to when the remaining HP of the teammate character is large, as shown in FIG. Has a high probability that “6”, “7”, “13”, “14”, “20”, “21”, “27”, and “28” are determined as the battle MAP of the transfer destination.

  As described above, the battle MAPs “6”, “7”, “13”, “14”, “20”, “21”, “27”, and “28” are battle MAPs in which a friendly ball or awakening ball is always lottered as a production ball. Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1 of the third embodiment, the attack frequency of the teammate character increases as the remaining HP of the teammate character decreases. 115 and 157 are compared, even when the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 5, the attack frequency of the teammate character increases as the remaining HP of the teammate character decreases.

  On the other hand, when FIG. 156 is compared with FIG. 157, the rate of increase in the attack frequency of the teammate character and the remaining HP of the teammate character that triggers an increase in the attack frequency of the teammate character differ depending on the type of enemy character of the opponent.

  For example, referring to the transfer source battle MAP “1” in which the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 1, the battle MAP in which the teammate ball or the awakening ball is always lottered is approximately 60% to 60% depending on the remaining HP of the teammate character. It has risen to about 80%. On the other hand, referring to the transfer source battle MAP “1” in which the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 5, the battle MAP in which the teammate ball or the awakening ball is always lottered is approximately 22% to about 22% depending on the remaining HP of the teammate character. It has risen to about 48%. Therefore, it can be seen that the rate of increase of the attack frequency of the teammate character differs depending on the type of enemy character of the opponent.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 156, when the enemy character of the opponent is boss 1, the battle MAP lottery table is changed when the remaining HP of the teammate character is 20 or less, and as shown in FIG. When the opponent enemy character is the boss 5, the battle MAP lottery table is changed when the remaining HP of the teammate character is 10 or less. Therefore, it can be seen that the remaining HP of the teammate character that triggers an increase in the attack frequency of the teammate character differs depending on the type of enemy character of the opponent. That is, in the third embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes probability changing means, and the HP of the teammate character is less than the change threshold (for example, HP “20” or less when the opponent enemy character is the boss 1; If the boss 5 is HP “10” or less), the MAP lottery is changed, and the frequency at which the teammate character attacks is changed.

  In this way, in the pachislot 1 of the third embodiment, the attack frequency of the teammate character can be increased as the remaining HP of the teammate character decreases, so that an effect such as reversal from the pinch is possible, and the game during the battle ART can be performed. It can be made to sweat. As a result, it is possible to diversify the gameability of whether or not the ART gaming state continues, and the interest of the gaming in the ART gaming state is improved.

  Further, a game for determining whether or not the ART gaming state is continued by changing the rate of increase of the attack frequency of the teammate character and the remaining HP of the teammate character that triggers an increase in the attack frequency of the teammate character depending on the type of the enemy character. It is possible to further diversify the nature of the game and improve the interest of the game in the ART gaming state.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the number of times of increasing the attack frequency of the teammate character is only once, in other words, the remaining HP of the teammate character that triggers the attack frequency of the teammate character to be increased for each enemy character. Although only one is set, the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, when the teammate character's HP falls below the first value, the attack frequency of the teammate character increases by one step, and when the teammate character's HP falls below a second value that is less than the first value, the teammate character's attack frequency drops. For example, the attack frequency of the teammate character may be increased a plurality of times, such as by another level.

  In this case, the number of times of increasing the attack frequency of the teammate character may be varied depending on the type of enemy character. By doing so, for example, as the HP of the ally character decreases, the enemy character that gradually increases the attack frequency of the ally character, or the enemy whose attack frequency of the ally character rapidly increases when the HP of the ally character becomes small Characters can be created, and as a result, the gameability of whether or not the ART gaming state continues can be further diversified, and the interest of the gaming in the ART gaming state is improved.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the pachislo 1 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachi-slot 1 of the fourth embodiment, an effect control method at the end of the bonus state will be described. In the pachi-slot 1 of the fourth embodiment, a bonus end effect is set at the start of a game where the bonus state may end, and the bonus ends when the bonus state actually ends as a result of the game While the effect for time is executed, if the bonus state does not end, the effect at the end of the bonus is rewritten to the effect for continuing the bonus, and the effect for continuing the bonus is executed.

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the flow of the BB ART lottery process executed by the pachislot 1 of the fourth embodiment, instead of the BB ART lottery process (see FIG. 145) executed by the pachislot 1 of the first embodiment. . 158 ART lottery processing shown in FIG. 158 is performed when a start command is received during the bonus state (see S431 in FIG. 139).

  When comparing the BB ART lottery process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 145 and the BB ART lottery process of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 158, the steps 601 to S604 of the BB ART lottery process of the fourth embodiment are compared. Since the processing is the same as the processing of S501 to S504 of the ART lottery processing of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 158, following the process of S604, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is “9” or less (S605). If the value of the bonus end number counter is equal to or smaller than “9” (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently registers a bonus end effect and ends the BB ART lottery process. Conversely, if the value of the bonus end number counter is not equal to or less than “9” (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART lottery process during BB. The bonus end effect is an effect performed at the end of the current game. For example, a screen for notifying the number of medals paid out during the bonus state and the result of the ART lottery performed during the bonus state. It is an effect to be displayed.

  Here, in pachislot 1, since the maximum payout number per game in the bonus state is 10, the bonus state may end when the value of the bonus end number counter is “9” or less. is there. The processes of S604 and S605 are processes for registering an effect at the end of the bonus at the start of a game that may end the bonus state. Note that the bonus end number counter may be managed independently on the sub side, or information managed on the main side (see FIG. 124) may be acquired via various commands.

  Next, FIG. 159 shows the flow of the winning operation command reception process executed by the pachislot 1 of the fourth embodiment instead of the winning operation command reception process (see FIG. 149) executed by the pachislot 1 of the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows. The process upon receiving a winning action command shown in FIG. 159 is performed when the command received from the main side is a winning action command (see S408 in FIG. 138).

  When the winning action command reception process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 149 and the winning action command reception process of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 159 are compared, S611 of the winning action command reception process of the fourth embodiment is shown. The processing of S618 is the same as the processing of S541 to S548 of the winning operation command reception processing of the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 159, following the processing of S618, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not BB is in progress (S619). If it is during BB (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently executes a during-BB effect control process to be described later in S160 (S620), and ends the winning action command reception process. On the other hand, when the BB is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process upon receiving a winning action command.

  Next, FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the flow of the effect control process during BB executed by the pachi-slot 1 of the fourth embodiment. 160. The effect control process during BB shown in FIG. 160 is performed when a winning action command is received during the bonus state (see S620 in FIG. 159).

  As shown in FIG. 160, first, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a bonus end effect is registered (S631). If the bonus end effect is not registered (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB effect control process.

  On the other hand, when the bonus end effect is registered, the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (S632). If the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (YES), then the sub CPU 102 executes the registered effect (effect at the end of bonus) (S634), and the effect control process during BB Exit.

  On the other hand, if the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” (NO), the sub CPU 102 rewrites the registered bonus end effect as a bonus continuation effect (S633), and then rewrites the bonus. The continuous effect is executed (S634), and the effect control process during BB is ended.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, at the start of a game in which the bonus state may end, an effect for the end of the bonus is set once, while based on the result of the game, Change the performance to be executed at the end of the game. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the effect at the end from being executed even if the bonus state has not ended, and as a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the end of the bonus state. That is, in the fourth embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes an effect control means, sets an effect for the end of the bonus at the start of a game that may end the bonus state, and plays the game result (bonus end) Based on the value of the number counter, it is controlled whether to execute the bonus end effect set at the start of the game or to rewrite the bonus continuous effect and execute the bonus continuous effect.

  Even if the number of medals to be paid out during the bonus state is diversified, it is possible to appropriately notify the end of the bonus state, which is preferable. That is, depending on the gaming machine, the number of medals to be paid out during the bonus state may be fixed. In such a gaming machine, the timing at which the bonus state is ended is also fixed, so that the game at the end of the bonus state becomes monotonous although an effect at the end is not executed by mistake.

  In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, the number of medals paid out during the bonus state differs depending on the game result, so that the bonus game is prevented from becoming monotonous while preventing the game from becoming monotonous. The end time of the state can be notified appropriately.

[Modification]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  In the pachislot of the above embodiment, when the production ball is set in the apocalypse, it is set on the condition that the internal winning combination is “Bell winning” or more, or the combination of the displayed symbols is “Bell winning” or more. A lottery or the like based on the production ball is performed. In this regard, when a production ball is set in the apocalypse, lottery or the like based on the production ball may be performed regardless of the combination of the internal winning combination or the displayed symbols. In such a pachislot, the game balance can be adjusted by adjusting the frequency of setting a blank (empty) in the apocalypse.

  In the pachislot of the above embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 manages the transition control to the advantageous state (for example, “ART state”), manages the duration of the advantageous state, and the notification (navigation) performed during the advantageous state. Although the management is performed, one or all of these controls may be performed in the main control circuit 91.

  Note that the transition control to the advantageous state includes, for example, control (transition lottery) related to the transition to the advantageous state / non-transition. Further, for example, in the case of the pachislot machine 1 in which a plurality of states having different winning probabilities are provided in the lottery for shifting to the advantageous state, control related to the transition between the states can be included in the control for shifting to the advantageous state.

  In addition, in the case of the above embodiment, the management of the continuation period of the advantageous state is control related to increase / decrease in the HP of the enemy character and the friend character, and in the case of other pachislots, for example, the initial game number of the advantageous state The determination and the addition control of the number of AT games can be mentioned. Further, for example, in the case of the pachislot machine 1 in which the advantageous state continues with a predetermined probability, the lottery of whether or not to continue can also be included in the management of the continuous period of the advantageous state.

  The duration of the advantageous state depends on the specifications of the gaming machine, the number of unit games during the advantageous state, the number of times that information advantageous to the player is notified during the advantageous state, and the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state An arbitrary period such as the number of sets when a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) is set as one set can be included.

  At this time, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may be a net increase obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out in the same game. In addition, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may be calculated based on medals actually increased during the advantageous state (calculation based on actual values). It may be calculated based on the number of medals scheduled to increase when the navigation is followed (calculation based on an ideal value). Also, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may not be increased depending on the type of the internal winning combination. For example, with respect to some roles that have a low probability of being determined as an internal winning combination, or for a combination that switches between display / non-display of the combination of symbols depending on the timing of the stop operation, the corresponding combination is determined as an internal winning combination However, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may not be increased or decreased.

  Further, the management of the notification (navigation) performed during the advantageous state includes control for notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous for the player using the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like.

  In addition, as a mode of the stop operation to notify the player, a stop operation order (push order) in which a symbol combination advantageous to the player is displayed may be displayed, and the symbol combination is displayed. This may be the timing of the stop operation necessary for the purpose (design to be aimed at).

  In addition, as an advantageous state, the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the replay is not changed (or changed within a range not affecting the game playability), and the mode of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is set. It is also possible to use a so-called “AT” to notify, and to operate a replay high probability state (replay time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to replay is increased, and a stop operation that is advantageous to the player It is good also as using what is called "ART" which alert | reports the aspect of.

  Further, in the pachislot of the embodiment or the various modified examples, an effect determined with a predetermined probability according to the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 91, that is, one or a plurality of effects for one internal winning combination Is going to do. In this regard, display (notification) uniquely corresponding to the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 91 may be performed together with the effect. Specifically, the display corresponding to the determined internal winning combination may be performed on the above-described 7-segment display 28 or a display unit (not shown) for displaying the internal winning combination. The display of the internal winning combination is preferably performed under the control of the main control circuit 91. In this way, the main control circuit 91 itself notifies the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 91, so that a gaming machine that ensures fairness can be provided.

[Appendix 1]
The pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 1 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. Yes. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). According to the gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation. We want to increase the number of navigation games).

  Further, in recent years, a high probability replay state (RT) in which a probability that a replay (replay) that can be played without inserting medals is determined as an internal winning combination is increased with a predetermined condition as a trigger. A gaming machine that operates is also known. For example, a patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-204875) discloses a gaming machine that activates a high-probability re-gaming state when the bonus state ends.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to the gaming machine of the patent document, since the high probability re-playing state is activated after the bonus ends, the game can be performed without reducing medals after the bonus ends, but the high probability re-playing state is always generated after the bonus ends. There is a risk that the game during the bonus will become monotonous. Therefore, there is a demand for a mechanism that does not monotonize the game in the bonus in the gaming machine that operates the high-probability re-gaming state after the bonus ends.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game in a special gaming state.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels). , The display window 4), start operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a start operation by the player, and rotation of the reel based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. The symbol changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) that changes the symbol by making the normal state, and the special game state (for example, bonus) that is advantageous to the player compared to the normal state And an internal lottery table provided corresponding to a plurality of gaming states, and switching means for switching the gaming state triggered by a predetermined condition (for example, main control) And internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting unit and the internal lottery table corresponding to the current gaming state. (For example, the main control circuit 91), stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning combination Based on the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel A reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the symbol, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the symbol display means Winning determination means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won based on the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line When the internal lottery table provided corresponding to the special gaming state is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, a prize is determined by the winning determination means during the special gaming state. Any of a plurality of carryover combinations (for example, F_JACIN1 to 3) that can be carried over as an internal winning combination until it is determined that the internal winning combination is determined to be determined as an internal winning combination, and in the special gaming state, When the first carryover combination (for example, F_JACIN1) is carried over as an internal winning combination, the internal winning combination determining means determines the predetermined combination (for example, F_J1). When the upper 7 lip to F_J1 cross 7 lip) is determined as an internal winning combination, a privilege (for example, winning the ART transition lottery) is granted, and a second carryover combination different from the first carryover combination (for example, F_JACIN2) Is further provided with a privilege granting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that does not grant the privilege when the predetermined role is determined as an internal winning combination.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention can carry over any of a plurality of carryover combinations as an internal winning combination during the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to the present invention, when a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, gives a privilege if the first carryover is carried over, and does not give a privilege if the second carryover is carried over . As a result, even when a predetermined combination is won internally, whether or not a privilege is granted according to the type of the carryover combination can be varied, so that the game in the special game state can be diversified. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the special game state.

[Appendix 2]
The pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 2 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. Yes. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is notified of information advantageous to the player. ) Is generally performed to achieve an advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  By the way, in a gaming machine having an ART function, even if the transition to the advantageous state is not determined, the player may perform a high-probability re-gaming state operation by a stop operation. In this regard, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-233721), if the transition to the advantageous state is not determined, the information advantageous to the player is not notified during the high-probability re-gaming state. It describes that control is performed to fall from the probabilistic replay state to the normal state.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Here, when the transition to the advantageous state has not been determined, the control to fall from the high probability replaying state to the normal state is used as a so-called penalty, and by chance, the high probability replaying state by the player's stop operation In general, the lottery for shifting to the advantageous state is not performed.

  However, even if the gaming state is a high-probability re-gaming state, if the lottery for the transition to the advantageous state is not performed, the high-probability re-gaming state in which the privilege is not given (for example, RT in which ART is not won (Intermediate) is not interesting.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a problem, and it aims at providing the gaming machine which improves the interest of the game in which the privilege is not provided.

[Means for solving problems]

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has a low probability that a replay related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination (for example, an RT0 gaming state or an RT1 gaming state) and a probability that the replay is determined as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine having a high RT state (for example, RT4 gaming state) higher than the normal state, and a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, A symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the displayed plurality of symbols, a start operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a start operation by the player, Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the symbol change means for changing the symbol by rotating the reel (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping). And the first symbol combination (for example, RT4 transition lip) or the second symbol according to the order of the stop operation when determined as the internal winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means A first combination of combinations (for example, RT1 transition lip) that can be displayed in a stop state (for example, a combination of replies in the order of push) and a third symbol combination (for example, depending on the order of the stop operation when determined as an internal winning combination) , Bell spilled eyes) or a fourth combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols displayed in the correct pressing order) and a second pressing combination (for example, a pressing sequence bell) that can be stopped and displayed. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from the above, and a stop that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel Operation detection Based on the stage (for example, the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Based on the fact that the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, In accordance with the first push order by the determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining a combination of symbols stopped on the effective line provided in the symbol display means, and the determination means during the normal state. When it is determined that the first symbol combination of the first symbol combination and the second symbol combination is stopped, the game is changed from the normal state to the high RT state. RT starting means (for example, main control circuit 91) for shifting the state, and the third symbol combination and the fourth symbol combination according to the second push order by the determination means during the high RT state When it is determined that the third symbol combination is stopped, the gaming state is shifted from the high RT state to the normal state, and when it is determined that the fourth symbol combination is stopped, When an RT end means for maintaining the RT state (for example, the main control circuit 91) and a predetermined lottery (for example, a lottery for shifting to the ART) performed during the normal state or the high RT state, a game-related effect state is achieved. And a specific performance state transition means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for transitioning to a specific performance state (for example, the ART gaming state) for notifying information of an advantageous stop operation, and the predetermined lottery in a non-winning state. When the RT starting means shifts the gaming state to the high RT state, information on the stop operation necessary for stopping the fourth symbol combination (when the second pushing forward combination is determined as the internal winning combination) ( For example, the number-of-notifications determining means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for determining the number of notifications (for example, the number of guarantees) for notifying the push order bell of the correct answer) and the specific effect state transition means are the specific effect state. When the first push combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal state, information on a stop operation necessary for stopping the first symbol combination is notified, and Information on advantageous stop operation during the RT state, and when the second pushing order is determined as an internal winning combination during the high RT state in which the predetermined lottery is not won, the notification number determination means Decided Informing means for informing information advantageous stop operation only serial notice frequency (e.g., sub-control circuit 101, a liquid crystal display device 11) and, characterized in that it comprises a.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state where the probability that a replay related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is low and a high RT state where the probability that a replay is determined as an internal winning combination is high, and a high RT state By notifying information on a stop operation that is advantageous in the specific effect state, a game state (so-called ART) that is advantageous to the player can be realized. Here, since the transition to the specific effect state is performed not only by a predetermined lottery performed during the normal state but also by winning a predetermined lottery performed during the high RT state, the predetermined lottery is won. Even if it is a case where it transfers to a high RT state in the state which does not exist, after that, the shift to a specific production state can be expected. As a result, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, a high RT state that has not won a predetermined lottery can be set as a transition chance section to an advantageous gaming state (so-called ART), and a privilege is given. It is possible to enhance the interest during the high RT state where there is no (does not win a predetermined lottery).

  In addition, since the predetermined lottery is performed during the high RT state, the strategy for the stop operation during the normal state is increased, and the interest during the normal state can be enhanced. In other words, in the gameability in which a penalty is imposed during a high RT state where no privilege is given as in the conventional gaming machine, the stop operation in the normal state is simple (for example, the first stop operation is performed so as not to receive a penalty). It must be done on the left reel). In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a predetermined lottery is performed without imposing a penalty during the high RT state, so that the player can freely perform a stop operation during the normal state, Not only playability but also operability can be improved.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the third symbol combination corresponding to the second push order is stopped during the high RT state, the high RT state is ended and the gaming state is shifted to the normal state. When shifting to the high RT state without winning the lottery, information on advantageous stopping operation (for example, necessary to stop the fourth symbol combination when the second push forward is determined as the internal winning combination) Information on a proper stop operation) is notified a predetermined number of times. As a result, when the player accidentally shifts to the high RT state by accident, the player does not immediately shift from the high RT state to the normal state, and receives a predetermined lottery with a high replay winning probability. be able to.

[Appendix 3]
The pachi-slot 1 of Appendix 3 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. Yes. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is notified of information advantageous to the player. ) Is generally performed to achieve an advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  By the way, in a gaming machine having an ART function, a chance zone having a high expectation level of transition to the ART state is provided, and control is performed with a high probability when the specific condition is satisfied in the chance zone. . For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-048945), when a specific symbol combination (RT operation symbol 1) is targeted in the chance zone (CZ) and a specific symbol combination is displayed, the replay is internally performed. A gaming machine that performs control to shift to high RT with a high probability as a winning combination is disclosed.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In such a gaming machine of the patent document, the player's interest in the chance zone is concentrated on whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed. By the way, whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed depends on the result of the internal lottery, so depending on the player, there is a chance that a specific symbol combination may be displayed in the chance zone. May never be obtained, or the chances of such a possibility are significantly reduced. In such a case, for the player, although the player has moved to the chance zone, no chance is obtained, and the interest of the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period that is an opportunity to shift to an advantageous state advantageous to a player. For the purpose.

[Means for solving problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting the starting operation by the player, and the reel by rotating the reel based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. Is determined as an internal winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the symbol change means (eg, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) and the start operation detection means. The first symbol combination (for example, the combination of symbols displayed at the correct pressing order) or the second symbol combination (for example, the bell spilled eyes) according to the order of the stop operation. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a combination (for example, push order bell) with a predetermined probability, and provided corresponding to the plurality of reels Stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and a stop operation by the stop operation detecting means The reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 9) stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which is detected. ), And when the variation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the internal winning combination determining means is determined based on the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line provided in the symbol display means. A winning determination means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination has won, and an advantageous state lottery for performing a transition lottery on whether or not to shift to the advantageous state in response to a predetermined condition A lottery state starting means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for starting a state (for example, CZ), and when the pushing winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous state lottery state, A first transfer lottery (for example, a transfer lottery to ART performed in the middle of CZ) for determining to shift to the advantageous state is performed, and a predetermined number of single lotteries are performed in the advantageous state lottery state. Advantageous state lottery means (for example, a lottery for the transition to ART performed when the CZ is completed) (for example, a lottery for transitioning to ART when determining the transition to the advantageous state with a specific probability when a rank game (for example, 30 games) elapses (for example, 30 games) When the first symbol combination is displayed on the active line in the sub-control circuit 101) and the unit game in which the first transition lottery is performed, the first transition is performed regardless of the lottery result of transition to the advantageous state. When the lottery is invalidated and the second symbol combination is displayed on the active line in the unit game, lottery result management means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for maintaining the lottery result of the first transition lottery In the advantageous state lottery state, when the first transition lottery is performed and the lottery result of the first transition lottery is maintained by the lottery result management unit, or the predetermined number When the rank game has elapsed, it is decided to shift to the advantageous state by lottery state ending means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for ending the advantageous state lottery state and the first transition lottery or the second transition lottery. Then, an advantageous state transition means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for shifting the state in which a game is performed to the advantageous state, and the advantageous state transition means shifts to the advantageous state by the second transition lottery. When it is determined, the first transition lottery makes a transition to an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state of a more advantageous ART state) more advantageous than the case where it is determined to shift to the advantageous state. And

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, in an advantageous state lottery state (chance zone) in which a lottery for transitioning to an advantageous state advantageous to a player is performed, the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. Perform transition lottery. The advantageous state lottery state is terminated when the first transfer lottery is performed and the lottery result of the first transfer lottery is maintained or when a predetermined number of unit games have elapsed. As described above, in the gaming machine that performs the lottery to the advantageous state based on the internal winning combination, the player may not be able to receive the first transition lottery during the advantageous state lottery state. In the gaming machine, the second transition lottery is performed when a predetermined number of unit games elapses in the advantageous state lottery state. Accordingly, even if the push forward combination is not determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state lottery state, it is possible to receive the lottery to shift to the advantageous state, so that the interest in the advantageous state lottery state can be improved. .

  In addition, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first lottery is performed when the pushing order is determined as the internal winning combination, but when the first symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation, the first transition lottery is performed. In contrast, when the second symbol combination is displayed, the result of the first transition lottery is maintained. According to such control, the player is also interested in the symbol combination displayed in the game in which the pushing order is determined as the internal winning combination, and therefore the interest in each game in the advantageous state lottery state. Can be improved. In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the advantageous state that is transferred through the second transition lottery is the advantageous state that is advantageous over the advantageous state that is transferred through the first transition lottery. It is desired that a predetermined number of unit games elapse without displaying the combination (the first transition lottery is maintained and the advantageous state lottery state is ended), and the interest in the advantageous state lottery state can be maintained to the end. it can.

[Appendix 4]
The pachislot 1 of appendix 4 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. Yes. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is notified of information advantageous to the player. ) Is generally performed to achieve an advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  In addition, many ideas have been made to diversify the opportunity to shift to the advantageous state (ART). For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-126369), a special combination (7 in BB) is included in the bonus. There is disclosed a gaming machine that shifts to an advantageous state after completion of the bonus when the winning is internal.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems that Ming tries to solve]
However, in the gaming machine disclosed in the patent literature, since the lottery to the advantageous state is performed based on the internal lottery result once during the predetermined period (during the bonus), the game is likely to be monotonous, and the expectation regarding the transition to the advantageous state There was a problem that it was difficult to hold. In addition, since it is common for the specific role that triggers the transition to the advantageous state to have a low probability of winning, it cannot be expected to win during the predetermined period, and the opportunity to transition to the advantageous state There is also a risk that the entertainment of the game for a certain period will be impaired.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period that is an opportunity to shift to an advantageous state advantageous to a player. For the purpose.

[Means for solving problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting the starting operation by the player, and the reel by rotating the reel based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) and the symbol change means for changing Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) that determines an internal winning combination with probability, and a stop operation detecting means that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel. (For example, the main control circuit 91), the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. A reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on the combination of symbols stopped on the active line provided in the means, it is determined whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize. An advantageous state lottery state (for example, a bonus) that performs a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state in response to a winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and a predetermined condition (for example, operation of BB) The game state control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) which starts the state of the advantageous state and ends the state of the advantageous state lottery state in response to a specific condition in the advantageous state lottery state (for example, 59 medals are paid out). ), And when the gaming state control means finishes the advantageous state lottery state, the advantageous state lottery means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state, and the advantageous state lottery means Advantageous state starting means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) that shifts the state of playing the game to the advantageous state when the lottery is won, wherein the advantageous state lottery state is The first lottery state (for example, BB mode 0) having the lowest probability of winning the transition lottery by the advantageous state lottery means, and the second lottery state (for example, BB mode 1) having the probability higher than that of the first lottery state. And a plurality of lottery states (for example, BB mode) including a third lottery state (for example, BB mode 2) having a higher probability than the first lottery state and the second lottery state, In the state lottery state, the lottery state transition means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for transitioning a plurality of lottery states based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means is further provided, and the lottery state transition means Is determined from the first lottery state as the internal winning combination of any one of the first number of combinations including the first combination and the second combination of the plurality of combinations in the first lottery state Lottery In the second lottery state, any of the second numbers less than the first number that includes the first combination and does not include the second combination in the second lottery state is an internal winning combination. When it is determined, the gaming machine changes from the second lottery state to the third lottery state.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, transfer lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous state at the end of the advantageous state lottery state. At this time, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of lottery states including a first lottery state, a second lottery state, and a third lottery state with different probabilities of winning the transition lottery, and the inside of the advantageous state lottery state A plurality of lottery states are changed based on the winning combination. Accordingly, since the probability of winning the transition lottery can be changed based on the internal winning combination, the player has a strong interest in the internal winning combination in each game in the advantageous state lottery state. The interest during the state lottery state can be enhanced.

  In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, from the first lottery state to the second lottery state with a higher probability of winning the transition lottery, any one of the first number of combinations including the first combination and the second combination is won. When the winning combination is determined, the second lottery is shifted from the second lottery state to the third lottery state having a higher probability of winning the transition lottery. Transition is made when any of the roles is determined as an internal winning combination. As a result, as the lottery state transitions, the type of role that triggers the transition to the higher lottery state decreases, but the probability of winning the transition lottery with the transition of the lottery state also increases. A game form in which the state is gradually upgraded can be created. From the player's point of view, they are not interested in a single internal lottery result in the advantageous lottery state, but are interested in a series of internal lottery results in the advantageous lottery state. It is possible to increase interest during lottery.

[Appendix 5]
The pachi-slot 1 of appendix 5 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. Yes. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is notified of information advantageous to the player. ) Is generally performed to achieve an advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  By the way, since the game in the advantageous state tends to be monotonous, in recent years, an attempt to diversify the game in the advantageous state has been widely performed. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-152165), a free game is played when a predetermined condition is established, and the number of fighting aircraft symbols stopped and displayed as a result of the free game is displayed on a liquid crystal display. There has been disclosed a gaming machine in which the number of remaining fighters on the player side of the shooting game that is produced and displayed in the above is given a variety of effects and payout forms.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine disclosed in the patent document, a free game and a production (shooting game) are configured to automatically proceed under the control of the gaming machine, and thus the progress of the game by the player cannot be reflected in the production content. The player could not actively participate in the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game in an advantageous state by actively participating in the game. For the purpose.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state (for example, a general game state) and an advantageous state (for example, a battle ART in an ART game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is performed. A gaming machine that includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, a display) that displays a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. The reel is rotated based on the detection of the start operation by the window 4), the start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the symbol change means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) for changing the symbol by the start operation detection means, a plurality of An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability, and a stop operation provided to correspond to the plurality of reels to detect each reel. Stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. Reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means In addition, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means based on the combination of symbols stopped on the active line provided in the symbol display means A winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not, an advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state triggered by a predetermined condition, When a predetermined combination (for example, a push order bell) is determined as an internal winning combination, notification means for notifying information on a stop operation advantageous to the player (for example, information for displaying a combination of symbols having a large number of payouts) (E.g., the sub-control circuit 101 and the liquid crystal display device 11), and prior to the start of the advantageous state, the first numerical information (e.g., the HP of the teammate character) and the second numerical information (e.g., the HP of the enemy character) Numerical value determining means for determining (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and effect information (for example, performance) in a plurality of games from the current game to a predetermined game ahead during the advantageous state. Production information registration means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) that registers (for example, the apocalypse displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11), and first production information (for example, enemy ball) as the production information. When the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the game in which is registered, the first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical information, and second effect information (for example, ally ball) is used as the effect information. When the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the game in which is registered, numerical value updating means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for subtracting a second predetermined value from the second numerical information, and the numerical value updating means As a result of the subtraction, the advantageous state control means for terminating the advantageous state when the first numerical information is less than a threshold value, and newly starting the advantageous state when the second numerical information is less than the threshold value (for example, A control circuit 101), characterized in that it comprises a.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, during the advantageous state, the first numerical information and the second numerical information are subtracted based on the presentation information and the internal winning combination, and the second numerical information before the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value. If the numerical information can be less than the threshold value, the advantageous state is continued. Here, since the internal winning combination is determined according to the start operation of the player, the player will actively participate in the game in the advantageous state, and the motivation for the game can be improved. .

  Even if the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the subject to be subtracted (first numerical information or second numerical information) differs depending on the effect information registered in the game. For the player, the first numerical value information is subtracted in the state where the first performance information is registered, so that the player does not want to win the predetermined role, and conversely, when the second performance information is registered. Would like to win a certain role. Here, since the effect information is registered for a plurality of times of games from the current game to a game ahead of a predetermined number of times, the player can play the game after grasping the pre-registered effect information, The player wants to win the predetermined role at a timing (second effect information is registered) advantageous to the player side. As a result, the registered production information and the player's start operation can be strongly linked, and the player can play a game with a sense of tension, so that the interest during the advantageous state can be improved. it can.

  In addition, since the predetermined combination from which the first numerical information or the second numerical information is subtracted is a notification target combination, the determination that the predetermined combination is an internal winning combination will affect the profit given during the advantageous state. Will give. For example, in some gaming machines, the first role that subtracts the first numerical information is the first role that does not affect the profit (such as replay), and the target role that subtracts the second numerical information is the first that affects the profit. Two roles (bells, etc.) are also conceivable. In such a gaming machine, the presence or absence of the second role that affects profits is directly linked to the continued advantageous state, and the game becomes monotonous. In this regard, as in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the winning of the predetermined role that affects profits is made advantageous / disadvantaged according to the registered performance information, thereby improving the gaming property in the advantageous state. It can be diversified and can enhance the interest during the advantageous state.

[Appendix 6]
The pachi-slot 1 of appendix 6 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. Yes. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is notified of information advantageous to the player. ) Is generally performed to achieve an advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  By the way, in a gaming machine having a plurality of gaming states, it is common to change the gaming state based on winning or winning of a so-called rare role such as watermelon or cherry. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-048945), RT operation symbols 1 and 2 displayed when cherries 1, 2, and 3 are determined as internal winning combinations are displayed during a predetermined period. Thus, it is disclosed that the gaming state is shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Here, since the internal winning combination is determined according to the start operation of the player, the player's operation is reflected in the game result by shifting the game state based on the result of the internal lottery as in the patent document. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player actively participates in the game.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, since so-called rare roles such as watermelons and cherries have a low probability of winning, when changing the gaming state according to the presence or absence of a rare role such as a gaming machine of patent literature, depending on the player, even once during the period There is a possibility that chances may not be obtained, and there is a risk that the interest of the game will decline.

  On the other hand, there is also a gameability in which the game state is shifted regardless of the player's operation. However, in such a game machine, the game proceeds in accordance with the player's operation and moves away from the original gameplay of the pachislot machine. Since the decision to affect the profit to be granted is made, the suitability as a pachislot machine is lacking, and the fairness of the game may be harmed.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of shifting a gaming state rich in gaming characteristics while being associated with gaming results.

[Means for solving problems]
In the gaming machine according to the present invention, as a state in which a game is played, a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) advantageous to the player compared to the normal state and the normal state are compared. A gaming machine having a chance zone (for example, CZ) having a high probability of shifting to the advantageous state, and a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and the reels A symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the display, and a start operation detection means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a start operation by the player; Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, the symbol changing means for changing the symbol by rotating the reel (for example, main control circuit 91, steppin) Motor) and the first symbol combination (for example, the symbol displayed at the correct pressing order) according to the order of the stop operation when determined as the internal winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means Combination) or a second symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols displayed when the pressing order is incorrect) with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of roles including a pressing order (for example, a pressing order bell) that can be stopped and displayed. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination, and a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel provided for the plurality of reels. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. A reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, Winning determination means (for example, main control) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on the combination of symbols stopped on the active line provided in the symbol display means Circuit 91) and a predetermined condition (for example, winning apocalypse lottery) in the normal state, a CZ lottery state (for example, a normal gaming state during an apocalypse operation) in which the lottery to enter the chance zone is started is started. The lottery state starting means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) and the effect information in a plurality of times of games from the current game to a predetermined number of games ahead during the CZ lottery state. (For example, production balls such as lottery balls 1 to 4 and finalized balls) and the like information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101), and in the game in which the production information is registered, When one symbol combination is displayed, CZ lottery means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101, the reel of FIG. 72) performs lottery transfer to the chance zone with a probability corresponding to the effect information registered for the game. A stop state ART lottery table), a game state control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for shifting the gaming state to the chance zone based on the result of the transition lottery of the CZ lottery means, and during the CZ lottery state When the pushing forward combination is determined a predetermined number of times as an internal winning combination (for example, when the guaranteed number of times becomes 0), lottery state ending means for ending the CZ lottery state (for example, sub-control cycle) 101), characterized in that it comprises a.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the gaming state is shifted from the CZ lottery state to the chance zone based on performance information registered in advance for a predetermined number of games including the current game. Here, since the production information is registered regardless of the player's operation, simply shifting the game state based on the production information lacks suitability as a gaming machine and impairs the fairness of the game. There is a risk that. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state is shifted in consideration of not only the effect information registered for each game but also the combination of symbols displayed in the game. Thereby, a player's operation can be interposed with respect to a game state transition, and the fairness of a game can be ensured.

  Here, since the first symbol combination that triggers the transition of the gaming state is a combination of symbols that is displayed when the pushing order is determined as the internal winning combination, the rare combination described above is transferred to the gaming state. Compared to the case of the opportunity, the player can be given more opportunities to have a sense of expectation regarding the game state transition. In other words, in the first symbol combination that not only wins as an internal winning combination but also requires a stop operation order, the winning combination can be set with a higher probability of winning than a rare combination. The winning role can be given as an internal winning combination), and the fun of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game state transition lottery is performed with a probability corresponding to the effect information registered for the game in which the first symbol combination is displayed. The game state can be shifted in various ways while being associated with the game result. As a result, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to shift the gaming state in a manner rich in gaming while being associated with the result of the gaming.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the CZ lottery state is terminated when the pushing order as the internal winning combination is determined a predetermined number of times during the CZ lottery state. In this way, by using the push order that becomes the trigger for the transition of the gaming state as the termination condition of the CZ lottery state, the player is given a predetermined number of opportunities to receive the transition lottery during the CZ lottery state. As a result, the player can avoid a situation where there is no opportunity to receive the transfer lottery, and can prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating.

[Appendix 7]
The pachi-slot 1 of appendix 7 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. Yes. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is notified of information advantageous to the player. ) Is generally performed to achieve an advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  By the way, in a gaming machine having an ART function, a chance zone having a high expectation level of transition to the ART state is provided, and control is performed with a high probability when the specific condition is satisfied in the chance zone. . For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-048945), when a specific symbol combination (RT operation symbol 1) is targeted in the chance zone (CZ) and a specific symbol combination is displayed, the replay is internally performed. A gaming machine that performs control to shift to high RT with a high probability as a winning combination is disclosed.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In such a gaming machine of the patent document, the player's interest in the chance zone is concentrated on whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed. By the way, whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed depends on the result of the internal lottery, so depending on the player, there is a chance that a specific symbol combination may be displayed in the chance zone. May never be obtained, or the chances of such a possibility are significantly reduced. In such a case, for the player, although the player has moved to the chance zone, no chance is obtained, and the interest of the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period that is an opportunity to shift to an advantageous state advantageous to a player. For the purpose.

[Means for solving problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting the starting operation by the player, and the reel by rotating the reel based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. Based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination at a rate, and a stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel (For example, the main control circuit 91), the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. A reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. It is determined whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on the combination of symbols stopped on the active line provided in the means A winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and a lottery state start for starting an advantageous state lottery state (for example, CZ) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state in response to a predetermined condition. Means (e.g., sub-control circuit 101) and a winning mode (e.g., CZ mode) that defines the probability of determining the transition to the advantageous state in the transition lottery, the unit game that has passed in the advantageous state lottery state When a predetermined winning combination (for example, push order bell) is determined as an internal winning combination by the mode shifting means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for shifting based on the number of times and the internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous state lottery state. The advantageous state lottery means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that performs the transition lottery based on the current winning mode, and the advantageous state lottery means When the transfer lottery is performed, a lottery state ending means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for ending the advantageous state lottery state, and when it is determined to shift to the advantageous state by the transfer lottery, a game is performed. Advantageous state transition means (e.g., sub-control circuit 101) for shifting the state to the advantageous state, and the mode transition means has the probability based on the number of unit games that have passed in the advantageous state lottery state. The unit game that has been transferred from the lowest first mode (for example, CZ mode 0) to the second mode (for example, CZ mode 1) having the higher probability than the first mode and that has passed in the advantageous state lottery state When the number of times reaches a predetermined number (for example, 30 times), the mode is shifted to the third mode (for example, CZ mode 2) having the highest probability, and the lottery state start means When the profit state lottery state is started, the mode transition means further includes transition timing determination means (for example, CZ_MAP, sub control circuit 101) for determining the number of unit games to be shifted from the first mode to the second mode. It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone) in which the transition lottery to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is performed, the transition lottery is triggered when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination. When the transfer lottery is performed, the advantageous lottery state is terminated. Here, in the gaming machine that performs the lottery to the advantageous state based on the internal winning combination, some players may not be able to receive the transition lottery during the advantageous state lottery state, but the gaming machine according to the present invention Then, as the advantageous state lottery state continues, the winning mode that defines the probability of winning the transition lottery rises and it becomes easier to win the transition lottery. In such a gaming machine, contrary to the conventional gaming machine, it is advantageous for the player that the predetermined winning combination is not determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous state lottery state, and the game in the advantageous state lottery state is conventionally performed. The game is not playable, and the interest during the lottery state can be improved.

  Further, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the advantageous state lottery state starts, the number of unit games for shifting the winning mode from the first mode to the second mode is determined. As a result, the timing at which the winning mode rises to the mode advantageous to the player differs for each advantageous state lottery state, so that the games in the advantageous state lottery state can be diversified, and the advantageous state lottery state Interest can be improved.

[Appendix 8]
The pachi-slot 1 of appendix 8 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. Yes. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs in a high probability replay time (RT: replay time) in which the probability that an AT is replayed (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is sometimes referred to as an ART machine.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation. It would be hoped that this period will last longer.

  Therefore, in recent years, devices for increasing the period of AT and ART have been made from various viewpoints. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), identification of watermelon, cherry, etc. is given as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine is disclosed that increases the number of AT games when the combination is determined. According to this gaming machine, since the number of AT games increases according to the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the gameability tends to be monotonous, and the player's expectation that AT and ART will continue is Concentrating only on one game, the player's expectations could not be sustained.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of sustaining a player's interest in continuing advantageous states (such as AT and ART) over a plurality of games. For the purpose.

[Means for solving problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting the starting operation by the player, and the reel by rotating the reel based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) and the symbol change means for changing Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) that determines an internal winning combination with probability, and a stop operation detecting means that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel. (For example, the main control circuit 91), the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. A reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on the combination of symbols stopped on the active line provided in the means, it is determined whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize. A winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and a second advantageous state (for example, an enemy determination ART) and a second advantageous state performed following the first advantageous state, triggered by a predetermined condition. Advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state including the battle ART), and first advantageous state control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the first advantageous state. ) And second advantageous state control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the second advantageous state, the first advantageous state control means during the first advantageous state A first effect information registering means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for registering effect information (for example, effect ball) in a plurality of times of games from the current game to a game of a predetermined number of times ahead, Second advantageous state starting means for ending the first advantageous state and starting the second advantageous state in a game in which any of several types of first effect information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8) is registered. (E.g., the sub-control circuit 101), and the second advantageous state control means includes, during the second advantageous state, presentation information (e.g., a plurality of times of games from the current game to a predetermined number of games ahead). In the game in which the second effect information registration unit (for example, sub control circuit 101) for registering the effect ball and the second effect information (for example, enemy ball) is registered as the effect information, first numerical information (for example, The first numerical value corresponding to the type of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state (for example, the attack power of the enemy character) is subtracted from the HP of the teammate character), and the effect information is Third production From the second numerical information (for example, the HP of the enemy character) in the game in which the information (for example, teammate ball) is registered, the type of the first effect information (for example, the enemy) registered at the end of the first advantageous state. The numerical subtraction means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for subtracting the second numerical value corresponding to the character's defense power), and the subtraction of the numerical subtraction means results in the advantageous state when the first numerical information becomes less than a threshold value. And an advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) which newly starts the first advantageous state when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value, and continues when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value before the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical information and the second numerical information is performed based on the effect information registered for each game in the second advantageous state, whether or not the advantageous state continues is determined by a plurality of games. It will differ depending on the game result. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the player's interest in continuing the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

  Also, the effect information for subtracting the numerical information is registered in advance for not only the current game but also a plurality of times of games from the current game to a game ahead of a predetermined number of times. From the viewpoint of the player, it is possible to grasp the flow of the subsequent game from the contents of the production information registered in advance up to a plurality of games ahead, and not only the current game but also the subsequent game will be interested. , Can improve the interest during the advantageous state.

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the subtraction amount of the numerical information is varied according to the type of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state. As a result, not only the second advantageous state but also the result of the game in the first advantageous state affects whether or not the advantageous state is continued. Can be sustained throughout the game. In addition, by subtracting the subtraction amount of the first numerical information (first numerical value) and the subtraction amount of the second numerical value (second numerical value) separately, for example, the subtraction amounts of the first numerical information and the second numerical information can be set together. The number of subtraction amounts of the first numerical information can be made large / small, and the amount of subtraction of the second numerical information can be made small / large, and the game in the second advantageous state can be varied. Can be As a result, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest during the advantageous state.

[Appendix 9]
The pachi-slot 1 of appendix 9 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. Yes. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs in a high probability replay time (RT: replay time) in which the probability that an AT is replayed (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is sometimes referred to as an ART machine.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation. It would be hoped that this period will last longer.

  Therefore, in recent years, devices for increasing the period of AT and ART have been made from various viewpoints. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), identification of watermelon, cherry, etc. is given as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine is disclosed that increases the number of AT games when the combination is determined. According to this gaming machine, since the number of AT games increases according to the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the gameability tends to be monotonous, and the player's expectation that AT and ART will continue is Concentrating only on one game, the player's expectations could not be sustained.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of sustaining a player's interest in continuing advantageous states (such as AT and ART) over a plurality of games. For the purpose.

[Means for solving problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting the starting operation by the player, and the reel by rotating the reel based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) and the symbol change means for changing Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) that determines an internal winning combination with probability, and a stop operation detecting means that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel. (For example, the main control circuit 91), the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. A reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on the combination of symbols stopped on the active line provided in the means, it is determined whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize. A winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and a second advantageous state (for example, an enemy determination ART) and a second advantageous state performed following the first advantageous state, triggered by a predetermined condition. Advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state including the battle ART), and first advantageous state control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the first advantageous state. ) And second advantageous state control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the second advantageous state, the first advantageous state control means during the first advantageous state First effect information registration means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for registering effect information (for example, effect balls) in a plurality of times of games from the current game to a game that is a predetermined number of times ahead, Numerical value adding means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for adding a predetermined number to the first numerical value information (for example, the HP of the teammate character) in a game in which one effect information (for example, a teammate ball) is registered, and the effect information As a second advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for ending the first advantageous state and starting the second advantageous state in the game in which the second effect information (for example, boss ball) is registered. And the second advantageous state control means registers, during the second advantageous state, a second effect for registering effect information (for example, an effect ball) in a plurality of games from a current game to a game ahead of a predetermined number of times. Subtracting the first predetermined value from the first numerical information in the information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and the game in which the third effect information (for example, enemy ball) is registered as the effect information, Above Numerical subtraction means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that subtracts the second predetermined value from the second numerical information (for example, HP of the enemy character) in the game in which the fourth effect information (for example, teammate ball) is registered as the outgoing information. ), The advantageous state is terminated when the first numerical information is less than a threshold value as a result of subtraction by the numerical value subtracting means, and the first advantageous state is newly started when the second numerical information is less than the threshold value. Advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, sub-control circuit 101).

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value, and continues when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value before the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical information and the second numerical information is performed based on the effect information registered for each game in the second advantageous state, whether or not the advantageous state continues is determined by a plurality of games. It will differ depending on the game result. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the player's interest in continuing the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

  Also, the effect information for subtracting the numerical information is registered in advance for not only the current game but also a plurality of times of games from the current game to a game ahead of a predetermined number of times. From the viewpoint of the player, it is possible to grasp the flow of the subsequent game from the contents of the production information registered in advance up to a plurality of games ahead, and not only the current game but also the subsequent game will be interested. , Can improve the interest during the advantageous state.

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first numerical value information serving as a trigger for ending the advantageous state is added based on the first effect information registered during the first advantageous state. By adding a large amount of the first numerical information during the first advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the first numerical information from decreasing to less than the threshold value in the subsequent second advantageous state. As a result, not only the second advantageous state but also the result of the game in the first advantageous state will affect the continuation of the advantageous state, so the player's interest in continuing the advantageous state over multiple games Can last.

[Appendix 10]
The pachi-slot 1 of appendix 10 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. Yes. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs in a high probability replay time (RT: replay time) in which the probability that an AT is replayed (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is sometimes referred to as an ART machine.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation. It would be hoped that this period will last longer.

  Therefore, in recent years, devices for increasing the period of AT and ART have been made from various viewpoints. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), identification of watermelon, cherry, etc. is given as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine is disclosed that increases the number of AT games when the combination is determined. According to this gaming machine, since the number of AT games increases according to the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the gameability tends to be monotonous, and the player's expectation that AT and ART will continue is Concentrating only on one game, the player's expectations could not be sustained.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of sustaining a player's interest in continuing advantageous states (such as AT and ART) over a plurality of games. For the purpose.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state (for example, a general game state) and an advantageous state (for example, a battle ART in an ART game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is performed. A gaming machine that includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, a display) that displays a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. The reel is rotated based on the detection of the start operation by the window 4), the start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the symbol change means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) for changing the symbol by the start operation detection means, a plurality of An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability, and a stop operation provided to correspond to the plurality of reels to detect each reel. Stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. Reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means In addition, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means based on the combination of symbols stopped on the active line provided in the symbol display means A winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not, an advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state triggered by a predetermined condition, Prior to the start, determination means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for determining first numerical information (for example, HP of a friend character) and second numerical information (for example, HP of an enemy character), and during the advantageous state Production information registration means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for registering production information (for example, production balls) in a plurality of games from the current game to a game ahead of a predetermined number of times, and first production information ( For example, in a game in which an enemy ball is registered, a first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical information, and a second effect information (for example, a friend ball) is registered as the effect information. In the technique, when the first numerical information becomes less than a threshold value as a result of subtraction of the numerical value updating means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for subtracting the second predetermined value from the second numerical information and the numerical value updating means, the advantageous state And an advantageous state control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that newly starts the advantageous state when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold, and the effect information registration means is the plurality of times When the first effect information is registered continuously for a specific number of times (for example, four times) as effect information in the game of the game, the second effect information is used as effect information following the first effect information continued for the specified number of times. It is characterized by registering.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value, and continues when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value before the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical information and the second numerical information is performed based on the effect information registered for each game, whether or not the advantageous state continues depends on the game results of a plurality of games. Will be different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the player's interest in continuing the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

  Also, the effect information for subtracting the numerical information is registered in advance for not only the current game but also a plurality of times of games from the current game to a game ahead of a predetermined number of times. From the viewpoint of the player, it is possible to grasp the flow of the subsequent game from the contents of the production information registered in advance up to a plurality of games ahead, and not only the current game but also the subsequent game will be interested. , Can improve the interest during the advantageous state.

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first effect information that is the trigger for ending the advantageous state is registered for a specific number of times, the second effect that is the continuous trigger for the advantageous state as the subsequent effect information. Register information. Thereby, since it is possible to prevent a disadvantageous situation for the player from continuing for a long period of time, the player can play the game in an advantageous state with peace of mind.

[Appendix 11]
The pachi-slot 1 of appendix 11 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In the pachislot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In such a gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that notifies information advantageous to a player so as not to miss a combination determined as an internal winning combination. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075738), when a bonus combination that is carried over as an internal winning combination is carried over until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed, A gaming machine is disclosed that notifies that a bonus combination has been carried over when restarted by re-insertion.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Literature has a problem that since the bonus starts immediately upon power-on, the fairness among players is impaired. In game machines, information related to games is generally cleared once when the setting is changed, so for example, a game is terminated with the bonus combination carried over the previous day, and the next day notification is sent. By checking whether or not, the player can grasp whether the set value has changed or not changed from the previous day. Being able to grasp the presence or absence of a change in the setting value in this way not only harms the fairness among the players, but also may impair the interest of the player if judged to be a low setting and the player There is sex.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that ensures fairness among players.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels). , The display window 4), start operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a start operation by the player, and rotation of the reel based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the symbol change means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is determined from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) and stop operation detecting means (for example, provided for the plurality of reels) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel For example, the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. Reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the symbol display means Based on the combination of symbols stopped on the active line provided in the winning combination determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won And production information registration for registering production information (for example, production balls such as lottery balls 1 to 4 and finalized balls) in a plurality of games from a current game to a game ahead of a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined symbol combination is displayed on the active line in the game in which the means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) and the effect information are registered, the effect information registered for the game is used. Privilege granting means for granting a privilege (for example, sub-control circuit 101), power-on detection means for detecting power-on (for example, main control circuit 91, sub-control circuit 101, power supply board 44b), and power-on detection The acquisition means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the sub control circuit 101, the power supply board 44b) that acquires the date and time when the means detects the power-on, and the effect information registration means are based on the date and time acquired by the acquisition means. The registered production information is discarded, and production information for a plurality of games is newly registered.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the registered production information is rewritten with new production information based on the date and time when the power is turned on. From the date and time when the power is turned on, for example, it is the time before business at the amusement store, and by comparing with the date and time when the power is turned off, it is known that it is before the next business day. Therefore, by rewriting the production information based on the date and time when the power was turned on, the production information registered when the power was turned off on the previous day and the production information registered when the power was turned on the next day are always different. The player cannot grasp the presence / absence of a change in the set value from the registered effect information, and does not impair the fairness among the players.

  Here, since this effect information is used for the lottery for the transition to the advantageous state by the transition lottery means, it is possible to further ensure the fairness among the players. That is, for example, even if the production information with high (or low) expectation of the transition to the advantageous state when the power is turned off on the previous day is registered, it is rewritten with new production information when the power is turned on the next day. It is possible to prevent unfair treatment between a player who grasps the game and a player who does not.

  Also, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in order to control the rewriting of the production information based on the date and time when the power is turned on, when the power must be temporarily turned off during business, before and after the power is turned off. The state of the gaming machine can be maintained. From the player's point of view, even if the power is turned off temporarily when the advantageous information is registered for the player, the advantageous information is maintained after the power is turned on again. You can play without feeling.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention further includes power-off detection means (for example, main control circuit 91, sub-control circuit 101, power supply board 44b) for detecting power-off, and the acquisition means includes the power-off detection. Acquires the time from when the power is turned off to when the power is turned on from the date and time when the means detects the power off and from the date and time when the power off is detected and the date and time when the power is turned on. The effect information registration means maintains the registered effect information when the time acquired by the acquisition means is less than a predetermined time (for example, 4 hours), and the time acquired by the acquisition means is equal to or longer than the predetermined time. In this case, the registered effect information is discarded, and effect information in a plurality of games is newly registered.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, when the time from when the power is turned off to when the power is turned on again is equal to or longer than a predetermined time, the registered effect information is rewritten with new effect information. Thereby, the player who plays a game the next day cannot grasp the presence / absence of a change in the set value from the registered effect information, and does not impair the fairness among the players. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the time from when the power is turned off to when the power is turned on again is less than a predetermined time, the registered effect information is maintained without being rewritten. Thereby, even if the power information is temporarily turned off when advantageous information for the player is registered, the advantageous information is maintained after the power is turned on again. You can play games without feeling dissatisfied.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the effect information registration unit discards the registered effect information and newly registers the effect information in a plurality of games, the effect information determined by lottery is newly added. It is characterized in that it is registered as various production information.

  As a method to make it difficult to grasp the presence or absence of a change in setting value, a method of setting the production information to the initial state when the power is turned on the next day can be considered, but in such a method, the situation is the same in a plurality of gaming machines. As a result, the diversity of games is diminished. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since new performance information is registered by lottery when the power is turned on the next day, it is preferable because the diversity of the game can be secured.

[Appendix 12]
The pachislot 1 of appendix 12 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In the pachislot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine for notifying a player of information for establishing an internal winning combination is known so as not to miss a combination determined as an internal winning combination. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is notified of information advantageous to the player. ) Is generally performed to achieve a gaming state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  Here, in a gaming machine having a plurality of gaming states, a gaming machine in which a combination of symbols displayed according to a player's stop operation is different is widely known, and a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination For example, if the first symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation, AT or ART is executed, and if the second symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation, AT or ART is executed. There is also a game machine that does not.

  In the gaming machine that controls the gaming state according to the combination of symbols displayed in this way, the player can avoid that the sub control board grasps that the combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed. There are known fraudulent acts, such as command spills, that get unfair profits. For example, in the case of the gaming machine described above, when a combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed, by preventing the sub-control board side from acquiring a command including information on the displayed symbol combination, It can be avoided that the player is in a disadvantageous state, and as a result, the player gains an unfair advantage.

  Therefore, when an illegal act is performed by a player during a game and a communication error (sequence error) occurs during communication between the main control board and the sub control board, a gaming machine that notifies that an error has occurred It is already known (see, for example, Patent Document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-059616)). In such a gaming machine, a liquid crystal display device, sound, or a decorative lamp (LED) is used to notify that a sequence error has occurred, and the game store clerk is made aware that the cheating is being performed. Therefore, an illegal act that induces a sequence error is executed, and the player can be prevented from illegally obtaining the profit of the game.

  Note that in a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine, a game is performed by performing a stop operation three times following the operation of the start lever, so the order of commands transmitted from the main control board to the sub control board is determined. By confirming the order of commands acquired by the sub control board, it is possible to specify whether or not a sequence error has occurred.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the case of the gaming machine as described above, even if the notification of the sequence error is executed by the sound and the decoration lamp when the liquid crystal display device is not mounted, it is confused with the effects of other gaming machines in the game hall. As a result, there is a problem that the effect of notifying the sequence error to the store clerk is not transmitted, and the player can illegally obtain the profit of the game by the illegal act.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent illegally obtaining a profit of a game by an illegal act.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal state as a state in which a game is performed. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And a start operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a start operation by the player, and the reel is rotated on condition that the start operation is detected by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the start change detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91) and the start operation detecting means, the predetermined change is made from a plurality of roles. And an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination, and a stop operation detecting means (corresponding to the plurality of reels) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. For example, by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. Reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the symbol display means It is determined whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on the combination of symbols stopped on the active line provided in Winning determination means (for example, main control circuit 91) and lottery state start means for starting an advantageous state lottery state (for example, CZ) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state in response to a predetermined condition. (For example, the sub-control circuit 101) and an advantageous state lottery for performing a transition lottery in which a predetermined number of unit games (for example, 30 games) have passed in the advantageous state lottery state and a predetermined probability is determined to shift to the advantageous state. Means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) and lottery state end means (for example, sub-control) that terminates the advantageous state lottery state when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed on the active line in the advantageous state lottery state. Circuit state) and a game state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit) for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous state based on the result of the lottery of the advantageous state lottery means 101) and a game order determining means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for determining the progression order of one game, and the lottery state ending means is such that the game order determining means proceeds in a predetermined order. If it is determined that it is not (for example, when a sequence error occurs), the advantageous state lottery state is terminated.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone) that starts with a predetermined condition as a trigger, the predetermined number of unit games that will end the advantageous state lottery state are triggered. Since a two-right grant lottery is performed, it is possible to realize a so-called completion race chance zone in which a lottery is performed to an advantageous state at the time of completion. Since this advantageous state lottery state ends when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the player performs a stop operation in the hope that the predetermined symbol combination is not displayed in order to avoid the end.

  In addition, when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed during the advantageous state lottery state, the advantageous state lottery state is terminated, but the symbol combination displayed due to fraud etc. has been zeroed (cannot be grasped). The advantageous state lottery state is temporarily maintained. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is determined whether or not the progress of one game has progressed in a predetermined order, and when the progress has not progressed in the predetermined order, the advantageous state lottery state is terminated. Even if the progress result (for example, the displayed symbol combination) is zeroed, the advantageous state lottery state is not unfairly maintained, and the player gains an unfair advantage by cheating. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the advantageous state lottery means shifts to the advantageous state when the internal winning combination determining means determines a combination that can display the predetermined symbol combination as an internal winning combination. The transfer lottery determined with a specific probability is further performed.

  In a game in which a combination that can display a predetermined symbol combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the advantage state lottery state may be terminated by displaying the predetermined symbol combination. You can receive more lottery. Since this lottery is performed when the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the lottery is performed as the advantageous lottery state continues. Therefore, if the game progress result is zero and the displayed symbol combination cannot be grasped, it is possible to receive an unreasonably large number of lotteries for the transition to the advantageous state triggered by the combination. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the progress of the game is not appropriate, the advantageous state lottery state is terminated regardless of the symbol combination, so that the player may obtain an unfair advantage due to cheating. Can be prevented.

[Appendix 13]
The pachi-slot 1 of appendix 13 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. Yes. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs in a high probability replay time (RT: replay time) in which the probability that an AT is replayed (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is sometimes referred to as an ART machine.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation. It would be hoped that this period will last longer. Therefore, in recent years, devices for increasing the period of AT or ART have been made from various viewpoints. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147803), an AT winning combination including a bonus is disclosed. And gaming machines that determine the ART period (number of assist games) have been proposed.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, simply determining the number of assist games based on an internal winning combination as in the patent literature may result in monotonous gaming and bore the player. Therefore, there is a need for a new method that has not been conventionally used with respect to a method for determining a period such as AT.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling a period of AT or the like by a method rich in gaming.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal state as a state in which a game is performed. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting the starting operation by the player, and the reel by rotating the reel based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the symbol change means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is selected from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) to be determined, and stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit) that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel. 91) and the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. A reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the displayed symbol, and an effective provided in the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on a combination of symbols stopped on the line, winning determination means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize ( For example, the main control circuit 91) includes a first advantageous state (for example, enemy determination ART) and a second advantageous state (for example, battle ART) performed following the first advantageous state, triggered by a predetermined condition. Advantageous state starting means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state, first advantageous state control means (for example, subcontrol circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the first advantageous state, and the first Second advantageous state control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the two advantageous states, wherein the first advantageous state control means is advantageous with respect to the first performance information (for example, ally ball). From a plurality of types of production information (for example, production balls) including a plurality of types of second production information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8) having different degrees of continuation expectation of the state, a predetermined number (for example, 6). Determine production information and perform Production information registration means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) stored in the outgoing information storage means (for example, sub-RAM 103), and a specified number less than a predetermined number of the production information stored in the production information storage means Display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) that displays a number of pieces (for example, five pieces) of pieces of production information as production information in a specific number of games including the current game, and first production information as production information in the current game. In the displayed game, the numerical value adding means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for adding the first predetermined value to the first numerical information (for example, the HP of the teammate character) and the internal winning combination determining means are specified roles (for example, , The rare combination) is determined as the internal winning combination, the specific combination rewriting means (for example, secondary control) that rewrites the second production information stored in the production information storage means to the first production information. Circuit 101) and a second advantage for ending the first advantageous state and starting the second advantageous state in a game in which any one of a plurality of types of second effect information is registered as effect information in the current game State start means (for example, sub-control circuit 101), and the second advantageous state control means is a second registered at the end of the first advantageous state from the first numerical information according to a first condition. The first specific value corresponding to the type of effect information is subtracted, and the second effect registered at the end of the first advantageous state from the second numerical information (for example, HP of the enemy character) according to the second condition. The numerical subtraction means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for subtracting the second specific value corresponding to the type of information, and when the first numerical information becomes less than a threshold value as a result of the subtraction of the numerical subtraction means, the advantageous state is terminated. , The second numerical information is Continuation control means for continuing a beneficial state goes below serial threshold (e.g., sub-control circuit 101) and, characterized in that it comprises a.

  In such a gaming machine, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information of the first numerical information and the second numerical information first falls below the threshold in the second advantageous state, and the second numerical information is the first threshold. As the value of the first numerical information is larger, the advantageous state becomes easier to continue and the period of the advantageous state is extended. The value of the first numerical information is added in the game in which the first effect information is displayed during the first advantageous state. On the other hand, when the second effect information is displayed during the first advantageous state, the first advantageous state in which the addition of the first numerical information is completed and the second advantageous information is subtracted from the first numerical information. Transition to the state. Thus, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in order to control the period of the advantageous state based on the effect information displayed in the current game, rather than controlling the period of the advantageous state simply based on the internal winning combination, The player pays attention not only to the internal winning combination but also to the currently displayed effect information, so that the control during the advantageous state period can be made rich in gaming.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the first advantageous state, the second effect information that ends the first advantageous state is rewritten to the first effect information. By rewriting the second effect information to the first effect information, the player can have an expectation that the first numerical information will be added thereafter, so that the player not only displays the displayed effect information, We will also pay attention to the internal winning combination. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to make the control during the advantageous state more rich in gaming.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific role rewriting means includes a specific second in which the expected expectation of the advantageous state is greater than or equal to a predetermined value among the production information in the specific number of games displayed on the display means. The effect information is maintained without being rewritten to the first effect information.

  As described above, the larger the first numerical value information is, the easier the advantageous state is to continue. On the other hand, the second type of second-stage production information has a different expected expectation of the advantageous state. If the two advantageous states start, then one can have a sense of expectation that the advantageous state will continue. If the second effect information in which such an advantageous state is easy to continue is rewritten to the first effect information, the advantageous state may be difficult to continue. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific second effect information whose continuation expectation degree of the advantageous state is not less than a predetermined value is maintained without being rewritten to the first effect information. Thereby, determination of the period of an advantageous state can be made more game-rich.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific role rewriting means is the first effect information about the specific second effect information stored in the effect information storage means without being displayed on the display means. It is characterized by rewriting.

  In such a gaming machine, the specific second effect information that is maintained without being rewritten into the first effect information is limited to the information that is being displayed on the display means, and is stored only without being displayed. Rewrite to 1 production information. Since non-displayed production information cannot be grasped by the player, rewriting such production information to the first production information can provide the player with a profit without dissatisfaction with the player. Balance can be achieved.

[Appendix 14]
The pachi-slot 1 of appendix 14 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. Yes. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs in a high probability replay time (RT: replay time) in which the probability that an AT is replayed (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is sometimes referred to as an ART machine.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation. It would be hoped that this period will last longer. Therefore, in recent years, devices for increasing the period of AT or ART have been made from various viewpoints. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147803), an AT winning combination including a bonus is disclosed. And gaming machines that determine the ART period (number of assist games) have been proposed.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, simply determining the number of assist games based on an internal winning combination as in the patent literature may result in monotonous gaming and bore the player. Therefore, there is a need for a new method that has not been conventionally used with respect to a method for determining a period such as AT.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling a period of AT or the like by a method rich in gaming.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal state as a state in which a game is performed. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting the starting operation by the player, and the reel by rotating the reel based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the symbol change means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is selected from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) to be determined, and stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit) that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel. 91) and the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. A reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the displayed symbol, and an effective provided in the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on a combination of symbols stopped on the line, winning determination means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize ( For example, the main control circuit 91) includes a first advantageous state (for example, enemy determination ART) and a second advantageous state (for example, battle ART) performed following the first advantageous state, triggered by a predetermined condition. Advantageous state starting means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state, first advantageous state control means (for example, subcontrol circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the first advantageous state, and the first Second advantageous state control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the two advantageous states, wherein the first advantageous state control means has a plurality of types of effects with different expected expectations of the advantageous state A predetermined number (for example, six) of production information (for example, production balls) is determined from the information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8), and the production information stored in the production information storage means (for example, the sub RAM 103). Climb Recording means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) and a specific number (for example, five) of production information less than a predetermined number among the predetermined number of pieces of production information stored in the production information storage means When the display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for displaying as presentation information in a specific number of games including the internal winning combination determining means determines the specific winning combination (for example, a role related to BB) as the internal winning combination, Profit state rewriting means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) that rewrites one or more pieces of effect information stored in the storage means to new effect information, and a game in which predetermined effect information is displayed as effect information in the current game When a specific condition is satisfied in (for example, when the push order bell is determined as an internal winning combination), the first advantageous state is started to end the first advantageous state and start the second advantageous state. (For example, the sub-control circuit 101), and the second advantageous state control means is based on the first condition based on the first condition (for example, at the time of hitting the pushing order bell when the enemy ball is set) Second numerical information is subtracted from the first specific value corresponding to the type of effect information registered at the end of the advantageous state, and according to the second condition (for example, when pushing the bell in the setting of the friendly ball) Numerical subtraction means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for subtracting a second specific value corresponding to the type of effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state, and the result of the subtraction by the numerical subtraction means And continuation control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) that terminates the advantageous state when the numerical information is less than the threshold and continues the advantageous state when the second numerical information is less than the threshold.

  In such a gaming machine, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information of the first numerical information and the second numerical information first falls below the threshold in the second advantageous state, and the second numerical information is the first threshold. Continue when less than. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical information and the second numerical information is performed according to the type of effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state, the effect information displayed during the first advantageous state is It will affect the duration of the favorable state. Thus, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is not necessary to control the period of the advantageous state based on the internal winning combination, but to control the period of the advantageous state based on the effect information displayed in the current game. The player pays attention not only to the internal winning combination, but also to the currently displayed performance information, and can control the period of the advantageous state rich in gaming.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the first advantageous state, one or more pieces of production information stored in the production information storage unit are rewritten with new production information. . As a result, when the production information is rewritten with a high expectation level of the advantageous state, the situation is advantageous to the player, and conversely, when the production information is rewritten with a low expectation level of the advantageous state. Since the situation is disadvantageous for the player, the player pays attention not only to the displayed presentation information but also to the internal winning combination. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to make the control during the advantageous state more rich in gaming.

  Moreover, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the profit state rewriting means includes the specific effect information in which the expected expectation of the advantageous state is greater than or equal to a predetermined value among the effect information in the specific number of games displayed on the display means. Is maintained without being rewritten to new production information.

  According to such a gaming machine, even if the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the specific performance information having a continuation expectation level equal to or higher than a predetermined level is maintained without being rewritten with other performance information. As a result, when the specific effect information is included in the specific number of effect information that is displayed, the player is given an opportunity to obtain profits from the specific effect information. You can have a subsequent game, and the fun of the game will improve.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the profit state rewriting means rewrites the specific effect information stored in the effect information storage means to new effect information without being displayed on the display means. It is characterized by.

  In such a gaming machine, the specific effect information that is maintained without being rewritten to other effect information is limited to the information that is being displayed on the display means, and is not stored but is simply stored. Rewrite information. Since non-displayed production information cannot be grasped by the player, rewriting such production information with other production information can provide the player with a profit without dissatisfaction with the player. Balance can be achieved.

[Appendix 15]
The pachi-slot 1 of appendix 15 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. Yes. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs in a high probability replay time (RT: replay time) in which the probability that an AT is replayed (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is sometimes referred to as an ART machine.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation. It would be hoped that this period will last longer. Therefore, in recent years, devices for increasing the period of AT or ART have been made from various viewpoints. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147803), an AT winning combination including a bonus is disclosed. And gaming machines that determine the ART period (number of assist games) have been proposed.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, simply determining the number of assist games based on an internal winning combination as in the patent literature may result in monotonous gaming and bore the player. Therefore, there is a need for a new method that has not been conventionally used with respect to a method for determining a period such as AT.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling a period of AT or the like by a method rich in gaming.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal state as a state in which a game is performed. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting the starting operation by the player, and the reel by rotating the reel based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the symbol change means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is selected from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) to be determined, and stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit) that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel. 91) and the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. A reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the displayed symbol, and an effective provided in the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on a combination of symbols stopped on the line, winning determination means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize ( For example, the main control circuit 91) includes a first advantageous state (for example, enemy determination ART) and a second advantageous state (for example, battle ART) performed following the first advantageous state, triggered by a predetermined condition. Advantageous state starting means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state, first advantageous state control means (for example, subcontrol circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the first advantageous state, and the first Second advantageous state control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the two advantageous states, wherein the first advantageous state control means is a plurality of types of second types having different expected expectations of the advantageous state. A lottery that specifies lottery value information (for example, boss MAP data) for determining the effect information from a plurality of types of effect information (for example, effect balls) including one effect information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8). Affection The lottery information storage means (for example, the ROM cartridge substrate 76) for storing a plurality of information (for example, boss MAP) and one lottery information among the plurality of lottery information stored in the lottery information storage means, When the production information is determined based on the one lottery information, the lottery information for determining the production information is updated from the one lottery information to the other lottery information. Based on the lottery information determination means (for example, the sub control circuit 101, the boss MAP lottery table) to be performed and the lottery information determined by the lottery information determination means, effects in a plurality of times of games from the current game to a predetermined number of games ahead Production information registration means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for determining information and any one of a plurality of types of first production information is registered as the production information in the current game. When a specific condition is satisfied in the game being played (for example, when the push order bell is determined as an internal winning combination), the first advantageous state is started and the second advantageous state is started. The means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) and the second advantageous state control means continue the advantageous state based on the type of the first performance information determined for the game at the end of the first advantageous state. Continuation control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for controlling whether or not, the lottery information storage means, as information of lottery value for determining the first effect information, the continuation expectation degree of the advantageous state Stores special lottery information (e.g., boss MAP 52) that prescribes only the first special production information (e.g., boss balls 7 and 8) that is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, and the lottery information determination means determines the lottery for determining the production information. As information When determining the special lottery information, without updating from the special lottery information to other lottery information, and maintains a special lottery information.

  Such a gaming machine has a plurality of types of first effect information with different expected continuation expectations of the advantageous state, and the type of the first effect information determined for the game at the end of the first advantageous state. Based on this, the presence / absence of the advantageous state is controlled. From the player's point of view, they will have a strong interest in the type of presentation information that is currently displayed. Compared to conventional gaming machines that control the period of the advantageous state based solely on the internal winning combination, It is possible to make the control during the advantageous state rich in game play.

  Here, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect information to be registered for a predetermined game is determined based on the lottery information from a plurality of types of effect information, and lottery information is updated each time the effect information is determined. Update to lottery information. The lottery information includes special lottery information for determining only the special first effect information whose expected expectation of the advantageous state is greater than or equal to the predetermined value as the first effect information that triggers the end of the first advantageous state. In addition, once the lottery information is updated to the special lottery information, the special lottery information is maintained without being updated from this special lottery information to other lottery information. As a result, once the special lottery information has been updated, only the special first effect information with a high expectation of continuation of the advantageous state is determined as the first effect information. Therefore, the lottery information for determining the value is also focused, and the control of the advantageous period can be made more rich in game.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the continuation control means of the second advantageous state control means is the first numerical value information (for example, according to the pushing order bell win when the enemy ball is set) (for example, The first specific value corresponding to the type of the first performance information registered at the end of the first advantageous state is subtracted from the HP of the teammate character), and the second condition (for example, the pressing order when the teammate ball is set) Numerical subtraction means for subtracting the second specific value corresponding to the type of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state from the second numerical information (for example, the HP of the enemy character) according to the time of winning the bell) For example, as a result of subtraction by the sub-control circuit 101) and the numerical subtraction means, the advantageous state is terminated when the first numerical information is less than a threshold value, and the advantageous state is continued when the second numerical information is less than the threshold value. Continuous control means (for example, Control circuit 101), and the special lottery information (for example, the boss MAP 52, 53) includes the special first effect information and the second effect information (for example, ally ball) from among a plurality of types of effect information. The first advantage state control means adds a first predetermined value to the first numerical information in the game in which the second effect information is determined as the effect information in the current game. Further, numerical addition means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) is further provided.

  In such a gaming machine, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information of the first numerical information and the second numerical information first falls below the threshold in the second advantageous state, and the second numerical information is the first threshold. Continue when less than. In this case, once the special lottery information has been updated, it is advantageous to define the lottery value information about the second performance information to which the first numerical information is added to the special lottery information described above. Only the first effect information with high state expectation level or the second effect information to which the first numerical information is added is determined. As a result, when the special first effect information is determined, the degree of continuation expectation of the advantageous state is increased as described above, and when the second effect information is determined, the first numerical information is increased. Since it becomes difficult for 1 numerical information to be reduced to less than a threshold value, the continuation expectation degree of an advantageous state similarly increases. Thus, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, once the special lottery information has been updated, the player can have an expectation that the advantageous state will continue, so the player determines the production information. Therefore, the lottery information for doing so will be paid attention to, and it is possible to make the advantageous period control rich in game.

[Appendix 16]
The pachislot 1 of appendix 16 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. Yes. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs in a high probability replay time (RT: replay time) in which the probability that an AT is replayed (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is sometimes referred to as an ART machine.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation. It would be hoped that this period will last longer. Therefore, in recent years, various ideas have been made to give players a sense of expectation regarding the continuation of AT and ART. For example, in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-059492), AT and ART continue. There has been proposed a gaming machine that keeps a sense of expectation over a plurality of games by notifying whether or not to do so by a result of battle effect.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, since the battle effect in the conventional gaming machine such as the patent document is determined in advance by a continuous lottery performed at the start of the battle effect, the player is interested in the content of the battle effect. It will focus only on the result of the game without going, and there is a risk that the battle performance itself will be unattractive.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling the period of AT or the like by a method rich in gaming.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal state as a state in which a game is performed. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting the starting operation by the player, and the reel by rotating the reel based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the symbol change means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is selected from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) to be determined, and stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit) that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel. 91) and the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. A reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the displayed symbol, and an effective provided in the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on a combination of symbols stopped on the line, winning determination means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize ( For example, the main control circuit 91), an advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state in response to a predetermined condition, first effect information (for example, enemy ball), and second effect Production information to be registered with respect to a plurality of games from a current game to a game ahead a predetermined number of times from a plurality of types of production information (for example, production balls) including information (for example, teammate balls) with a predetermined probability. The first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical value information (for example, HP of the teammate character) in the effect information registration means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) to be determined and the game in which the first effect information is registered as the effect information. In addition, in the game in which the second effect information is registered as the effect information, numerical subtraction means (for example, the sub control circuit 10) subtracts the second predetermined value from the second numerical value information (for example, the HP of the enemy character). 1) and when the first numerical information is less than a threshold value as a result of the subtraction by the numerical value subtracting means, the advantageous state is ended, and when the second numerical information is less than the threshold value, the advantageous state is newly started. If the first numerical value information is less than the change threshold as a result of subtraction by the state control means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) and the numerical value subtraction means, the effect information registration means registers the first effect information. And a probability changing means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for changing the probability determined as.

  In such a gaming machine, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information of the first numerical information and the second numerical information first falls below the threshold, and continues when the second numerical information first falls below the threshold. . Here, the subtraction of the first numerical information and the second numerical information is performed based on the type of the registered effect information, and the first numerical information is subtracted in the game in which the first effect information is registered. The second numerical value information is subtracted in the game in which the 2 effect information is registered. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the continuation of the advantageous state is controlled based on the type of effect information registered. Thus, unlike a conventional gaming machine in which presence / absence of continuation is determined in advance, the gaming machine according to the present invention has an advantageous state because the presence / absence of continuation differs according to the flow of the game in the advantageous state. It is possible to make the control of the period of the game rich.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first numerical information is less than the change threshold, the probability of determining the first effect information as the effect information to be registered is changed. Thereby, for example, it becomes difficult to determine the first performance information, and thereafter, the first numerical information becomes difficult to be subtracted, and the advantageous state is easily continued. On the other hand, for example, since the first performance information is easily determined, the first numerical information is then easily subtracted, and the advantageous state is difficult to continue. In this way, by changing the probability of determining the production information based on the value of the first numerical information, it is possible to make the control of the advantageous period more rich in gaming.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, an opponent determining unit (for example, a subordinate) that determines one attribute information from a plurality of types of attribute information (for example, the types of enemy characters) associated with the second numerical information. A control circuit 101), wherein the probability changing means changes the probability to the first probability when the attribute information determined by the opponent determining means is first attribute information, and the opponent determining means When the determined attribute information is second attribute information, the probability is changed to a second probability different from the first probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the probability after the change for determining the production information varies depending on the type of attribute information associated with the second numerical information, for example, according to the opponent in the battle production Probability after change can be made different. As a result, even if the first numerical information is reduced to the change threshold value and the advantageous state is about to end, it is possible to produce an effect that it is easy to reverse depending on the opponent in the battle effect. Can be made more playable.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the change threshold value that triggers the probability changing means to change the probability differs according to attribute information determined by the opponent determining means.

  According to such a gaming machine, the change threshold value varies depending on the type of attribute information associated with the second numerical information, and therefore, for example, the probability of determining the effect information according to the opponent in the battle effect. The timing for making changes can be made different. Thereby, for example, since the timing at which the reverse rotation easily occurs in the battle effect can be set to various timings, it is possible to further enhance the control of the advantageous period.

[Appendix 17]
The pachi-slot 1 of appendix 17 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In the pachislot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine is also known in which various decorative members (for example, movable accessories) are provided in a gaming machine and the decorative members are moved in accordance with the progress of the game to improve the game. For example, a patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-237715) discloses a gaming machine that notifies a player of an internal winning combination by operating a movable combination based on an internal lottery result. Yes.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, it is only necessary to operate a movable accessory in order to notify the result of the internal lottery, and for the player, the notification content is too easy to understand and gradually gets tired. There was a risk that interest in the actors would fade. If the player's interest is diminished, the operating rate of the gaming machine is also reduced. Therefore, in a gaming machine equipped with a movable accessory, a device that does not diminish interest in the movable accessory is required.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of continuing the game without getting the player bored.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a game state having a normal state (for example, a normal game state) and an advantageous state (for example, a CZ or ART game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. An effect for registering effect information used in a predetermined game from a plurality of effect information (for example, effect balls such as lottery balls 1 to 4 and finalized balls) having different expectations regarding the transition to the advantageous state. Information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for displaying the registered effect information when a predetermined condition (for example, operation of the apocalypse) is satisfied in the normal state. In a game in which the display means displays the effect information, a transfer lottery means (for example, a subsidiary lottery for performing a lottery to the advantageous state based on the displayed effect information) Control circuit 101), gaming state control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous state based on the result of the transition lottery of the transition lottery means, and a movable type capable of a predetermined operation The accessory (for example, the rotating accessory 200), the accessory control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101, the rotating accessory control board 78) for controlling the operation of the movable accessory, and the movable accessory emits light. A light emitting device (for example, an LED provided behind the eyeball main body 203) and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission of the light emitting device (for example, the sub control circuit 101, the control of the LEDs provided behind the eyeball main body 203) Board), an accessory movable lottery means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for determining whether or not to operate the movable accessory in a game in which the display means does not display the effect information, Movable When it is determined that the moving means operates the movable accessory, the promotion lottery means for performing the promotion lottery as to whether or not to rewrite the registered production information into production information having a higher expectation level regarding the transition to the advantageous state. (For example, sub-control circuit 101), wherein the effect information registration means rewrites the registered effect information based on a result of the promotion lottery of the promotion lottery means, and the accessory control means When it is determined that the movable accessory lottery means operates the movable accessory, the movable accessory is operated, and the light emission control means is based on the determination result of the accessory movable lottery means. When the movable accessory is operated, the light emission of the light emitting device is controlled based on the result of the promotion lottery by the promotion lottery means.

  In such a gaming machine, when a movable accessory is operated, a promotion lottery of effect information used for a transition lottery in an advantageous state is performed. Here, in the game in which the display means displays the production information, since the lottery for transition to the advantageous state is performed based on the displayed production information, the player has a strong interest in the promotion lottery of the production information. Will be held. On the other hand, the movable lottery operates based on the result of determination of the movable article lottery means when the display means does not display the effect information. Therefore, the promoted lottery is not displayed on the display means. Will be performed on the information. By notifying the fact that the promotion lottery for the hidden information is being performed using a movable accessory, the situation is advantageous to the player (winning the promotion lottery) for the player. The expectation about what is going on will last, and the game will continue without getting bored. Also, by controlling the light emission of the light emitting device according to the result of the promotion lottery, the expectation that the situation is advantageous can be inferred from the light emission (for example, color) of the movable accessory, If it can be inferred that it is advantageous, the player will have a strong interest in the later game, so that the player can continue the game without getting bored.

[Appendix 18]
The pachislot 1 of appendix 18 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In the pachislot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. Yes. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs in a high probability replay time (RT: replay time) in which the probability that an AT is replayed (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is sometimes referred to as an ART machine.

  A gaming machine equipped with such an AT (ART) function may perform AT lottery to determine whether or not to perform AT during a bonus game, and may notify the result of AT lottery at the end of the bonus game. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-183284), if the remaining payout number is 16 to 30 during the bonus game, there is a possibility that the bonus game may end with the remaining two games. A gaming machine has been proposed that switches the video display to a challenge notification screen that notifies the presence or absence of AT (ART).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, since the number of medals awarded during the bonus game varies depending on the internal winning combination, depending on the internal winning combination after switching the video display to the challenge notification screen, the number of medals to be awarded is the remaining payout number. May not be reached. In such a case, if the presence / absence of AT win is announced as in Patent Document 1, the process at the end of the bonus game will be executed even though the bonus game has not ended, It will give distrust to the player.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying the player of the end of a state advantageous to the player such as a bonus. To do.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine in which the maximum value of the number of gaming media granted in a unit game is a predetermined number, and a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on the reel, and start operation detection means (for example, main control circuit 91) for detecting a start operation by the player , A start switch 64), a symbol changing means (for example, main control circuit 91) for changing the symbol by rotating the reel based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, and the start operation detecting means. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by Stop operation detection means (for example, main control circuit 91) provided for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and stopped by the stop operation detection means Reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the timing when the operation is detected; When the variation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control unit, the internal symbol combination determined by the internal symbol combination determining unit is based on the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line provided in the symbol display unit. A winning determination means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not a prize has been won, and the internal winning combination determining means determined by the winning determination means. If it is determined that the internal winning combination has been won, profit granting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for granting a number of game media corresponding to the combination of symbols stopped on the active line, and a predetermined condition Profit state starting means (for example, main control circuit 91) that starts a profit state (for example, a bonus state) as an opportunity, and counting means (for example, counting the number of game media granted by the profit giving means during the profit state) , Main control circuit 91), profit state ending means (for example, main control circuit 91) for ending the profit state when the number of game media counted by the counting means exceeds a threshold value (for example, 59), Production control means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for controlling the production executed during the profit state, the production control means based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, When the number of game media counted by the counting means at the detection timing exceeds a value obtained by subtracting a predetermined number from the threshold value, the profit state end effect as an effect at the end of the game according to the detected start operation And the number of game media counted by the counting means exceeds the threshold value as a result of the game medium being given by the profit giving means in the game according to the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means. The registered profit state end effect is executed when the registered profit state end effect is executed and the number of gaming media counted by the counting means is equal to or less than the threshold value. It changes to a continuation effect, and the said profit state continuation effect is performed.

  In such a gaming machine, if the number of game media granted during the profit state may exceed the threshold at the timing when the start operation is detected, the profit state end effect is provided as an effect at the end of the game. Register. At this time, depending on the number of game media actually granted in the game, the number of game media granted during the profit state may not exceed the threshold value. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, Based on the result of granting the game medium, the registered profit state end effect is changed to the profit state continuation effect. That is, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the profit state end effect is registered once at the start of a game where the profit state may end, but the profit state does not end as a result of the game, The profit state continuation effect is executed without executing the profit state end effect. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an effect at the end of the profit state from being executed even if the profit state has not ended, and as a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the end of the profit state. .

[Appendix 19]
The pachi-slot 1 of appendix 19 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  A gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used in the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes called an inter-flag RT, and a game can be played with a high replay winning probability until a bonus determined as an internal winning combination (carry-over) is won.

  In addition, a gaming machine that notifies the player of information advantageous to the player such as information for establishing an internal winning combination along with the replay time is also known. Informing the player of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). A gaming machine that performs AT during the replay time is sometimes referred to as an ART machine.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In recent years, gaming machines that perform AT during the above-described inter-flag RT are also known. In such a gaming machine, if a bonus determined as an internal winning combination is won, the inter-flag RT is terminated, so that the player performs a stop operation so that the bonus is not won. Will do. By the way, since the knowledge about the gaming machine differs depending on the player, in the gaming machine that requests a predetermined stop operation during the flag-to-flag RT, there is a possibility that a player with little knowledge about the gaming machine may be disadvantaged. For example, a player who has knowledge about a gaming machine can play a game while maintaining the RT between flags by performing a stop operation so that a bonus is not won, but a player who has no knowledge about a gaming machine There is a possibility that a bonus will be won without performing this stop operation. In this case, the inter-flag RT may end, and the player may be disadvantaged.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the disadvantages experienced by a player who has no knowledge about gaming machines.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels). , The display window 4), start operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting a start operation by the player, and rotation of the reel based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the symbol change means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is determined from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) and stop operation detecting means (for example, provided for the plurality of reels) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel For example, the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. Reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the symbol display means Based on the combination of symbols stopped on the active line provided in the winning combination determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won When the winning determination means determines that the specific combination has won, the profit state is started, and when the end condition is satisfied in the profit state, the profit state is terminated. Profit control means (for example, main control circuit 91), a low RT state (for example, RT2) with a low probability that replay related to replay is determined as the internal winning combination, and the replay are determined as the internal winning combination RT control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for controlling the transition of the gaming state between the high RT state (for example, RT4) that is higher than the low RT state, and a predetermined condition (for example, ART The first advantage state (for example, enemy determination ART) and the second advantageous state (for example, battle ART) performed following the first advantage state, which are triggered by lottery) Advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for shifting the effect state relating to the game to the advantageous state (for example, the ART gaming state) in which the information of the stop operation is notified, and the first advantageous First advantageous state control means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the state, and second advantageous state control means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for controlling the progress of the game in the second advantageous state. The RT control means shifts the gaming state to a high RT state when a predetermined combination (for example, a combination related to JACIN) is determined as an internal winning combination during the profit state, and the profit state When a combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination (for example, C_JACIN1 to C_JACIN3) is displayed by the symbol display means, the gaming state is shifted to a low RT state, and the advantageous state starting means is the profit state If the predetermined condition is satisfied at the end of the profit state, the effect state is shifted to the advantageous state after the profit state is ended, and the first advantageous state control means is configured to perform the first existence control. In the state, first effect information registration means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for registering effect information (for example, effect ball) in a plurality of times of games from the current game to a game of a predetermined number of times ahead, as the effect information Numerical addition means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for adding a predetermined number to first numerical information (for example, HP of a teammate character) in a game in which first performance information (for example, teammate ball) is registered, Second advantageous state starting means (for example, sub-control) for ending the first advantageous state and starting the second advantageous state in a game in which second effect information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8) is registered as information. Circuit 101), and the second advantageous state control means registers second production information registration information for a plurality of games from a current game to a game ahead a predetermined number of times during the second advantageous state. A first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical value information in a game in which third effect information (for example, enemy ball) is registered as means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) and the effect information, and the effect Numerical subtraction means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for subtracting the second predetermined value from the second numerical information in the game in which the fourth effect information (for example, teammate ball) is registered as information, and subtraction by the numerical subtraction means As a result, when the first numerical information is less than a threshold, the advantageous state is terminated, and when the second numerical information is less than the threshold, the first advantageous state is newly started (for example, a sub-control circuit). 101).

  In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the profit state, the state shifts to a high RT state, but when a combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed, the state shifts to a low RT state. End up. Therefore, a player who has knowledge about a gaming machine can maintain a high RT state by playing a game while avoiding the display of a combination of symbols according to a predetermined role, but has no knowledge about a gaming machine. The player may display a combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination and may fall from the high RT state to the low RT state.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present invention executes an advantageous state in which information on an advantageous stop operation related to the provision of game media is notified. This advantageous state ends when the first numerical information of the first numerical information and the second numerical information first falls below the threshold, and continues when the second numerical information first falls below the threshold. Therefore, the value of the first numerical information will affect the duration of the advantageous state, and the first advantageous state where the addition of the first numerical information is performed is to extend the duration of the advantageous state. It can be said that this is a chance period.

  Here, the advantageous state is executed depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. When the predetermined condition is satisfied at the end of the profit state (the low RT state or the high state) Executed regardless of whether it is in the RT state). Therefore, even if a player who has no knowledge about the gaming machine falls to the low RT state during the profit state, the chance period (the first advantageous state) for extending the advantageous state duration after the profit state ends ) Can be executed, and disadvantages experienced by a player who does not have knowledge about the gaming machine can be reduced.

[Appendix 20]
The pachislot 1 of appendix 20 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In the pachislot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine has been known that notifies a player of information advantageous to the player so as not to miss the combination determined as an internal winning combination. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is notified of information advantageous to the player. ) Is generally performed to achieve a gaming state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  Here, in a gaming machine having a plurality of gaming states, a gaming machine in which a combination of symbols displayed according to a player's stop operation is different is widely known, and a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination For example, if the first symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation, AT or ART is executed, and if the second symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation, AT or ART is executed. There is also a game machine that does not.

  In the gaming machine that controls the gaming state according to the combination of symbols displayed in this way, the player can avoid that the sub control board grasps that the combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed. There are known fraudulent acts, such as command spills, that get unfair profits. For example, in the case of the gaming machine described above, when a combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed, by preventing the sub-control board side from acquiring a command including information on the displayed symbol combination, It can be avoided that the player is in a disadvantageous state, and as a result, the player gains an unfair advantage.

  Therefore, when an illegal act is performed by a player during a game and a communication error (sequence error) occurs during communication between the main control board and the sub control board, a gaming machine that notifies that an error has occurred It is already known (see, for example, Patent Document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-059616)). In such a gaming machine, a liquid crystal display device, sound, or a decorative lamp (LED) is used to notify that a sequence error has occurred, and the game store clerk is made aware that the cheating is being performed. Therefore, an illegal act that induces a sequence error is executed, and the player can be prevented from illegally obtaining the profit of the game.

  Note that in a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine, a game is performed by performing a stop operation three times following the operation of the start lever, so the order of commands transmitted from the main control board to the sub control board is determined. By confirming the order of commands acquired by the sub control board, it is possible to specify whether or not a sequence error has occurred.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the case of the gaming machine as described above, even if the notification of the sequence error is executed by the sound and the decoration lamp when the liquid crystal display device is not mounted, it is confused with the effects of other gaming machines in the game hall. As a result, there is a problem that the effect of notifying the sequence error to the store clerk is not transmitted, and the player can illegally obtain the profit of the game by the illegal act.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent illegally obtaining a profit of a game by an illegal act.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a low probability that a replay related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination (for example, an RT0 gaming state or an RT1 gaming state) and a probability that the replay is determined as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine having a high RT state (for example, RT4 gaming state) higher than the normal state, and a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, A symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of displayed symbols, a start operation detection means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 16S) for detecting a start operation by the player, On the condition that the start operation is detected by the start operation detecting means, the symbol changing means for changing the symbol by rotating the reel (for example, a main control circuit) 1), internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, Stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, stop switch 64) that is provided corresponding to each reel and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning combination determining means determined by the internal winning combination determining means Based on the winning combination and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the reel stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel. For example, the effective control provided in the symbol display means based on the fact that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the main control circuit 91) and the reel stop control means. When the predetermined condition is satisfied during the normal state (for example, when RT4 transition lip is displayed), the normal state RT starting means (for example, main control circuit 91) for shifting the gaming state from the high RT state to the high RT state, and when it is determined that the predetermined symbol combination has stopped during the high RT state, When the gaming state is shifted to the normal state and it is determined that the specific symbol combination is stopped, the RT end means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for maintaining the high RT state, the normal state or the high state When a first lottery performed during the RT state (for example, a lottery for transition to ART) is won, a specific effect state (for example, an ART game state) for notifying information about an advantageous stop operation for the effect state related to the game The probability of winning the first lottery when winning the specific lottery state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) to be transferred to and the second lottery (for example, avoidance point lottery) performed during the high RT state A high probability state transition means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for transitioning to a high probability state (for example, a high probability gaming state), and when it is determined that the predetermined symbol combination has stopped during the high probability state , A low probability state transition means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for transitioning to a low probability state with a low probability of winning the first lottery, and a game order determination means (for example, sub-control) for determining the progression order of one game Circuit 101), and the low probability state transition means determines that the game order determination means determines that the game is not progressing in a predetermined order during the high probability state (for example, a sequence error occurrence). In time), and wherein the shifting from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first lottery performed in the normal state or the high RT state is won, the game machine shifts to a specific effect state (so-called ART) in which information on an advantageous stop operation is notified. In addition, if the second lottery is won during the high RT state, the state shifts to a high probability state with a high probability of winning the first lottery, and therefore the high RT state is set as a transition chance section to the specific performance state (ART). be able to.

  Here, if a predetermined symbol combination is stopped during the high RT state (= high probability state), the RT termination means shifts from the high RT state to the normal state, but the symbol combination displayed due to fraud etc. is reduced to zero. If this happens (it cannot be grasped), the high probability state is temporarily maintained. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is determined whether or not the progress of one game has progressed in a predetermined order. Even if the progress result (for example, the displayed symbol combination) is zeroed, the high probability state is not unfairly maintained, and the player gains an unfair advantage by cheating. This can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the low probability state, the first lottery is performed on the condition that a predetermined combination (for example, a rare combination or more) is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. And in the high probability state, the first lottery is performed on the condition that any of a plurality of combinations (for example, all combinations) including a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the high probability state, the first lottery is performed based on more types of roles than in the low probability state, so the high probability state is unfairly maintained. And the player will get unfair profits. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the progress of the game is not appropriate, the high probability state is unreasonably maintained because the transition is made from the high probability state to the low probability state regardless of the symbol combination. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an unfair advantage due to fraud.

[Appendix 21]
The pachi-slot 1 of appendix 21 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In the pachislot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In such gaming machines, various effects are generally performed in accordance with the progress of the game. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-144940), a swinging effect (vibration) A display device is disclosed in which different image data is arranged and overlapped in a plurality of layers when display is performed, and the screen display can be appropriately swung while preventing an increase in the data volume. .

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, as for the effect in the gaming machine, it is required to switch the effect according to the progress of the game such as when the reel starts rotating or when the reel stops, but in Patent Document 1, the effect is switched according to the progress of the game. Is not disclosed at all, and further ingenuity is required.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately switching effects as the game progresses.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11) for displaying an effect, and a first effect and a second effect that can be switched from a pre-switching effect to a post-switching effect as the game progresses. An effect selection means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for selecting an effect to be displayed in a predetermined game from a plurality of effects, and a display control means for controlling the display means based on the effect selected by the effect selection means ( For example, a sub-control circuit 101) and detection means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for detecting a change request (for example, a start command, a reel stop command) of an effect being displayed on the display means as the game progresses The display control means, when the detection means detects the switching request, when the first effect is selected by the effect selection means, If the effect that is displayed on the display means is switched by switching from one layer that executes the effect to the other layer that executes the effect after switching, and the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, the same The effect displayed on the display means is switched by switching the effect to be executed in the layer from the effect before switching to the effect after switching.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention switches a layer in which an effect is being executed, thereby switching the effect according to the progress of the game, and a second effect that switches the effect according to the progress of the game in the same layer. , And an effect to be displayed is selected from a plurality of effects including the first effect and the second effect. Here, when the effect is switched by switching the layer as in the first effect, although it is possible to suppress the occurrence of flickering of the image before and after the effect change, the effect must be executed in each layer. The processing load increases. On the other hand, when the effects to be executed in the same layer are switched as in the second effect, the processing load is suppressed, but there are cases where flickering of the image occurs before and after the switching of the effects.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, a preferable switching method is set in advance for each effect according to the connection between the effects before and after the change, the processing load of each effect, and the like. Thereby, for example, for an effect (first effect) that is likely to cause flickering before and after the switching and gives the player an unpleasant feeling, a method for switching layers can be set in advance. For an effect that does not matter (second effect), a method for switching effects in the same layer can be set. As a result, according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the flicker at the time of switching the effects, and to suppress the processing load and cause a processing drop in response to the switching of the effects. This can be prevented, and as a result, the presentation can be appropriately switched in accordance with the progress of the game.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11) that prompts the player to perform a predetermined operation, and the detection means performs a first operation according to the operation prompted by the notification means. The first switching request is detected, and the second switching request is detected in response to the progress of the game without performing the operation urged by the notification means. The display control means is configured to detect the first switching request. When the request is detected, the effect displayed on the display unit is switched from the pre-switching effect to the post-switching effect in response to the first switching request, and the detection unit detects the second switching request. Is characterized in that the effect displayed on the display means is switched from the pre-switching effect to the post-switching effect in response to the second switching request.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine or a pachinko machine, a player may be prompted to operate a button such as a chance button, and the presentation may be switched when the button is operated. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the effect of switching can be made different depending on whether the button operation is performed or not, the gaming property is diversified and the interest of the game is improved. Also in this case, since a preferable switching method is set for each production, the production can be appropriately switched according to the progress of the game.

[Appendix 22]
The pachi-slot 1 of appendix 22 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In the pachislot machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In such a gaming machine, it is generally performed to perform various effects according to the progress of the game. Particularly, in recent years, not only display devices but also other devices (for example, There is also known a gaming machine that produces an effect using an accessory). For example, a patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-200614) discloses a gaming machine that performs effects and displays in conjunction with a display device and a movable body that can be moved to a position partially overlapping the display device. Yes.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In such a gaming machine, while the presentation is being executed, the display device and other devices are linked and no inconvenience occurs, but in the non-production state such as when various errors occur or when the menu screen is activated The presence of the other device makes it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the display device (for example, error notification or menu screen display), and the presence of the other device may disturb the display.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that does not interfere with display on a display device.

[Means for solving problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11) that displays an image, and a concave portion that is provided on the front surface of the display device and reflects light along the plate surface toward the player side. A transmission panel (for example, light guide plate 401) in which a latent image (for example, latent image 402) is formed by (for example, reflective recess 402a), and a light emitting device (for example, LED 403) that emits light along the plate surface of the transmission panel. Display control means for controlling the display of the display device (for example, sub-control circuit 101), light-emission control means for controlling light emission of the light-emitting device (for example, sub-control circuit 101, panel control board 79), Detection means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for detecting a call request for an effect image (for example, an error notification screen or a menu screen), and the light emission control means is based on the effect data. Effect execution means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for making a light emission output request, light emission output control means (for example, panel control board 79) for causing the light emitting device to emit light in response to the output request of the effect execution means, And the light emission output control means turns off the light emitting device in preference to the call request over the output request when the detection means detects the call request when receiving the output request from the effect execution means, The effect execution means makes a light emission output request based on effect data regardless of whether the detection means detects a non-effect image call request, and the display control means When an image call request is detected, a non-effect image is displayed on the display device.

  According to such a gaming machine, an image corresponding to a latent image formed on the front surface of the display device by emitting light from the light emitting device to the transmission panel provided on the front surface of the display device. Is displayed, the display device and the transmissive panel can be linked together to produce an effect, which is more effective than when the effect is simply performed on the display device. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, when there is a request to call a non-effect image such as an error notification screen or a menu screen, the non-effect image is displayed on the display device and the light emitting device is turned off. Thereby, when a non-effect image is displayed on the display device, the display of the display device is not disturbed, and the visibility of the non-effect image is not impaired.

  In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the call request for the non-effect image is prioritized over the output request for light emission, so even if there is a call request during the execution of the effect using the transmission panel, the transmission panel The production using is interrupted and the visibility of the non-production image is not impaired. In addition, since the output request for light emission from the effect execution means to the light emission output control means is made regardless of the call request for the non-effect image, there is a call request during execution of the effect using the transmissive panel. However, it is not necessary to add an error process or the like to the effect process itself, so that the process can be simplified and the occurrence of bugs can be suppressed. In other words, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when there is a call request during the execution of the effect using the transmissive panel, the light emission output is suppressed while continuing the light emission animation based on the effect data internally. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the display of the non-effect image from being disturbed, and at the end of the display of the non-effect image, the effect using the transmissive panel can be resumed from the continuation of the internally continued processing. It is possible to produce an effective effect using the display device and the transmissive panel.

[Appendix 23]
The pachi-slot 1 of appendix 23 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine provided with a decoration portion corresponding to the model of the gaming machine is also known in order to enhance the gaming property. Examples of the decorative portion include those that perform a mechanical operation, light emission, or both, and such a decorative portion is generally called “a combination (movable combination)”. As a gaming machine using an accessory, for example, a patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-042691) discloses a gaming machine in which a movable accessory that rotates at the top of a front door is installed.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the movable accessory, the motor and the gear mechanism are consumed due to the load associated with the continuous operation for a long time, and in some cases, it becomes impossible to perform an effect specific to the movable accessory due to the occurrence of a failure. The player will be uncomfortable. Therefore, a device that can reduce the consumption of the movable accessory is required.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the consumption of a movable accessory.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal state as a state in which a game is performed. In addition, the movable part (for example, the cover member 198) includes a plurality of positions including an initial position (for example, a position at which the eyeball main body 203 becomes invisible to the player) and a predetermined position (for example, a position at which the eyeball main body 203 is exposed). A movable accessory that can be moved to the position of the movable accessory (for example, the rotating accessory 200); , Time measuring means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for measuring a no-operation time indicating a period during which no player's operation is accepted, and the accessory control means is configured to move the movable device based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Ceremonial The moving part is moved from an initial position to a predetermined position (for example, a position where the cover member 198 is in a half-opened state), and the time measuring means has no operation time when the movable part of the movable accessory moves to the predetermined position. When the no-operation time counted by the timing means reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes), the accessory control means returns the movable part of the movable accessory to the initial position. A featured gaming machine.

  When the no-operation time reaches a predetermined time, there is a high possibility that the player has not performed any operation and is not playing a game. In this way, if the unique performance by the movable accessory is continued until the game is not being played, the movable accessory will be consumed, and therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the no-operation time is predetermined. When the time is reached, the movable part of the movable accessory is returned to the initial position, and consumption of the movable accessory is reduced. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the movable accessory from being consumed unnecessarily while improving the interest of the game by a specific effect using the movable accessory.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined condition is that the state in which a game is performed is the advantageous state and a game start operation is performed.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is performed during the advantageous state, the movable part of the movable accessory is positioned at a predetermined position, and a specific effect using the movable accessory is obtained during the advantageous state. It can be performed and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix 24]
The pachi-slot 1 of appendix 24 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, a gaming machine that notifies a player of information advantageous to a player so as not to miss a combination determined as an internal winning combination is known. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine having such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) with a high probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is notified of information advantageous to the player. ) Is generally performed to achieve an advantageous state (ART) advantageous to the player.

  In a gaming machine having such an ART function, a chance zone with a high expectation of transition to the ART state is provided, and control is performed with a high probability when the specific condition is satisfied in this chance zone. Yes. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-048945), when a specific symbol combination (RT operation symbol 1) is targeted in the chance zone (CZ) and a specific symbol combination is displayed, the replay is internally performed. A gaming machine that performs control to shift to high RT with a high probability as a winning combination is disclosed.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
A game machine using a chance zone is also known as a so-called complete-run chance zone, in which a game is always shifted to an ART state when a predetermined number of games are performed in the chance zone. However, in such a finish-type chance zone, the player simply wants to continue until the chance zone finishes, and the gameability in the chance zone becomes monotonous. .

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period that is an opportunity to shift to an advantageous state advantageous to a player. For the purpose.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal state as a state in which a game is performed. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the starting operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting the starting operation by the player, and the reel by rotating the reel based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the symbol change means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is selected from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) to be determined, and stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit) that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel. 91) and the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. A reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the displayed symbol, and an effective provided in the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on a combination of symbols stopped on the line, winning determination means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize ( For example, the main control circuit 91) and a lottery state start means (for example, a subordinate state) for starting an advantageous state lottery state (for example, CZ) for performing a right grant lottering for granting the right to perform the advantageous state with a predetermined condition as a trigger. Control circuit 101) and a first right grant lottery that grants a right to perform the advantageous state with a predetermined probability when the predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous state lottery state (for example, The second right grant lottery that grants the right to perform the advantageous state with a specific probability when a predetermined number (for example, 30 games) of unit games elapses in the advantageous state lottery state. Advantageous state lottery means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) that performs (for example, lottery for transition to ART performed when CZ completes running), and a predetermined symbol combination is displayed on the effective line. When the predetermined number of unit games have elapsed in the advantageous state lottery state, lottery state ending means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) for ending the advantageous state lottery state and the advantageous state lottery means Rights number management means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) that counts the total number of rights to perform the advantageous state granted as a result of the first right grant lottery and the second right grant lottery performed, and the advantageous state When the lottery state is completed, it is provided with advantageous state control means (for example, sub control circuit 101) for executing the advantageous state for the total number of times counted by the right number management means.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone), the second right grant lottery is performed in response to a predetermined number of unit games that will end the advantageous state lottery state. Thus, a so-called complete race chance zone can be realized in which a lottery to an advantageous state is performed at the finish. At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first right grant lottery is performed not only at the time of completion but also when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous state lottery state. Not only does the state lottery state simply want to continue, but it will also be interested in the first right-giving lottery during the advantageous state lottery state. As a result, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to diversify the game in the advantageous state lottery state, which becomes a trigger for the transition to the advantageous state, and improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state lottery state. it can.

  Further, the advantageous state lottery state may end when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed. However, when it is possible to avoid displaying a predetermined symbol combination, the advantageous state lottery state does not end. Therefore, the advantageous state lottery state can be continued according to the player's stop operation, and the player has a strong interest in the stop operation during the advantageous state lottery state. The interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the advantageous state lottery state is ended, the advantageous state is executed for the total number of rights to perform the advantageous state granted as a result of the right grant lottery performed during the advantageous state lottery state. To do. Here, depending on the gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine that grants only one right to perform the advantageous state during the advantageous state lottery state, but in such a gaming machine, the player is likely to feel dissatisfaction, In the case of a complete run-type chance zone (advantageous state lottery state), even if the run is continued for a long period of time, only one right can be obtained, so the player's satisfaction is also halved. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the right grant lottery is won a plurality of times during the advantageous state lottery state, the player is granted the right to perform the advantageous state for a plurality of times. There is no dissatisfaction with the player. Also, for the player, if the stop operation can be performed so that the advantageous lottery state does not end when the first right grant lottery is performed, then the first right grant lottery and the second right grant lottery are performed. In addition, since the opportunity to receive is obtained, the player is strongly interested in the stop operation during the advantageous state lottery state, and the interest of the game during the advantageous state lottery state can be improved.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a second mode in which the probability of granting the right to perform the advantageous state in the first right grant lottery is higher than the second mode based on the number of unit games that have elapsed in the advantageous state lottery state. A first mode (for example, CZ mode 0) that shifts to (for example, CZ mode 1), and a second that does not shift to the first mode that has a higher probability than the first mode and that has a lower probability than itself. And a mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the transition from the first mode to the second mode during the advantageous state lottery state does not proceed from the second mode to the first mode thereafter, it has elapsed in the advantageous state lottery state. As the number of unit games increases, the probability of winning the first right grant lottery increases. For the player, since it is desirable that the advantageous state lottery state lasts for a long time, the player will have a strong interest in the stop operation during the advantageous state lottery state, and the interest during the advantageous state lottery state can be improved. it can.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the lottery state start means starts the advantageous state lottery state, determining the number of transition times to determine the number of unit games to shift from the first mode to the second mode Means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101 for determining CZ_MAP) and rendering means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101 and the liquid crystal display device 11) for producing an effect different from the first mode in the second mode. It is further provided with the feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the player can grasp or infer that the mode has been shifted from the first mode to the second mode from the rendering mode of the rendering means. Since the second mode is a mode with a high probability that the right to enter the advantageous state is granted, the player can play a game with an expectation about the transition to the advantageous state in the subsequent game. The interest during the state lottery state can be improved.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachi slot, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4 ... Display window, 17L ... Left stop button, 17C ... Middle stop button, 17R ... Right stop button, 200 ... Rotating accessory (movable) Accessory), 91 ... main control circuit, 101 ... sub control circuit, 93 ... main CPU, 102 ... sub CPU

Claims (2)

A gaming machine having a normal state and an advantageous state advantageous to the player as compared to the normal state as a state of performing a game,
A movable accessory capable of moving the movable part to a plurality of positions including an initial position and a predetermined position;
An accessory control means for controlling the operation of the movable accessory;
A time measuring means for measuring a non-operation time indicating a period during which a player's operation is not accepted;
With
The accessory control means moves the movable part of the movable accessory from an initial position to a predetermined position based on establishment of a predetermined condition.
The time measuring means starts measuring the no-operation time when the movable part of the movable accessory moves to a predetermined position,
The accessory control means returns the movable part of the movable accessory to the initial position when the no-operation time counted by the timing means reaches a predetermined time.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The predetermined condition is that a state in which a game is performed is the advantageous state, and a game start operation has been performed.
The gaming machine according to claim 1.